Release Stamp DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORM · RPP-SPEC-62050, Rev. 0 iv DIVISION 22 –...

1 SPF-001 (Rev.D1)

DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORMPrepared For the U.S. Department of Energy, Assistant Secretary for Environmental ManagementBy Washington River Protection Solutions, LLC., PO Box 850, Richland, WA 99352Contractor For U.S. Department of Energy, Office of River Protection, under Contract DE-AC27-08RV14800

TRADEMARK DISCLAIMER: Reference herein to any specific commercial product, process, or service by trade name, trademark, manufacturer, or otherwise, does not necessarily constitute or imply its endorsement, recommendation, or favoring by the United States government or any agency thereof or its contractors or subcontractors. Printed in the United States of America.

Release Stamp

1. Doc No: RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev. 00

2. Title:222-S Ancillary Equipment Remodel Construction Specification

3. Project Number:T1P186

☐ N/A 4. Design Verification Required:☐ Yes ☒ No

5. USQ Number: ☒ N/AN/A-9

6. PrHA Number Rev. ☐ N/APrHA-57348 00

Clearance Review Restriction Type:public

7. ApprovalsTitle Name Signature DateClearance Review Raymer, Julia R Raymer, Julia R 09/21/2018Design Authority Melvin, Max A Melvin, Max A 09/18/2018Checker Devine, Denis P Devine, Denis P 09/06/2018Document Control Approval Hood, Evan Hood, Evan 09/21/2018Environmental Protection Medford, Timothy J Medford, Timothy J 09/17/2018Fire Protection Keene, James R Keene, James R 09/18/2018Originator McDaniel, Larry B McDaniel, Larry B 09/06/2018Other Approver Paulsen, Dan R Paulsen, Dan R 09/17/2018Other Approver Cook, Roderick S Cook, Roderick S 09/18/2018Other Approver Woody, Mathew J Woody, Mathew J 09/17/2018Other Approver Woodworth, Robert Woodworth, Robert 09/06/2018Other Approver Aguilar, Frank Aguilar, Frank 09/07/2018Other Approver Naranjo, Daniel A Naranjo, Daniel A 09/17/2018Other Approver Tworek, Ray F Tworek, Ray F 09/18/2018PrHA Lead Kozlowski, Stephen D Kozlowski, Stephen D 09/19/2018Quality Assurance Welsch, Keith R Welsch, Keith R 09/17/2018Radiological Control Marks, Jeff Marks, Jeff 09/06/2018Responsible Engineering Manager Smith, Gregory E Smith, Gregory E 09/19/2018USQ Evaluator Wheeler, Ronnie Wheeler, Ronnie 09/19/2018

8. Description of Change and JustificationInitial Release

9. TBDs or Holds ☒ N/A

10. Related Structures, Systems, and Componentsa. Related Building/Facilities ☐ N/A b. Related Systems ☒ N/A c. Related Equipment ID Nos. (EIN) ☒ N/A222-S

11. Impacted Documents – Engineering ☒ N/ADocument Number Rev. Title

12. Impacted Documents (Outside SPF):N/A

13. Related Documents ☒ N/ADocument Number Rev. Title

14. DistributionName OrganizationCoughlin, Jessica U TFP PROJECT MANAGEMENTGreenough, Keith J 222-S LABORATORYLucas, Dan 222S LABORATORY ENGINEERING

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 1 of 450

Sep 21, 2018DATE:

FOR FFO

MM

FOR PauPa

ORRRRCooCo

RRRRW

RRRRINFORMATION

Rody, Mody, MIWoWoodworth, odworth,IN

uilar, Frankuilar, FrankN

jo, Daniel Ao, Daniel A

NFRay FFFO

Stephen Dtephen DO

RR

ORRMRMMAMAMAATTIOTIOONONONONLYN/A/A c. . ReROOOO

OOONOOOONONNLYLYYY

A-6007-231 (REV 0)

RPP-SPEC-62050Revision 0

222-S Ancillary Equipment RemodelConstruction Specification

Prepared by

D. P. DeVineARES Corporation for Washington River Protection Solutions, LLC

Date PublishedSeptember 2018

Prepared for the U.S. Department of EnergyOffice of River Protection

Contract No. DE-AC27-08RV14800

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 2 of 450

Approved for Public Release;

Further Dissemination Unlimited

FOR INFORMATION

ton River on River

ONLY

RPP-SPEC-62050, Rev. 0

ii

222-S ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT REMODELCONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION

September 2018

prepared by

ARES CorporationEnergy Services Division

1100 Jadwin Avenue, Suite 400Richland, Washington 99352

(509) 946-3300

prepared for

Washington River Protection Solutions, LLC

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 3 of 450

FOR INFORMATION

epared bepared byy

ationatiovisionvision

e 400400ONLY


iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TotalPages

DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS02 4119 Selective Structure Demolition 802 8213 Asbestos Abatement 13

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE03 1500 Post-Installed Concrete Anchors 303 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete 10

DIVISION 5 – METALS05 1200 Structural Steel Framing 1005 3100 Steel Decking 405 4000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 1205 5000 Metal Fabrications 10

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION07 2100 Thermal Insulation 1107 8413 Penetration Firestopping 907 9200 Joint Sealants 5

DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1208 7100 Door Hardware 1408 8000 Glazing 12

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES09 0000 Materials Legend 109 2900 Gypsum Board 809 5123 Acoustical Tile Ceilings 1009 6513 Resilient Base and Accessories 609 6519.19 Vinyl Composition Tile Flooring 1109 6519.23 Luxury Vinyl Tile Flooring 1009 9123 Painting 9

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES10 1400 Signage 810 2600 Wall and Door Protection 610 2650 Stainless Steel Door Protection 310 4413 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 610 4416 Fire Extinguishers 3

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION21 1313 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems 13

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 4 of 450

FORETALETAL

StructurStructuteel Deckeel Deck

d--FormeFormFabFa INFORMATION

ricatioricati

ND MOIND MOtionn

oppingopping

mesme

ONLY


iv

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING22 0517 Sleeves for Plumbing Piping 322 0518 Escutcheons for Mechanical Piping 222 0523 General-Duty Valves 1022 0553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 922 0719 Piping Insulation 3022 1116 Potable and Process Water Piping 1522 1316 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 1122 4000 Plumbing Fixtures 422 6213 Vacuum Piping System for Laboratory Facilities 7

DIVISION 23 – HVAC23 0700 HVAC Insulation 723 3113 Metal Ducts 1023 3300 Air Duct Accessories 623 3713 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 2

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL26 0519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 1426 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 826 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 726 0533 Identification for Electrical Systems 1326 0553 Identification for Electrical Systems 826 0800 Commissioning of Electrical Systems 826 2416 Panelboards 626 2726 Wiring Devices 526 2816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 526 5100 Interior Lighting 4

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY28 3111 Detection and Alarm 13

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK31 2300 Excavation and Fill 13

DIVISION 41 – MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT41 2231 Crane 6

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 5 of 450

FORMetaMetaAir DucAir DuDiffusers, Riffusers,

RICRI INFORMATION

ALALage Electrage Elect

and Bondinnd Bondiupports foports fo

ElectricalElectricalctrical Syctrical S

trical Syrical Sys

Breakersreakers

TYTYONLY


02 4119 – 1

SECTION 02 4119

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Adjust list below to suit Project.

2. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

4. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.

RELATED DOCUMENTS/CODES AND STANDARDS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

The following documents and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in this Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.

A. American Nuclear Standards Institute (ANSI)/The American Society of Safety Engineers (ASSE)

ANSI/ASSE A10.6 Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 241 Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations

C. Resilient Floor Coverings Institute (RFIC)

“Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings”

SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 6 of 450

FOR SalvaSalv

DemolitiemolitINFORMATION

MENTS/CMENTS/C

isions of tons of01 Speci01 Spec

rs referencs referenerenced doerenced d

d

(ANSI)ANSI)/T/T

ONLYnts for Dts for D

Construonstru


02 4119 – 2

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner’s on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.

3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

4. Locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions and means of egress, as noted on the Drawings, including descriptions and schedule for a phased approach, if needed.

5. Coordination of Owner’s continuing occupancy of central and south portions of existing building.

6. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building.

C. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.

D. Pre-Demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in the contract documents. Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.

2. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

4. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 7 of 450

CCportport

Means ofMeans omovalovINFORMATION

fromfrom

ds: Indicats: Indicaensed to ansed to a

cian Qualcian Qua

with governth goverComplyComply w yy

nn ONLYA 241.241.

roject siroject sitets and prs and pr

ow


02 4119 – 3

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Not used.

DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.

C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Owner will retain access to portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner’s access will not be disrupted.

1. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner and Architect to determine location of building access and removal of all demolition materials.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

C. Notify Construction Field Lead of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: Suspected asbestos-containing materials, lead-based paint, radioactive-contaminated materials, and PCBs may be encountered in this Project. Refer to Contract Documents for all locations of suspected hazardous materials.

1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb, except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

2. Contractor will be required to submit an abatement plan to Construction Field Lead for approval prior to proceeding with work associated with suspected hazardous materials.

a. Submit documentation and qualification of personnel who will perform hazardous materials abatement.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 8 of 450

are nare nmoved anmoved a

ONDITIOONDITI

INFORMATION

tain acceain accea. Condu. Condu

coordinacoording access aaccess a

nspection nspection

epancies bpanciesdemolitdemoliONLY

ning matening mabe encoube encou

ected hazacted haz

o no


02 4119 – 4

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PRODUCTS

Not Used.

EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

B. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged.

C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

D. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings and preconstruction photographs.

1. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.

E. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 9 of 450

FORTIOTIO

ATIONION

xisting xistingINFORMATION

concotive demtive dem

ord the cord the cooand salvand salva

anical, elenical, elesign are ensign are en

romptlyromptly susuyy

ord existinrd existinphs.hs.

al ofl oONLYf existiexistWork, maWork, m

details reqetails re

esul


02 4119 – 5

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in the contract documents.Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

5. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

TEMPORARY WALL

A. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration into existing laboratories, and to separate areas from fumes and noise.

B. Construct dustproof partitions of not less than nominal 4-in. steel studs at 16-in. on center, 5/8-in. Type X gypsum wallboard on the non-work side, with joints taped and 1/2-in. fire-retardant plywood on the demolition side. Temporary wall shall be screwed to existing metal ceiling grid and tile. Verify with the Construction Field Lead if any additional bracing is required.

C. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks.

1. Provide tack mats on both sides of access doors from demolition areas to occupied spaces.

D. Protect air-handling equipment.

E. Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of building to be selectively demolished.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 10 of 450

FORrere

ComplCompland cooliand coo

ovideidINFORMATION

and and erve staberve stab

tion and fion and fd movemed movem

d new supnew sup

s to limit to limit as from fums from fu

ONLYominal 4minal

he nonhe non-wwolition sidolition s

VerifyVerify wyred.d.


02 4119 – 6

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site.

7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates for reuse of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect’s approval.

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 11 of 450

FORNNrequrequremainremaindesigneddesigned

nimizmINFORMATION

e dise dis

from the from theexisting fexisting f

orches unorches uned spaces, d spaces

f hidden sphidden spatch and pch and p

s

using cusingONLY

cutt

erwise danerwise dan

groundgroundact


02 4119 – 7

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.

3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition, and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.

B. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, broken up, and removed.

C. Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI and its Addendum. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI.

DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner’s property, remove demolished materials from Project site, and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 12 of 450

FOR

age aage ms mayms may bbyy

olition,ition, ananion operaion operINFORMATION

OLITIOOLITIO

sh in sectish in sectn and at reand at re

n saw cutsaw cut

ww-cut percut pe

rings and ngs andndum. Redum. R

y one ofy one oONLY

f th

cycled, rcycled, rrty


02 4119 – 8

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner’s property and legally dispose of them.

CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE

A. Existing Construction to be Removed: As indicated on demolition plans and notes on Drawing Number H-2-837540, Sheet 1.

B. The following items are to be carefully removed, stored and reinstalled by the Contractor as required in Paragraph 3.5.C of this Section:

1. Temperature Element – Room 6E.

2. Pressure Element & Pressure Differential Transmitter – Room 10A.

3. Pressure Elementary Pressure Differential Transmitter – Room 6A.

4. Temperature Element – Room 5H.

C. The following items shall be salvaged by the Contractor and turned over to the Owner:

1. None.

END OF SECTION 02 4119

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 13 of 450

e followe followtractor asctor as

mperamperINFORMATION

turetur

e Elemene Elemen

mentaryentary PPy

ent nt –– RooR

lvaged bvaged byy

ONLY


02 8213 – 1

SECTION 02 8213

ASBESTOS ABATEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK

A. Drawings, general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, the Contract Statement of Work, and other Division 02 Specification Sections shall apply to the work of this Section. The contract documents show the work to be performed under the contract and related requirements and conditions impacting the project. Related requirements and conditions include: applicable codes, standards, regulations and rules, notices and permits, existing site conditions, restrictions on use of the site, requirements for partial Facility Manager/Occupant (Owner) occupancy during the work, coordination with other work, and the phasing of the work. In the event the Asbestos Abatement Contractor discovers a conflict in the contract documents and/or requirements or codes, the conflict must be brought to the immediate attention of the Construction Field Lead for resolution. Whenever there is a conflict or overlap in the requirements, the most stringent shall apply. Any actions taken by the Contractor without obtaining guidance from the Construction Field Lead shall become the sole risk and responsibility of the Contractor. All costs incurred due to such action are also the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Asbestos-containing material (ACM) and asbestos-contaminated elements (ACE) that are requiring abatement and disposal is generally inclusive of, but not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Pipe insulation. Pipe insulation is painted pink, and is in good shape. All minor debris has been vacuumed.

C. The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the actual quantities to be abated. Nothing in this section may be interpreted as limiting the extent of work otherwise required by this contract and related documents.

D. Removal, clean-up, and disposal of ACM and ACE. All work shall be completed in appropriately regulated and controlled areas in coordination with all other types of hazardous material removal and disposal that is included in the Contractor’s work scope (referenced by this Section). Work includes appropriately sealing or encapsulating the area of potential ACM following the initiation of demolished/removed materials that are necessary to prepare for new installations.

E. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, permits, variances, personnel monitoring, and qualified supervision for all work described in this Section and related Sections.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 14 of 450

FOR

remremnditions nditions mits, existis, existi

FacilityFacility M Myyon win INFORMATION

th otth otement Cement C

ents or conts or constructionnstruction

the requirhe requirtractor wiractor w

e sole risksole rison are alson are als

M) and asb and asbsal is geneal is gene

ONLYd pink, apink, a

antities to ntities to extent oxtent


02 8213 – 2

F. Pre-abatement activities include pre-abatement meeting(s), inspection(s), notification(s), permit(s), training of Contractor personnel, submittal approval(s), regulated-area preparation(s), emergency procedure preparation(s), and preparation of approved standard operating procedures for asbestos abatement work.

G. Abatement activities include removal and disposal of ACM/ACE, recordkeeping, reporting, security, monitoring, and inspections.

H. The Contractor shall use the existing facilities outside the building strictly within the limits indicated in contract documents. The Abatement Plan and applicable Work Packages shall indicate partially occupied buildings, and show the limits of regulated areas, the placement of decontamination facilities, the temporary location of bagged ACM, the path of transport, and temporary waste storage area. Any variation from the arrangements described in the Abatement Plan and associated Work Packages shall be reconciled with the Construction Field Lead.


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.


All work under this contract shall be done in strict accordance with all applicable Federal, State, and local codes, standards, and regulations governing asbestos abatement, and as further stipulated herein. All applicable codes, standards, and regulations are adopted into this Specification and will have the same force and effect as this specification. Contractors performing asbestos-related work shall comply with State requirements, including licensing and accreditation. The most recent edition of any relevant regulation, standard, document, or code shall be in effect unless otherwise noted. Where conflict among the requirements or with these specifications exists, the most stringent requirement(s) shall be utilized. Applicable codes, standards, regulations, and procedures shall include, but not necessarily limited to, are those referenced or listed herein.

A. Code of Federal Regulation (CFR) and Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

29 CFR 1910.20 Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records

29 CFR 1910.38 Emergency Action Plans

29 CFR 1910.132 Personal Protective Equipment

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 15 of 450

ation oation oyy variatio variatioy

iated Worated Wor

UMUMINFORMATION

ENTENT

rovisions ovisionsection.ection.

thers referhers refeReferencedReferenc

ated.ated.

n strict acstrict acons governns govern

tandards, tandards, and end eONLY

ffectffectplyply withwithy

ition of anition of anse noted. e noted.

most strinmost strinulationla


02 8213 – 3

29 CFR 1910.134 Respiratory Protection

29 CFR 1910.151 Medical and First Aid

29 CFR 1910.1200 Hazard Communication

29 CFR 1926 Construction Industry Standards

29 CFR 1926.1101 Construction Standard for Asbestos

B. Department of Transportation (DOT), U.S. Department of Energy (DOE), United States Code (USC), and Other Federal Regulations & Orders

40-CFR 61 Subpart A and M National Emission Standard for Hazardous Air (Revised Subpart B) Pollutants - Asbestos

40 CFR 763 Asbestos

40 CFR 763.80 Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act

40 CFR 763.90 Response Actions

40 CFR 763.92 Training and Periodic Surveillance

49 CFR 100, 185 Transportation

42 USC § 9601, et. seq. Resource Conservation and Recovery A

DOE O 435.1 Radioactive Waste Management

C. Washington Administrative Code (WAC)

WAC 173-303 Dangerous Waste Regulations, Radiation Protection – Air Emissions

WAC 296-62 Occupational Health Standards, Safety Standards for Carcinogens

WAC 296-65 Asbestos Removal and Encapsulation Standards

WAC 296-155 Safety Standards for Construction

D. Hanford Documents

HNF-EP-0063 Hanford Site Solid Waste Acceptance Program

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 16 of 450

CFR 6CFR 6vised Subed Su

636 INFORMATION

TraTr

Transporranspor

urce Consurce Cons

e WaWaONLY

ste Mste M

gulations, gulations, nsns


02 8213 – 4

TFC-ESQH-ENV-STD-02 Regulated Substance Management

TFC-ESHQ-IH-STD-05 Asbestos Control – Construction Industry

E. Standards which govern asbestos abatement activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

ANSI Z9.2-79 Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems

ANSI Z88.2 Practices for Respiratory Protection.

2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 586-90 Standard for Safety of HEPA Filter Units, 7th Edition.

F. Standards which govern the fire and safety concerns in abatement work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 101 Life Safety Code

NFPA 241 Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations

NFPA 701 Standard Methods for Fire Tests for Flame Resistant Textiles and Film

G. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Guidance Documents

1. Environmental Protection Agency guidance documents which discuss asbestos abatement work activities are listed below. These documents are made part of this Section by reference. Environmental Protection Agency publications can be ordered from (800) 424-9065.

EPA 530-SW-85-007 Asbestos Waste Management Guidance

EPA 560/5-85-024 Guidance for Controlling ACM in Buildings (Purple Book)

EPA 560-OPTS-86-001 A Guide to Respiratory Protection for the Asbestos Abatement Industry

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 17 of 450

FOR UndeUnd

ULL 586-9 586-INFORMATION

govern thegovern the, the follothe follo

ection Asstion Ass

LifLif

Standard tandarderation, aneration, an

MONLYMethodsethod

xtiles andxtiles and

cumentscuments


02 8213 – 5

TS 799 20T Guide to Managing Asbestos in Place (Green Book), December 2009.

H. Permits/Licenses

1. The Contractor shall have all required permits and licenses to perform asbestos abatement work as required by Federal, State, and local regulations. Contractor shall be a Washington State licensed asbestos abatement contractor currently approved by the State of Washington to perform abatement activities.

I. Emergency Action Plan and Arrangements

1. An Emergency Action Plan shall be developed prior to commencing abatement activities and shall be agreed to by the Contractor and the Construction Field Lead. The plan shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.38 (a) (b).

2. Emergency procedures shall be in written form and prominently posted in the clean room and equipment room of the decontamination unit. Everyone, prior to entering the regulated area, must read and sign these procedures to acknowledge understanding of the regulated area layout, location of emergency exits, and emergency procedures.

3. Emergency planning shall include written notification of police, fire, and emergency medical personnel of planned abatement activities, work schedule, layout of regulated area, and access to the regulated area, particularly barriers that may affect response capabilities.

4. Emergency planning shall include consideration of fire, explosion, hazardous atmospheres, electrical hazards, slips/trips and falls, confined spaces, and heat stress illnesses. Written procedures for response to emergency situations shall be developed and employee training procedures shall be provided.

SUBMITTALS

Submit to the Construction Field Lead a minimum of 14 days prior to the pre-start meeting the following for review and approval. Submittals shall address both contaminated (radiological) and non-contaminated ACM/ACE. Refer to the applicable Specification Sections for requirements to: train personnel, protect personnel, and work within a work space determined (by others) to contain radiological contamination. Also, refer to the applicable Specification Sections for material handling, material packaging, transportation, disposal, and documentation requirements for contaminated materials and/or contaminated equipment.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 18 of 450

FOR AnAabateabatConstruConstru

910.38 910.38INFORMATION

encyency proc procyyroom andoom an

rior to entr to encknowledcknowled

encyency exitsexiyy

hall incluall includdnnel of planel of pla

area, and area, andfect respoct respo

nsidesidONLYratioratio

s, slips/tr, slips/trocedures rocedures

employmployee ey


02 8213 – 6

A. Submit a Pre-Abatement Plan of Action indicating Contractor’s work activities on the Site in preparation for the pre-construction meeting.

B. Submit an Emergency Action Plan in accordance with the requirements in Paragraph 1.2.J.

C. Submit staff organization chart showing all personnel who will be working on the project and their capacity/function. Provide their qualifications, training, accreditations, and licenses, as appropriate. Provide a copy of the “Certificate of Worker’s Acknowledgment,” and the, “Affidavit of Medical Surveillance and Respiratory Protection,” for each person.

D. Submit Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) developed specifically for this project incorporating the requirements of the specifications.

E. Submit the specifics of the materials and equipment to be used for this project with brand names, model numbers, performance characteristics, pictures/diagrams, and number available for the following:

1. Supplied air system, if used, negative air machines, HEPA vacuums, air monitoring pumps, calibration devices, pressure differential monitoring device, and emergency power generating system.

2. Waste water filtration system, shower system, and containment barriers.

3. Encapsulants, surfactants, hand-held sprayers, airless sprayers, glovebags, and fire extinguishers.

4. Respirators, protective clothing, and personal protective equipment.

5. Fire safety equipment to be used in the regulated area.

F. Submit the type of vehicle to be used for transportation and the name, address, and phone number of subcontractor, if used. Proof of asbestos training for transportation personnel shall be provided.

G. Submit the name, location, and verification of the laboratory and/or personnel to be used for analysis of air and/or bulk samples. Air monitoring must be done in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101(f).

H. Submit qualifications verification: Submit the following evidence of qualifications. Make sure that all references are current and verifiable by providing current phone numbers and documentation.

I. Asbestos Abatement Company: Project experience within the past three years, listing projects first most similar to this project: Project Name, Type of Abatement, Duration, Cost, Reference Name/Phone Number, Final Clearance, and Completion Date.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 19 of 450

FORect inect in

mit the spet the speand nameand nam

agragr INFORMATION

ms, ams, a

d air syair systemstepumps, cpumps, c

mergencyergency p pyy

on sn systemystem

, hand-, hand-hehe

and personnd person

reONLYgulatedgulate

tion and thion and asbestos tasbestos


02 8213 – 7

J. List of project(s) halted by owner, architect/engineer (A/E), Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH), or regulatory agency in the last three years: Project Name, Reason, Date, Reference Name/Phone Number, and Resolution.

K. List asbestos regulatory citations, penalties, damages paid, and legal actions taken against the company in the last three years. Provide copies and all information needed for verification.

L. Submit affidavit stating that all personnel submitted below have medical records in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101(m) and 29 CFR 1910.20, that the company has implemented a medical surveillance program, and maintains recordkeeping in accordance with the above regulations. Submit the phone number and the doctor/clinic/hospital used for medical evaluations.

NOTE: Contractor shall coordinate/conduct all medical surveillance requirements (e.g., physicals) with/at HPM Corporation Occupational Medical Services (HPMC OMS). Similarly, Contractor shall coordinate/conduct all respirator training and fit testing requirements with/at the HAMMER facility.

M. Contractor shall be a Washington State licensed asbestos abatement contractor currently approved by the State of Washington to perform abatement activities and submit copies of the following:

1. State licenses for asbestos abatement.

2. Copy of insurance policy that includes exclusions with a letter from an agent stating in plain English the coverage provided and the fact that asbestos abatement activities are covered by the policy.

3. Copy of Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) incorporating the requirements of this Specification.

4. Information on who provides your training and how often.

5. Information on who provides medical surveillance and how often.

6. Information on who does and how is air monitoring conducted.

7. A list of references of independent laboratories/CIHs familiar with your air monitoring and standard operating procedures.

8. Copies of monitoring results of the five referenced projects listed and analytical method(s) used.

N. Submit the manufacturer’s technical data for all types of encapsulants and the material safety data sheets before the start of work. Provide application instructions also.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 20 of 450

FOROTE:OTE: CoCo

requirrequirMedicaMedicoordorINFORMATION

inate/inateat the HAat the HA

a Washina Washithe State the State

followingfollowin

tos abatetos abat

at includesincludeshe coverage coverag

overed bovered by

ONLY(SOPs) iSOPs) i

how oftenhow often

nd


02 8213 – 8

O. The Competent Person shall maintain and submit a daily log at the regulated area documenting the dates and times of the following: purpose, attendees, summary of meetings, and all personnel entering/exiting the regulated area; document and discuss the resolution of unusual events such as barrier breeching, equipment failures, emergencies, and any cause for stopping work; representative air monitoring and results/time-weighted averages/Excursion Limits. Submit this information daily to the Construction Field Lead.

P. Copies of Waste Shipment Records/Landfill Receipts shall be submitted to the Construction Field Lead’s representative on a weekly basis.

Q. At the completion of abatement, the Contractor shall submit a project report consisting of the daily log book requirements, daily regulated area inspections, all submittal information required to be provided by this specification and documentation of all events during the abatement project. The report shall include a certificate of completion signed and dated by the Contractor. All personal, clearance, and perimeter samples must be submitted. The report must be submitted to the Construction Field Lead within 35 calendar days of the asbestos abatement project completion. The Construction Field Lead’s representative will retain the abatement report after completion of the project.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Not used.


Not used.

DEFINITIONS

Definitions and explanations here are neither complete nor exclusive of all terms used in the contract documents, but are general for the work to the extent they are not stated more explicitly in another element of the contract documents.

A. Asbestos-Containing Material (ACM): Any material containing more than one percent asbestos.

B. Asbestos-Contaminated Elements (ACE): Building elements that are contaminated with asbestos and require disposal.

C. Asbestos: Includes chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, tremolite, anthophyllite, actinolite, and any of these minerals that has been chemically treated and/or altered. For purposes of this procedure, “asbestos” includes presumed asbestos-containing material.

D. Authorized Person: Any person required by work duties to be present in regulated areas.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 21 of 450

FORmittal mittal

cumentaticumentatde a certifie a certif

, clearanclearad td INFORMATION

o the Co the ment projment proj

ll retain thl retain th

DLINGING

ONLYor exclusior exclusi

extent theyextent th

nin


02 8213 – 9

E. Competent Person (Asbestos): One who is capable of identifying existing asbestos hazards in the work place, selecting the appropriate control strategy, and has the authority to take prompt corrective measures, as specified in 29 CFR 1926.32(f). In addition, for Class I and Class II work, one who is specially trained in a course that meets the criteria of Environmental Protection Agency’s Model Accreditation Plan (40 CFR Part 763) for supervisors, or its equivalent. For Class III and Class IV work, one who is trained in a manner consistent with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) requirements for training of local education agency maintenance and custodial staff as set forth at 40 CFR 763.92(a)(2).

F. Critical Barrier: One or more layers of plastic sealed over all openings into a work area or any other similarly placed physical barrier sufficient to prevent airborne asbestos in a work area from migrating to an adjacent area.

G. Decontamination Area: An enclosed area adjacent and connected to the regulated area consisting of an equipment room, shower area, and clean room, which is used for the decontamination of workers, materials, and equipment that are contaminated with asbestos.

H. Disturbance: Activities that disrupt the matrix of asbestos-containing material or presumed asbestos-containing material, crumble or pulverize asbestos-containing material or presumed asbestos-containing material, or generate visible dust from asbestos-containing material or presumed asbestos-containing material. The amount of asbestos-containing material/presumed asbestos-containing material does not exceed that which can be contained in one glove bag, or waste bag 60-in. in length and width.

I. Employee Exposure: That exposure to airborne asbestos that would occur if the employee was not using respiratory protective equipment.

J. Equipment Room (Change Room): A contaminated room located within the decontamination area that is supplied with impermeable bags or containers for the disposal of contaminated protective clothing and equipment.

K. Excursion Limit: The maximum level of airborne asbestos fibers an employee may be exposed to when measured as a 30-minute peak exposure. The excursion limit is 1.0 f/cc of air averaged over a 30-minute sampling period.

L. Facility: Any building, structure, or area where activities and/or materials governed by this standard are found.

M. Facility Manager: The building owner or facility owner who exercises control over management and recordkeeping functions relating to a building and/or facility in which activities impacted by this standard take place.

N. Fiber: A particulate form of asbestos, five micrometers or longer, with a length-to-diameter ratio of at least 3 to 1.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 22 of 450

FORborne aborne

ntaminatiotaminatiosisting oisting

ontan INFORMATION

minatiminawith asbewith asbe

ities that ds thatntaining mntaining m

estos-contestos-col or presumor presum

material/pmaterial/pcontainedcontaine

borne asbborne ase eqeqONLY

uipmeuipm

ed room loed room loble bags ole bags o

ment.men


02 8213 – 10

O. Friable: The ability to, when dry, be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to a powder by hand pressure.

P. High-Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) Filter: A filter capable of trapping and retaining at least 99.97 percent of all mono-dispersed particles of at least 0.3 micrometers in diameter.

Q. Homogeneous Area: An area of surfacing material, or thermal system insulation, that is uniform in color and texture.

R. Intact: An asbestos-containing material that has not been crumbled, pulverized, or otherwise deteriorated, so that the asbestos is no longer likely to be bound with its matrix.

S. Line Manager: The individual directly responsible for operations and/or employees whose activities are covered by this Specification.

T. Negative Exposure Assessment: A demonstration that employee exposure, during an operation, is expected to be consistently below the permissible exposure limits.

U. Permissible Exposure Limit: The maximum level of airborne asbestos fibers an employee may be exposed to when measured as an eight-hour time weighted average. The permissible exposure limit is 0.1 f/cc. (Also see excursion limit.)

V. Presumed Asbestos-Containing Material: Thermal system insulation and surfacing material found in buildings constructed no later than 1980.

W. Project Designer: A person who has successfully completed the training requirements for an abatement project designer specified by 40 CFR 763.90(g). A project engineer, or certified industrial hygienist, serving in this role must also participate in the Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act of 1986 training course.

X. Regulated Area: An area established to mark areas where Class I, II, and III asbestos work is conducted, and any adjoining area where debris and waste from such asbestos work accumulates. Also, a work area within which airborne concentrations of asbestos exceed, or there is a reasonable possibility they may exceed the permissible exposure limit.

Y. Removal: All operations where asbestos-containing material and/or presumed asbestos-containing material is taken out or stripped from structures or substrates, including demolition operations.

Z. Renovation: The modifying of any existing structure or portion thereof.

AA. Repair: Overhauling, rebuilding, reconstructing, or reconditioning of structures or substrates, including encapsulation or other repair of asbestos-containing material or presumed asbestos-containing material attached to structures or substrates.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 23 of 450

FOR ne Managne Manag

oyyees whees wh

Exposxp INFORMATION

ure ure s expects expect

ure Lure Limitimitposed to wosed to w

le exposurexposu

ng Materiag Materdings consdings cons

successfuluccessfuesigner spesigner spe

enist, senist, sRONLY

ervesponsespons

ere Class ere Clase debris debris

wh


02 8213 – 11

BB. Surfacing Material: Material that is sprayed-on, troweled-on, or otherwise applied to surfaces (such as acoustical plaster on ceilings, fireproofing materials on structural members, or other materials on surfaces for acoustical, fireproofing, and other purposes).

CC. Surfacing Asbestos-Containing Material: Surfacing material that contains more than one percent asbestos.

DD. Thermal System Insulation: Asbestos-containing material applied to pipes, fittings, boilers, breeching, tanks, ducts, or other structural components to prevent heat loss or gain.

EE. Thermal System Insulation Asbestos-Containing Material: Thermal system insulation that contains more than one percent asbestos.

SUBCONTRACTOR’S USE OF PREMISES

A. The Contractor and Contractor’s personnel shall cooperate fully with the Construction Field Lead to facilitate efficient use of buildings and areas within buildings. The Contractor shall perform the work in accordance with the contract documents and in compliance with any/all applicable Federal, State, and local regulations and requirements.

B. The Contractor shall use the existing facilities in the building strictly within the limits indicated in contract documents, as well as the Abatement Plan.

C. The Construction Field Lead reserves the right to stop work at any time, for any reason. Standby time and costs for corrective actions will be borne by the Contractor up to 48 hours, at which time the Contractor shall notify the Construction Field Lead of potential impact due to delay of work.

D. The occurrence of any of the following events shall be reported immediately by the Contractor in writing to the Construction Field Lead, and shall require the Contractor to immediately stop abatement activities:

1. Discovery of hazardous, dangerous, or radioactive materials (beyond that known to exist);

2. Serious injury or death; and

3. Fire/safety emergency.

E. Violations of local, state, and/or federal environmental or occupational regulations shall be reported immediately. The Contractor shall not commence work again until instructed to proceed by the Construction Field Lead.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 24 of 450

FOR lationlation

RACTORACTOR

actorctoINFORMATION

and and Field LeaField Le

Contractoontractocompliancomplianc

rements.ements.

e existingexistingcuments, cuments

es the riges the rigrrective acrective ac

the Contrthe Contrdue todue tONLY

de

all be repoall be repoead, and sead, and

at


02 8213 – 12

PRODUCTS

Not used.

EXECUTION

PRE-ABATEMENT ACTIVITIES

Before any work begins on the construction of the regulated area, the Contractor will:

A. Conduct a space-by-space inspection with an authorized Construction Field Lead, and prepare a written inventory of all existing damage in those spaces where asbestos abatement will occur. Still or video photography may be used to supplement the written damage inventory. Document will be signed and certifiedas accurate by both parties.

B. The Construction Field Lead and the Contractor must be aware of 10/95 A/E Quality Alert indicating the failure to identify asbestos in the areas listed. Make sure these areas are looked at/reviewed on the project: Lay-in ceilings concealing ACM, ACM behind walls/windows from previous renovations, inside chases/walls, transite piping/ductwork/sheets, behind radiators, roofing materials, below window sills, water/sewer lines, electrical conduit coverings, crawl spaces (previous abatement contamination), flooring/mastic covered by carpeting/new flooring, exterior insulated wall panels, on underground fuel tanks, and steam line trench coverings.

C. Ensure that all furniture, machinery, equipment, curtains, drapes, blinds, and other movable objects required to be removed from the regulated area have been cleaned and removed or properly protected from contamination.

D. Inspect existing firestopping in the regulated area. Correct as needed.

E. Upon completion of all preparatory work, the Competent Person will inspect the work and systems and will notify the Construction Field Lead when the work is completed in accordance with this Specification. The Construction Field Lead’s representative may inspect the regulated area and the systems with the Contractor and may require that upon satisfactory inspection the Contractor’s employees perform all major aspects of the approved SOPs, especially worker protection, respiratory systems, contingency plans, decontamination procedures, and monitoring to demonstrate satisfactory operation. The operational systems for respiratory protection and the negative pressure system shall be demonstrated for proper performance.

F. The Contractor shall document the pre-abatement activities described above, and deliver a copy to the Construction Field Lead.

G. Upon satisfactory inspection of the installation and operation of systems, the Construction Field Lead will notify the Contractor in writing to proceed with the

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 25 of 450

FOR

lemlemaccurateaccurate

onstructioonstructiolert inlert inINFORMATION

dicadicaas are looas are lo

hind wallhind wallite pipingte piping

water/sewater/sewntaminatioaminatio

wall panewall pan

, equipme, equipmeed from thd from th

ed from coed from co

ONLYa. Corre. Cor

etent Persetent Ped Lead wd Lead

nstructinstructis


02 8213 – 13

asbestos abatement work in accordance with this Specification and all applicable regulations.

ABATEMENT ACTIVITIES, GENERAL

A. In accordance with the approved asbestos abatement work planning documents, including the Abatement Plan, applicable Work Packages, approved SOP, and all requirements of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall remove/abate all ACM and ACE in cooperation with the Construction Field Lead and the existing facility manager.

B. Radiological surveys will be performed in accordance with radiological control instructions, procedures, Radiological Work Permits, and/or work instructions. The ACM and ACE that is determined to have radioactive contamination will be removed (abated) and disposed concurrently with non-contaminated ACM/ACE in accordance with this Specification Section and the requirements of the applicable Specification Sections referenced in Paragraph 1.2. Packaging, disposal, and documentation of contaminated ACM/ACE will be similar to non-contaminated material; however, procedures, engineered controls for the work space and environment, personnel protection, training, disposal/transportation, and documentation/reporting requirements stipulated in Specification Sections applicable to radiological contamination compliance shall supplement the requirements of this Specification Section. The Construction Field Lead will provide personnel and approved containers for storing appropriately-bagged/labeled ACM/ACE (contaminated or non-contaminated) to ensure compliant packaging and shipment of the waste material to the Environmental Restoration Disposal Facility (ERDF) site.

C. Seal edges of ACM exposed by removal work which is inaccessible. Permit the exposed edges to dry completely to permit penetration of the encapsulant.

D. The Qualified asbestos workers are required to remove the protective outer metal jacket covering the asbestos insulation, remove the sections of asbestos insulation to allow cutting of piping, and double wrap the ends of the duct sections preparing the duct for transportation/disposal. If any of the metal jackets covering the asbestos insulation is damaged during the cutting or loading process, the Contractor is responsible for double wrapping any damaged section.

DISPOSAL AND DOCUMENTATION OF ACM & ACE

A. Contractor is responsible for safely loading the AMC/ACE into the Construction Field Lead-provided containers obtained from ERDF.

B. Complete all documentation and reporting in accordance with approved work planning documents.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 26 of 450

FORACMACM

moved (abmoved (abcordance wordance w

ble Specie Specnd dd INFORMATION

ocumocummaterial; material;

nment, penment, preporting portin

cal contamcal contaification Sification

ved contaved contaACM/ACECM/ACE

hipment oipment oFacilitFacility (Ey (

work whicwork whienetrnetONLY

ation ation

move the pmove the pctions of tions of

he duct she duct skets ke


03 1500 – 1

SECTION 03 1500

POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE ANCHORS

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK

A. Install anchors.

B. Field Inspections and Tests.


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Statement of Work, including Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


A. Hanford Documents

TFC-ENG-STD-06 Design Loads for Tank Farm Facilities.

B. ICC Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES)

ESR-1917 Hilti®1 Kwik Bolt®2 TZ Carbon and Stainless Steel Anchors in Cracked and Uncracked Concrete.

ESR-3814 Hilti HIT-RE 500 V3 Adhesive Anchors and Post Installed Reinforcing Bar Connections in Cracked and Uncracked Concrete.

SUBMITTALS

A. See the Contract Statement of Work for the submittal process.

B. Approval Required:

1. Training Records (Paragraph 1.4.A): five days before installation.

2. Special Inspection Qualifications (Paragraph 1.4.C): five days before start of installation.

1 Hilti is a registered trademark of Hilti Corporation, Schaan, Liechtenstein. 2 Kwik-Bolt is a registered trademark of Langford Tool & Drill Company, Minneapolis, Minnesota.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 27 of 450

FORDD

and generaand genepecificatiopecificati

ummINFORMATION

ents anents ahis Secthis Sectioio

herwise inerwise i

Design Desig

C--ESES))

Kwik BoltKwik BolCracked Cracked

ONLYV3 AdhV3 Adh

g Bar Cong Bar Cote..


03 1500 – 2

C. Approval Not Required:

1. Drawings, Diagrams, Templates, and Instructions: Within ten days after work is complete.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor shall train post-installed anchor installers. Installers shall be trained to the anchor manufacturer’s installation instructions, design document requirements, and the anchor installation report. Contractor shall submit installer training records to the Company.

B. Misrepresented Products: See the Contract Statement of Work for required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.

C. Post-Installed Anchor Special Inspector Qualifications:

1. Two years’ experience in concrete inspection and/or certification from American Concrete Institute, ICC, International Conference of Building Officials, or other recognized concrete inspection agency to be provided by the Tank Operating Contractor (TOC).


A. See Contract Statement of Work for general requirements.

PRODUCTS

SUBSTITUTES

A. See Contract Statement of Work for substitution approvals.

MATERIALS

A. Post-installed anchors (PC-1 and PC-2): Industry standard having a published evaluation report (by ICC Evaluation Services, Inc.), with anchor descriptions, tables of allowable tension and shear loads (including seismic and wind qualifications), and test findings.

B. Hilti Corporation or approved equal:

1. Kwik Bolt TZ Expansion Anchor.

2. HIT-RE 500 V3 Adhesive Anchors with #4 rebar in accordance with Section 03 3000, Paragraph 2.2.B.

C. Anchors located in dry, interior locations may be carbon steel. All other anchors shall be stainless steel.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 28 of 450

FOR

suressures

Innstalled stalled

wo ywo yeaINFORMATION

rs rs can Concan Con

s, or others, or otherk Operak Operatintin

D HANDD HAND

ork for geork for g

iononONLYapprovappro

ard havinard havinanchoan


03 1500 – 3

EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where concrete anchors are to be installed and notify the Company, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

PREPARATION

A. For concrete anchors larger than 3/8-in., locate rebar before drilling. For concrete anchors 3/8-in. or smaller, avoid cutting rebar by using a drill with a concealed-metal detector shutoff.

B. Do not install anchors in concrete prior to 28 days after concrete placement;unless it can be shown by testing that the concrete design strength has been obtained.

INSTALLATION

A. Concrete Anchor Installation:

1. Install anchors shown on the drawings in accordance with Manufacturer’s Instructions.

2. Unless otherwise noted, anchors shall not be installed closer than the manufacturer’s critical edge distance to the edge of concrete.

3. Notify the Construction Field Lead if reinforcing steel is encountered when drilling.

FIELD INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

A. Special Inspection is required for all concrete anchor installations. This shall be done in accordance with the applicable ICC Evaluation Report. The special inspector shall be on the jobsite during anchor installation to verify anchor type, anchor dimensions, hole dimensions, hole cleaning procedures, anchor spacing, edge distances, drill bit size, anchor embedment, and tightening torque. Complete inspections shall be documented by the inspector on Expansion Anchor Installation Report (Form A-6004-239 or Company-approved equivalent) and submitted to the Construction Field Lead for approval.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 29 of 450

FOR

l del de

not installt installt can be st can be

INFORMATION

tallation:llation:

wn on then on the

chors shalchors shaistance to tance to

if reinfof reinfoONLYtallationstallationsport.


03 3000 – 1

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK

A. Formwork.

B. Reinforcement.

C. Cast-In-Place Items.

D. Concrete.

RELATED DOCUMENTS, CODES, AND STANDARDS



A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

ACI 117 Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.

ACI 301 Structural Concrete for Buildings.

ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary.

ACI CP-1 Technical Workbook for ACI Certification of Concrete Field Testing Technician-Grade 1.

B. ASTM International (ASTM):

ASTM A185 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete.

ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

ASTM A853 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Carbon, for General Use.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 30 of 450

FOR

nn

ncrete.ncrete.

CUMECUMEINFORMATION

provisionprovisionn Sectionsn Section

others refothers re Referen Refere

icated.icated.

I):

es foes for CoCo

ONLYe for Bufor Bu

ements forements foryy..

C


03 3000 – 2

ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

ASTM C94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.

ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

ASTM C260 Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.

ASTM C1077 Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation.

ASTM C1107 Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)

ASTM D1751 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).

C. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA):

1. QC Manual S3 Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.

SUBMITTALS

A. See Contract Statement of Work for submittal procedures.

B. Approval Required:

1. Concrete Data: Before mixing, submit concrete materials, mix design, and mix proportions, in accordance with ACI 301. Identify each material to be used in concrete, including amount, by weight, to be utilized in each cubic yard of plastic mix.

2. Submittals shall include the documentation listed in Paragraph 1.4.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap spacing, and placement.

D. Product Data:

1. Expansion Joint Filler.

E. Submit Federal Green Procurement requirements as stated below via product data, cutsheet, or other product information sheet.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 31 of 450

FOR

M CM

D1751D1751

INFORMATION

ed ConcreConcre

rtification fication

mittal promittal pr

ONLYcrete matecrete mat

IdentifyIdentifyo be utilizo be utiliz


03 3000 – 3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The concrete supplier shall be certified according to NRMCAs “Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.”

B. Qualification of Concrete Inspection/Testing Laboratory: The laboratory including equipment, personnel, and procedures shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1077 and shall be accredited by an independently recognized authority within the last two years to perform the work described in this Section.

C. Deliverable Documentation: The following documents and records, required by this Section, shall be delivered to Construction Document Control in accordance with Contract Documents.

Document Paragraph

Supplier Certification 1.4.A

Laboratory Qualifications 1.4.B

Inspection Personnel Qualification Records 1.6.A

Concrete Test Results 3.5.A

D. Perform work in accordance with the applicable sections of ACI 117, ACI 301, and ACI 318.

E. Suspect and Misrepresented Products: See Contract Statement of Work for required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.


A. See the Contract Statement of Work for general requirements.

QUALIFICATION OF CONCRETE INSPECTORS

A. Personnel performing field testing of concrete shall be ACI Concrete Field Testing Technicians, Grade 1, who have received formal certification in accordance with ACI CP-1 or equivalent. Equivalent certification programs shall include requirements for written and performance examination as stipulated in ACI 301, Section 1.6.2.

B. Pre-Pour Inspection: The Concrete Pre-Pour Inspection Checklist (Attachment 1) shall be prepared and signed off prior to any concrete pouring. Inspection of the following items prior to pouring concrete is required: forms, re-bar, subgrade, embedments, and other items that may need inspection.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 32 of 450

FOR cumentcumentFO

r Certificr CertifiINFORMATION

ualificatioualificati

nel Qualifiel Qualif

with the awith the a

: See ConSee Corepresenteepresen

ONLYquirementsuirement


03 3000 – 4

PRODUCTS

SUBSTITUTION

A. See the Contract Statement of Work for substitution approvals.

MATERIALS

A. Concrete.

1. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II (low alkali).

2. Aggregates: ASTM C33, 3/4-in. maximum size.

3. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260, Sika®3 Chemical Company “SIKA AER,” Chem-Masters Corporation “Adz-Air,” or Protex Industries “AES.”

4. Properties:

a. Minimum allowable compressive strength: 4500 lb/in2 at 28 days, or as required by design documents.

b. Slump: 4 in. + 1 in. and in accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.2.2.2.

c. Air Content: 5% + 1% and in accordance with ACI 301, Table 4.2.2.4.

d. Proportions: In accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.2.3, and ASTM C94.

e. Time of Discharge: In accordance with ASTM C94, Section 12 and ACI 301, Section 4.1.2.10.

f. Federal Green Procurement Requirements:

i. Concrete mix designs should contain one of the following pre-consumer recycled content materials:

! Cenospheres

! Coal Fly Ash

! Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag

! Silica Fume

3 Sika is a registered trademark of Sika AG Société Anonyme, Baar, Switzerland.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 33 of 450

FORAiA“SIKA“SIK“AES.”“AES.”

erINFORMATION

ties:ties:

ininimum almum alrequired bquired b

in. i ++ 1 in.1 inRM

2.2

1% and 1% and

e with ACe with ACONLYwith ASTwith AST


03 3000 – 5

ii. Rebar contains at least 16% recycled content.

5. Measuring, Mixing, and Delivery: In accordance with ASTM C94.

B. Reinforcing Steel:

1. Steel Bars: ASTM A615, deformed, Grade 60.

2. Tie Wire: ASTM A853 carbon steel, 16-gage minimum, annealed.

3. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 plain type in flat sheets.

C. Non-shrink Grout

1. In accordance with ASTM C1107

2. Minimum strength of fluid grout, 4,000 psi at 1 day, 5,000 psi at 3 days, and 9,000 psi at 28 days.

D. Controlled Density Fill (CDF): Portland cement based, minimum compressive strength of 100 psi at 28 days, maximum compressive strength of 300 psi at 28 days.

E. Cast-In-Place Anchors: See Section 05 1200, Section 2.2.B or as shown on Drawings.

F. Post-Installed Anchors: See Section 03 1500, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchors.”

G. Expansion joint filler: ASTM D1751; asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 1/2-in. thick.

H. Forms: Wood, steel, plywood, or Masonite Corporation “Concrete Form Presdwood,” as required for various specified finishes.

EXECUTION

PREPARATION

A. Form Construction:

1. Install formwork in accordance with ACI 301, Section 2.3. Interior shape and rigidity shall be such that finished concrete will meet requirements ofDrawings and within tolerances specified in ACI 117, Section 4.

2. Prepare form surfaces in accordance with ACI 301, Section 2, using specified form coating materials, or as described below.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 34 of 450

FOR In In

MinimumMinimund 9,000nd 9,00INFORMATION

pp

nsitynsity Fill (Fill yysi at 28 dai at 28 da

See Sectioee Secti

on 03 150n 03 150

asphalt imasphalt im

ONLYporation “oration

shes.shes.


03 3000 – 6

3. Forms for surfaces which will be permanently concealed from view may be saturated with water, before placing concrete, instead of other treatment.

4. Clean forms of foreign material before placing concrete.

INSTALLATION

A. Reinforcing Steel:

1. Fabricate and place bars to dimensions shown on Drawings, within tolerances shown in ACI 117, Sections 2.1 and 2.2.

2. Tie to prevent displacement during placement of concrete.

3. Do not force into concrete after initial set has started.

4. Provide concrete cover for reinforcement protection per dimensions given in ACI 301, Section 3.3, except where shown otherwise on Drawings.

5. Reinforcement shall be supported and fastened together to prevent displacement by construction loads, or placement of concrete beyond specified tolerances. Reinforcement supported from ground shall rest on precast, square concrete blocks having a compressive strength equal to specified compressive strength of concrete being placed.

B. Verify that anchors, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. Document inspection on Pre-Pour Inspection Checklist.

C. Concrete:

1. Before placing:

a. Approve “Pre-Pour Inspection Checklist,” including identification of sections of structure to be placed, maximum size of coarse aggregate, and design strength.

b. For each truck load, collect “Trip Ticket” and insert into Work Package. “Trip Tickets” shall contain information listed in ASTM C94, Paragraphs 14.1.1 through 14.1.10, and water/cement ratio.

c. Discharge concrete rinsate at Company approved location.

d. Place in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3. Do not drop more than 5 ft.

e. Temper only as permitted in ACI 301, Section 4.3.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 35 of 450

T

Do noDo n

rovide ovideCC INFORMATION

onon301, Se301, Se

ment shallment shallby constry constr

nces. Reinnces. Reincrete blocrete bloc

e strength e strength

cement, anement, aurelely, and y, and

Pour Inspeour Insp

ONLY” includin” includium s


03 3000 – 7

2. Place nonshrink grout where shown on Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. Placing concrete against subgrade/base material: Place on or against firm, damp surfaces free of frost, ice, and free water. Obtain required earth compaction in accordance with Section 31 2300, “Excavation and Fill,” before concrete placement. Dampen earth surfaces to receive fresh concrete.

4. Consolidation: Consolidate concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.2.5.

5. Form Removal and Concrete Repair:

a. Form removal: Remove in accordance with ACI 301, Section 2.3.2.

b. Cut back form ties and examine concrete surfaces for defects. Repair only after permission for patching is given by the Project/System Engineer.

c. Place concrete repair mortar within 1 hour after mixing. Do not re-temper mortar.

d. Repair surface defects in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.7. Cure concrete repairs same as new concrete.

6. Concrete Finishes and Tolerances:

a. Measuring for tolerances shall be performed in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.4.3.

b. Formed surfaces: Start finishing following concrete repair, and complete within 96 hours after forms have been removed. Finish in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.3.

i. Surfaces exposed to earth backfill; rough form finish.

ii. Surfaces to receive special protective coating.

c. Unformed surfaces: Finish in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.4.

i. Exterior equipment slabs subject to foot traffic.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 36 of 450

FOR a.a.

CINFORMATION

ut utRepair oRepair Project/Syoject/Sy

concrete roncrete rr mortar.mortar.

defects indefects iairs sameairs same

nces:es:

all be pell be pONLYlowing coowing c

ave been ave been


03 3000 – 8

JOINTS

A. Control Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form control joints, sectioning concrete into areas at approximately 10-ft maximum spacing or as required at re-entrant corners and slab irregularities. Control joints shall be 1/4-in. wide and 1-in. deep.

CURING

A. Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.6. Clear curing compounds shall be tinted or applied to surfaces marked to show extent of spraying.

B. Do not use curing compound on surfaces to receive special protective coating.

FIELD INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

A. Sample and test concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Sections 1.6.4.2 (d), (e), and (f). Record results. Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests.

PROTECTION

A. Protect concrete from mechanical damage in accordance with ACI 301, Section 1.8.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 37 of 450

FOR NSPECTNSPECT

e and test e and testRecordRecordINFORMATION

resresial evaluial evalu

mechanicamechanica

ONLY


03 3000 - Att. 1 of 2

SECTION 03 3000 – ATTACHMENT 1

CONCRETE PRE-POUR INSPECTION CHECKLIST

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 38 of 450

FOR INFORMATION ONLY


03 3000 - Att. 2 of 2


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 39 of 450


05 1200 – 1

SECTION 05 1200

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section Includes:

1. Structural steel.

2. Grout.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS/CODES AND STANDARDS



A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

AISC 303 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges

AISC 360 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

ASME B&PVC Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

C. ASTM International (ASTM)

ASTM A6 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling

ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, welded and Seamless

ASTM A500 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 40 of 450

D DOCUDOCU

eneral pneral perer INFORMATION

DivisioDivisi

ts and othes and othction. Reon. Re

se indicatee indicat

ConstructiConstruc

de of Stanof Staness

n for Strun for Str

ONLYME)ME

essel Codessel Co


05 1200 – 2

ASTM A563 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts

ASTM A780 Standard Practice for Repair of Damages and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

ASTM A992 Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes


ASTM E164 Standard Practice for Contact Ultrasonic Testing of Weldments

ASTM E165 Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General Industry

ASTM E709 Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing

ASTM F436 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers Inch and Metric Dimensions

ASTM F1554 Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength

D. American Welding Society (AWS)

AWS D1.1/D1.1M Structural Welding Code – Steel

AWS D1.6 Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel

E. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)

SSPC-SP 2 Hand Tool Cleaning

SSPC-SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and otherpertinent data.

2. Include embedment drawings.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 41 of 450

FOR TM E16TM E1

709709 INFORMATION

StaSta55, an55, an

WS)WS)

ral Weldiral Weldi

Welding Clding CONLY


05 1200 – 3

3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shopand field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop andfield bolts.

5. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.

C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records(PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural Welding Code -Steel,” for each welded joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing.

D. Testing Agency.

E. Welding certificates.

F. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

G. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemicalanalysis.

2. Non-shrink grout.

H. Source quality-control reports.

I. Submit Federal Green Procurement requirements as stated below via product data, cutsheet, or other product information sheet.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. Personnel and procedures for welding structural steel shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1 or AWS D1.6, as applicable, before welding. Qualification in accordance with ASME B&PVC, Section IX may be substituted for this requirement. Maintain copy of welding procedure specifications, procedure qualification records, and welder performance qualification test results at jobsite.

2. Visual weld examinations shall be performed, and appropriate documentation prepared, by personnel who have been certified in accordance with AWS D1.1 or AWS D1.6, as applicable.

B. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 42 of 450

FOReldingelding cece

stst reportsreports

INFORMATION

Reports: Reports:

andand waswas

requiremeequiremeheet.eet.

ONLYding to thding to th

steel shalsteel shalicableca


05 1200 – 4

2. AISC 360.

3. RCSCs “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 (replaced by F3125/F31254M) or A490 Bolts.”

C. Structural Bolts: Bolts must be properly marked for grade. WRPS will perform an informal inspection of all bolts used in the Project Construction. Improperly marked bolts or suspect/counterfeit bolts must be replaced by the Contractor at hisexpense.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer’s labels intact.

1. Clean and re-lubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.

1.6 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.”

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers’ recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A992.

B. Channels, Angles: ASTM A6.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 43 of 450

FOR

mbersmbersacers. Pracers. Pr

ioration.ration.

o not sno INFORMATION

toretoree, or ovee, or ovedamaged mmaged

rotected potected p

bolts abolts andn

steel framteel frangsngs andandONLYbe appliedbe appli

ndationsndations


05 1200 – 5

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A36.

D. Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500, Grade B.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B.

1. Weight Class: As indicated.

2. Finish: Black except where indicated to be galvanized.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

G. Federal Green Procurement Requirements:

1. Contain at least 16% recycled content.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (replaced by F3125/F3125M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 55, bent.

1. Nuts: ASTM A563 heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Plate Washers: ASTM A36 carbon steel.

3. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.

4. Finish: Galvanized.

C. Threaded Rods: ASTM A36.

1. Nuts: ASTM A563 heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.

3. Finish: Plain.

D. Federal Green Procurement Requirements:


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 44 of 450

FORCoC

NNECTONNECTO

gthgt INFORMATION

Bolts, BoltsM)M), Ty, Type 1pe 1yy

-steel nut-steel nutain finish.finish.

554, Grad554, Gra

avyvy--hex chex c

carboncarbon steste

ardened cardened c

ONLY


05 1200 – 6

2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and non-staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303 “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,” and AISC 360.

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.

2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.

3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.

4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations.

B. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

C. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

D. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel framing members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.

2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSCs “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 (replaced by F3125/F3125M) or A490 Bolts,” for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: As indicated.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correctingwelding work.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 45 of 450

FORFabFab

Mark anMark an

INFORMATION

ete strucete strucshopshop-primprim

ll, or puncor punc

ends of cends of c

curing othcuring othmemembmbere

ar tor tONLYsteel steel

g

rpendiculapendicu


05 1200 – 7

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.

2.6 SHOP PRIMING

A. For shop primer, Section 09 9123.

B. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2-in.

2. Surfaces to be field welded.

3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.

4. Galvanized surfaces.

C. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 2, “Hand Tool Cleaning;” or

2. SSPC-SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning.”

D. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer’s written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified inspection and testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections on a minimum of 10% of shop welds. Those welds selected to be inspected shall be at the testing agencies option.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and at least one of the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 46 of 450

FOR

S

SurfacSurfac

alvanizalvaniINFORMATION

dd

ation: Cleation: Cleslag, or flslag, or fl

ons and stns and st

d ToolTool ClC e

oll CleaninCleanin

preparatiopreparatioat rate rect rate re

Use priUse pried sud sONLY

urfaceurface

pection anpection an% of %


05 1200 – 8

2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.

3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond- reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.

2. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

3. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.

5. Neatly finish exposed surfaces at 45° angle to concrete; protect grout and allow curing. Comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 47 of 450

FOR ATIONATION

temporatemportural ralINFORMATION

teelteeoads andoads and

orts whenorts whenerwierwisese inin

in location locatiCC 360.360

lean concran concn surfacesn surfaces

ONLYges, shimsges, shim

rs have brs have b


05 1200 – 9

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISCs “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.”

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessaryadjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

H. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSCs “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 (replaced by F3125/F3125M) or A490 Bolts” for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, except where Slip critical (SC) is specifically indicated.

I. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove any backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.

3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISCs “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,” for mill material.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified inspection and testing agency to perform field tests and inspections on high strength bolted connections and 10% of field welds. Those welds selected to be inspected shall be at the testing agency’s option, but must include at least one from each joint type.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 48 of 450

FOR

ce mce m

not use thet use the

large ulargeINFORMATION

nfanfat be enlat be enl

lts: Installlts: Installructural Joctural Jo

0 Bolts” 0 Bolts”

htened, htened, exex

WS D1.1/DS D1.1/Dqualityuality, an,

ONLYor bearing,r bearin

aint on suint on su

e a


05 1200 – 10

B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSCs “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 (replaced by F3125/F3125M) or A 490 Bolts.”

C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and one or more of the following inspection procedures, at testing agency’s option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165.

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164.

D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780.

B. Touchup Primer: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and re-prime.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 49 of 450

FOR

bb

UINFORMATION

UltraUltra

ncies in Wncies in Wontractontract DD

ONON

areas wheareas wheth ASTMth ASTM

erection, cection, c

ONLY


05 3100 – 1

SECTION 05 3100

STEEL DECKING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK


1. Composite floor deck.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 3, Section 03 3000, “Cast-In-Place Concrete.”

2. Division 5, Section 05 1200, “Structural Steel Framing.”

3. Division 5, Section 05 5000, “Metal Fabrications.”

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS



A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)

North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Welding Society (AWS)

ANSI/AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel

C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)

ASCE 3 Standard for the Structural Design of Composite Slabs (3-91) and Standard Practice for Construction and Inspection of Composite Slabs (9-91)


AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 50 of 450

dd

DivisDivi

DivisionivisionINFORMATION

,

onon 5, S5, Sectect

TS

s of the Coof the Cpecificatipecificat

erenced thenced thed documd docum

ONLYecificationecificatio

uctural Muctural

WeldinWeldin


05 3100 – 2

E. ASTM International (ASTM)

ASTM A653/A653M Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable

F. Steel Deck Institute (SDI)

C-2011 Standard for Composite Steel Floor Deck-Slabs

Publication No. 30 Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Deck profile characteristics and dimensions, structural properties, and finishes.

2. For each type of accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout and types of deck panels, support locations, anchoragedetails, reinforcing channels, cut deck openings, special jointing,accessories, and attachments to other construction.

C. Calculations: For decking selected other than Basis of Design

D. Welding certificates.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWSD1.3.

B. Perform work to ASCE 3 for composite decks.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 51 of 450

FOR 20112011

tion No. tion No.

INFORMATION

cteristics aeristics a

andand pprodod

ls, ss ONLYupporuppor

enings,nings, spsuction.ction.

esignesign


05 3100 – 3


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery,storage, and handling.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steeldeck according to AISI’s “North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.”

B. Allowable Stress Design (ASD) or Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) per the provisions of “SDI Composite Deck Design Handbook,” IBC, and the manufacturer’s recommendations. Section properties computed in accordance with “North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed SteelStructural Members.”

C. Other structural sheet steels or high strength alloy steels are acceptable and shall be selected from “North American Specification for the Design of Cold-FormedSteel Structural Members.”

2.2 FLOOR DECK

A. Basis of Design: CMC Joist and Deck, B-Lok 20Ga composite decking

1. Dead Load: 5 inches thick of concrete including rebar or wire mesh

2. Live Load: 2000 lbs point load, or 125 psf uniform load

3. Impact Load: 500 lbs

4. Deflections: L/240 maximum.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by oneof the following:

1. ASC Profiles, Inc.; a Blue Scope Steel company.

2. Verco Manufacturing Co.

3. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh SteelCorporation.

4. CMC Joist and Deck

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 52 of 450

FOR

wabwabr the provthe prov

ufactureracturerNorthNorth AmeAm

MMemMMM INFORMATION

bberser

sheet steesheet steNorthNorth AmAm

berser .””

Deck, B-Deck, B-

concrete inoncrete

125 p25 psfsfONLYrovr i


05 3100 – 4

C. Deck: Fabricate panels to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary forComposite Steel Floor Deck or Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, andwith the following:

1. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings or specified herein, fabricate panels in continuous lengths and fabricate flashings and accessories in longest practical lengths.

2. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS),minimum yield strength of 33ksi.

3. Uncoated or phosphatized top/painted bottom: ASTM A1008, minimumyield strength of 33ksi.

4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

5. Mechanical fasteners or welds shall be permitted for deck and accessory attachment.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide deck manufacturer’s standard accessory materials for deck thatcomply with requirements indicated.

B. Pour stops, column closures, cover plates, and girder fillers shall be of the type suitable for the application. Pour stop minimum gages shall be in accordance with the Steel Deck Institute.

C. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories:

1. ASTM A653, Structural quality, Minimum yield strength of 33ksi or

2. ASTM A1008

D. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, material, size andthickness as recommended by the deck manufacturer

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirementsfor installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 53 of 450

FOR DesiDes

MechaniMechanachmh INFORMATION

nt.nt

ck mam nufanufantss indicatindica

cover platcover plar stop minr stop min

oories: ries:

mumuONLYm ym yieliel

rib,rib mmateate


05 3100 – 5

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications andcommentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer’s written instructions, andrequirements in this Section. All OSHA rules for erection shall be followed.

B. Temporary shoring, if required, shall be installed before placing deck panels. Temporary shoring shall be designed to resist a minimum uniform load of 50psf.

C. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with endsaccurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanentlyfastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

D. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp ordeflection.

E. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other workprojecting through or adjacent to deck.

F. Accessories: Install trims, panel closures, and flashings according to the Drawings and manufacturer’s recommended details.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required forstrength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Install wet concrete stops at floor edge upturned to top surface of slab to contain wet concrete. Install stops of sufficient strength to remain stationary under wet concrete without distortion

I. Install sheet steel closures and angle flashings to close openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings.

J. Connect sidelap at 36-in. o.c., maximum, unless shown otherwise.

K. End Bearing: Ends of units shall be lapped a minimum of 2-inches over supports or butted. Provide concrete fill over deck were indicated.

3.3 INSTALLATION, ANCHORAGE

A. Floor deck units shall be anchored to steel supporting members including perimeter support steel and/or bearing walls by arc spot puddle welds, fillet welds, or mechanical fasteners.

B. Comply with requirements of ANSI/AWS D1.3, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. A minimum visible 5/8-in. diameter arc puddle weld shall be used. Weld metal shall penetrate all layers of deck material, and shall have good fusion to the supporting members

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 54 of 450

FOR

ee dedeflection. flection.

dd neatlyneatly fifthrouhr INFORMATION

ghgh o

stall trimsstall trimss recomms recomm

orcorcememententk andand suuppuu

or edge upr edge upient strengient stren

ngs to clgs to cONLY

os

own otherwn othe

f 2f 2-inch-inch


05 3100 – 6

C. Edge ribs of panels shall be welded at each support. Space additional welds an average of 12-in. but not more than 18-in.

D. Mechanical fasteners, either powder actuated, pneumatically driven, or screws, shall be permitted in lieu of welding to fasten deck to supporting framing if fasteners meet all project service requirements.

END OF SECTION

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 55 of 450



05 4000 – 1

SECTION 05 4000

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK


1. Load-bearing wall framing.

2. Non-bearing wall framing.




A. ASTM International (ASTM)


ASTM A123/A123M Standard Specification for Steel Deck Gear Stowage Box [Metric]

ASTM A153/A153M Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

ASTM A653/A653M Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A780 Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

ASTM A1003/A1003M Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 56 of 450

FORD DOCUDOCU


DivisioDivisi



M)M)

ndard Spedard Spe

SpecificaSpecificac]c]

ONLYation for ion for

ardwareardwar

r Steel Shr Steel Shlloyloy-C


05 4000 – 2

ASTM E119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials

ASTM E329 Standard Spec for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection


B. American Welding Society (AWS)

AWS D1.1/D1.1M Structural Welding Code – Steel

AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

B. Product Data:

1. For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory used.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests for current products:

1. Power-actuated anchors.

2. Mechanical fasteners.

3. Vertical Deflection Clips.

4. Miscellaneous Structural Clips and Accessories.

F. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of cold-formed metal framing's compliance with latest edition of AISI.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 57 of 450

FORWS D1.3WS D1.3

LSLS

INFORMATION

s:s:

out, spacinut, spacinication; anation; a

eners. Sheners. Shing, strappg, strapp

d attachmd attachm

etal framinal fram

ONLYunless othunless otmentm


05 4000 – 3

G. Special Inspection Report Requirements: The special inspector shall furnish inspection reports to the Construction Field Lead as required by IBC Section 1704.2.4. Inspection reports shall indicate that work inspected was done in conformance to approved construction documents. The Contractor shall coordinate all inspections with the special inspection testing agency.

H. Submit Federal Green Procurement requirements as stated below via product data, cutsheet, or other product information sheet.


A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified engineer.

1. Engineer Qualifications: An engineer who is qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project material, design, and extent.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency shall be employed by the Owner to conduct the testing indicated and shall be acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction qualified according to ASTM E329.

C. Special Inspections: Special inspections shall be conducted in accordance with IBC Section 1704.

D. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.

E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural Welding Code—Steel,” and AWS D1.3, “Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel.”

F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

G. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISIs, “North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members” and its, “Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – General Provisions.”

1. Comply with AISIs, “Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Header Design.”

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 58 of 450

FOREngEngjurisdicjurisdicengineeriengineer

finedne INFORMATION

as thas the simile simi ar ar

ifications:fications:the testinthe testin

on quon qualifialif

pections shpections s

rom a qualom a quarequirerequirONLY

emelongationongatio

to AWS Dto AWS Dctural Wtural


05 4000 – 4


A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation.


A. Requirements for headers and exterior wall framing are as specified on the Structural Drawings.

B. Submit Federal Green Procurement Requirements as stated below via product date, cutsheet, or other product information sheet.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cold-formed metal framing that may be incorporated into the Work included, but are not limited to, the following:

1. AllSteel Products, Inc.

2. Clark Steel Framing.

3. Craco Metals Manufacturing, LLC.

4. Dale/Incor.

5. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company.

6. MarinoWare; a division of Ware Industries Company.

7. SCAFCO Corporation.

8. Steeler, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 16 percent.

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1003/A1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as indicated on the drawings.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 59 of 450

mit Fmit Fe, cutshee, cutshe

TSTS

RINFORMATION

SS

acturers: Sacturers: Sng cold-g cold-fofo

are not limare not lim

LC.C.

ONLYdustries Cdustries C

mpanympany..


05 4000 – 5

C. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A653/A653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as indicated on the drawings.

D. Federal Green Procurement:


2.3 LOAD BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer’s standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as indicated on the drawings.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer’s standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, un-punched, with straight flanges, and as indicated on the drawings.

C. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer’s standard C-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as indicated on the drawings.

D. Steel Double-L Headers: Manufacturer’s standard L-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, and as indicated on the drawings.

2.4 NON-LOAD BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer’s standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as indicated on the drawings.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer’s stand U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, un-punched, with stiffened flanges, and as indicated on the drawings.

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer’s standard bypass or head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company.

b. MarinoWare, a division of Ware Industries.

c. SCAFCO Corporation.

d. The Steel Network, Inc.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 60 of 450

FOR

atedate

l Box or Box oreader beameader bea

ed on ed onINFORMATION

he he

HeadersHeaderspths indicapths indica

LL FLL FRAMRA

standard standard ed flangesed flanges

-shaped st-shaped sas indicatas indica

andandONLYrd byrd bypy

al displacl displao stud webstud we

with reqwith reqorate


05 4000 – 6

D. Double Deflection Track: Manufacturer’s double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company.

b. MarinoWare, a division of Ware Industries.

c. SCAFCO Corporation.

d. The Steel Network, Inc.

E. Federal Green Procurement:


2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A1003/A1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer’s standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing.

2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.

3. Web stiffeners.

4. Anchor clips.

5. End clips.

6. Foundation clips.

7. Gusset plates.

8. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts.

9. Joist hangers and end closures.

10. Hole reinforcing plates.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 61 of 450

FORd.d.

l Green Pl Green P

INFORMATION

n at leasn at leas

RIESRIES

accessoriaccessometallic cmetallic

er’s standr’s stands:

ONLY


05 4000 – 7

11. Backer plates.

2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A36/A36M, zinc coated by hot dip process according to ASTM A123/A123M.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 55, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts or hooked bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A153/A153M, Class C.

C. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A780.

B. Nonmetallic, Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, non-corrosive, non-staining grout containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

C. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multi-monomer plastic, non-leaching.

D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4-in. thick, selected from manufacturer’s standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISIs specifications and standards, manufacturer’s written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.

2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by screw fastening or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by bolting or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 62 of 450

FORANEAN

vanizing Rnizing R

llic, Nolic, NINFORMATION

nncontaincontainagents, andgents, and

th fluid coth fluid co

high-high-dendensi

neoprene neoprene to matchto match

esssosONLYries pries p

ording toording tn instructiinstruct

s


05 4000 – 8

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8-in. in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8-in. from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8-in.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud of joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete construction.

B. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud locations.


A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISIs, “Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – General Provisions,” and to manufacturer’s written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 63 of 450

FOR UTIONUTION

ONON

INFORMATION

orting suorting sunts for insnts for ins

stallation otallation o

tween theween theor slab at or slab a

ncrete cncrete cONLY

o

wall bottomall bott


05 4000 – 9

1. Screw or bolt wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16-in.

D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing member by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by screw fastening. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

H. Install insulation, specified in Division 07 Section 07 2100, “Thermal Insulation,” in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer’s standard punched openings.

J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8-in. in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8-in. from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.4 LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as indicated on the drawings.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 64 of 450

FOR framing mframing for trar INFORMATION

ck ock

ry bracingbracingynsitnsity to thy to th

n place, unplace, unleted and eted and

sion and cion and oth sides ooth sides

n 07 Secti07 Secch as headch as head

ible onible onONLY

co

ns that exns that ex

evel, pluevel, plun 1


05 4000 – 10

B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8-in. between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as indicated on the drawings.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations.

D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

E. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated.

G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.

1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb offrame indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together touniformly distribute loads.

2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs.

H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing.

1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer’s written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported.

I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced as indicated. Fasten at each stud intersection.

J. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 65 of 450

FOR chor studchor stud

orting struting stru

ders er INFORMATION

ver ver dicated. dicated.sfer load ter load t

gusset platusset pla

ningsngs withwithShop Drawhop Dra

oads.oads.

k studs abk studs abith clip anth clip an

ds.ds

b ONLYacing in cing inhheaveavy trimy trim

complycomplyy


05 4000 – 11

3.5 NON-LOAD BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure.

2. Connect drift clips to cold formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Drawings but not more than 48-in. apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.6 JOINT INSTALLATION

A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track.

1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1/2-in.

2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers, steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated in Shop Drawing.

C. Space joists not more than 2-in. from abutting walls, and as indicated on the drawings.

D. Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists, or another combination of connected joists if indicated.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 66 of 450

FOR InstInststructustructu

onnectonnecINFORMATION

drifdrire.re.

bridging inbridging ininn.. apart.apart.

ing and cong and couous angleuous angl

allall-framinframin

joists. Aoists. AenenONLY

ds, andds, an

ht, and plht, and pflanges flanges


05 4000 – 12

E. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as indicated.

1. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above.

F. Install bridging at intervals indicated. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as indicated on the drawings.

G. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange.

H. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist-framing assembly.

3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780 and manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, which ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 67 of 450

FOR

ure pure pteners, toteners, to

D PROTD PRO

INFORMATION

epairs: epairs: nstalled cnstalled c

M A780 anM A780 a

and mainand mainwhich enwhich en

on at timeon at tim

05 40005 4000

ONLY


05 5000 – 1

SECTION 05 5000

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK


1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.




A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)

ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures


ASME B31.1 Power Piping

ASME B31.3 Process Piping

ASME B&PVC Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

Section IX Welding and Brazing Qualification



ASTM A182 Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service

ASTM A193 Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 68 of 450

FORDD

and generaand genend other Dd other D

ummINFORMATION

ents anents ahis Sectionhis Section

herwise inerwise i

ivil Enginivil Engi

MinimuMinimStructurestructures

gineers (Agineers (A

ngng

ONLYessel Codessel Co

ficationcatio


05 5000 – 2

ASTM A194 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both

ASTM A240 Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

ASTM A269 Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service

ASTM A276 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength

ASTM A312 Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes

ASTM A325 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength (replaced by F3125/F3125M)

ASTM A354 Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners

ASTM A403 Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings

ASTM A479 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels

ASTM A554 Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing

ASTM A563 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts

ASTM A572 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 69 of 450

FOR M AM A

A307A307 INFORMATION

PP

StandaStandaHeat TreaHeat Tre

engthengt (rep(rep

d SpecificSpecificBolts, StBolts, St

tenersenersONLYion for Wion for W

FittingsFittings

StainlesStainlesO


05 5000 – 3

ASTM C1107 Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Hydraulic – Cement Grout (Nonshrink)

ASTM F436 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers


ASTM F3125/F3125M Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and metric Dimensions


AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel

AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel

AWS D1.6 Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel

AWS D9.1 Sheet Metal Welding Code

E. International Code Council (ICC)

IBC International Building Code

F. Master Painter’s Institute, Inc. (MPI)

MPI No. 79 Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive for Metal

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)


H. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)

SSPC-PA 1 Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel

SSPC-SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 70 of 450

FOR

ricarica

S D1.D 1

33 INFORMATION

il (I(ICC)CC)

nternationnternation

)

yd, Anti-d, Anti-ONLY


05 5000 – 4

2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.

B. Welding Procedures per Paragraph 1.4.A.1.

C. Welding Qualifications per Paragraph 1.4.A.1.

D. Inspector Certification per Paragraph 1.4A.2.

E. Fabrication, Inspection, and Testing (FIT) Plan

F. Submit Federal Green Procurement requirements as stated below via product data, cutsheet, or other product information sheet.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. Personnel and procedures for welding structural steel shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1 or AWS D1.6, as applicable, before welding. Qualification in accordance with ASME B&PVC, Section IX may be substituted for this requirement. Maintain copy of welding procedure specifications, procedure qualification records, and welder performance qualification test results at jobsite.

2. Visual weld examinations shall be performed, and appropriate documentation prepared, by personnel who have been certified in accordance with AWS D1.1 or AWS D1.6, as applicable.

B. Suspect and Misrepresented Products: See contract documents for required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.


A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature requirements and other conditions for storage.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 71 of 450

FORY ASSUY ASSU

ng: Qualing: Qual

onINFORMATION

nel andnel anance with nce with

ion in accion in accor this requthis requ

rocedure rocedure esults at joults at jo

ns shall bens shall bey personnepersonny

r AWS DAWS D

contraccontracoduduONLY

cts.cts.

nimum annimum an


05 5000 – 5

2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to project site in time for installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Federal Green Procurement Requirements:


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Ferrous Metals

1. W-Shapes: ASTM A992.

2. Channels, Angles: ASTM A36.

3. Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500, Grade B.

4. Steel plate: ASTM A36.

5. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B.

B. Stainless Steel – 304L or 316L

1. Bars and shapes: ASTM A276, ASTM A479.

2. Tubing: ASTM A269, ASTM A554.

3. Pipe: ASTM A312, seamless, welded.

4. Plate, sheet and strip: ASTM A240.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 72 of 450

etal Surfatal Surfarwise indiwise indi

provide mprovide m

INFORMATION

ProcuremProcurem

ast 16% ret 16% re

ONLY0, Grade BGrade


05 5000 – 6

C. Fasteners and Welding Materials

1. General:

a. Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls.

b. Provide the fasteners and welding materials indicated for use in stainless steel and aluminum work.

c. Suspect/counterfeit bolts will not be accepted and will be replaced at the Subcontractor’s expense.

2. Bolts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A325 (replaced by F3125/F3125M; Type 1.

a. Nuts: ASTM A563 heavy hex type.

b. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1.

3. Threaded Rod: ASTM A193, Grade B7

4. For use in stainless steel work

a. Bolts, nuts, and washers: ASTM A354.

5. For use in aluminum work

a. Bolts, nuts, and washers: Stainless steel. Steel, galvanized.

D. Post-Installed Anchors in Concrete:

1. See Section 03 1500, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchors.”

E. Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554; Grade 55, weldable, ASTM A307 or as indicated on design drawings.

1. Shape: Headed, Threaded, and Nutted.

2. Furnish with nut and washer; unfinished.

F. Weld Material: AWS D1.1, ER70S-X or E70XX, or 308L-XX; or AWS D1.6, E316L-XX, as applicable.

G. Handrail: Welded pipe.

H. Grating: Galvanized steel (welded).

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 73 of 450

FOR

BBF31F31

a.a NN

INFORMATION

WasheWash

Rod: ASTRod: AST

less steel less steel

nd washernd washer

: Stainless: Stainles

ONLYrete Anchrete Anch

M A307 oM A307 o


05 5000 – 7

I. Corrugated Metal Decking: 1 1/2” 20 Gage Composite Corrugated Metal floor decking. Minimum superimposed live load rated to 400 psf.

J. Pre-Fabricated Metal Framing Components: B-Line®4 or approved equivalent.

K. Federal Green Procurement:


2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS or ASME specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Shop Primers: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, and universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI No. 79.

1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 2U).

2. Use primer containing pigment that makes it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, non-shrink, non-metallic grout complying with ASTM C1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Verify measurements, including field measurements, before fabrication. Provide miscellaneous bolts and anchors, supports, braces, and connections necessary for completion of metal fabrications. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications shown to receive finish hardware and similar items. Bolt connections as shown on the drawings.

B. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32- in., unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

4 B-Line is a registered trademark of Cooper Technologies Company, Houston, TX.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 74 of 450

FORop Primop Prim

d primer cprimer

se primse priml INFORMATION

er erated accoted acco

r containir containimer.r.

Grout: Facout: Facth ASTMh ASTM

for interiofor interio

surementuremenacesaceONLY

, and , and, drill, anddrill, an

. Bolt coBolt co

exte


05 5000 – 8

D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. All exposed surfaces shall be smooth and free of sharp or jagged edges. Locate joints where they are least conspicuous.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop the same strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Remove welding flux immediately.

3. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.

2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products,” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

1. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning.”

B. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete,

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 75 of 450

FOR

susu

re exposeexpose, unless o, unless

INFORMATION

drill, andrill, anws, and simws, and sim

MINING ANG AN

ming and ing and k

plates, andlates, anes, shapes, shapes

on retainedn retaingers, angers, anONLY

d

ArchitecArchitecating finating fin


05 5000 – 9

sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, “Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel,” for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding and Shop Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1, AWS D1.3, AWS D1.6, or AWS D9.1, as applicable.

2. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop the same strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Tools marked for stainless steel shall be used on stainless steel only. Tools previously used on carbon steel shall not be used on stainless steel. Areas on the stainless steel that show signs of coming in contact with carbon steel (rust marks or streaks) shall be cleaned of the free iron.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 76 of 450

FOR

and and

xposed coposed cotions thattions tha

f shiph INFORMATION

pingpingthat havehat hav

ed field cofield co

hop Weldiop Weldi

ing in accong in accD9.1, as ap9.1, as a

that minimthat minnce of basee of ba

ONLYwelds and elds an

ng and cog and co

ices


05 5000 – 10

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers’ written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 09 9123, “Painting.”


A. Perform visual inspection of all welds in accordance with AWS D1.1 (Section 6.9 and Table 6.1), AWS D1.3 (Section 6.1.1), AWS D1.6 (Section 6.28), or AWS 9.1 (Section 6), as applicable.

B. Special Inspection is required for all anchor bolt installations. See Section 03 1500, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchors,” for inspection requirements.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 77 of 450

FOR

AA

chup Painup Paintions, andtions, an

” INFORMATION

ONTROONTROLL

ction of alion of al1.31.3 (Secti(Secti

pplicable.plicable.

r all anchr all anchAnchors,”Anchors,

0000ONLY


07 2100 – 1

SECTION 07 2100

THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK


1. Perimeter insulation.

2. Concealed building insulation.

3. Rigid wall insulation.

4. Sound attenuation (glass fiber blanket) insulation.

5. Spray polyurethane foam insulation.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 09, Section 09 2900 “Gypsum Board,” for installation in steel-stud-framed assemblies of insulation specified by referencing this Section.

2. Division 22, Section 22 0719 “Piping Insulation.”

3. Division 23, Section 23 0700 “HVAC Insulation.”


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.



ASTM C518 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus

ASTM C578 Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 78 of 450

FOR RigidRigi

ound atound aINFORMATION

polyurethpolyureth

clude the de the

ion 09 29on 09 29lies of insies of in

719 “Pipin9 “Pipi

HVAC InHVAC In

DARDDARONLY

S

ng Generang Gener this Sectthis Sec

rt of thert of thecu


07 2100 – 2

ASTM C665 Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing

ASTM C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

ASTM D1621 Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics

ASTM D1622 Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics

ASTM D2126 Standard Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging

ASTM D2482 Standard Test Method for Surface Strength of Paper (Wax Pick Method)

ASTM D6226 Standard Test Method for Open Cell Content of Rigid Cellular Plastics

ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials


ASTM E136 Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750°C

ASTM E283 Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen

B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 2818 Greenguard Certification

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit Federal Green Procurement requirements as stated below via product data, cutsheet, or other product information sheet.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 79 of 450

FOR

M DM D

D2482 D2482

INFORMATION

StanStanCharaChara

andard Teandard Tesmission smission

Test Methest Metand Maand MaONLY

hod for Bhod for Bace at 750ce at 75

DeterminDeterminind


07 2100 – 3


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspection agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84.

2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119.

3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E136.


Not used.

1.6 DEFINITIONS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths) or rolls.

PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.

D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 80 of 450

FOR

FF

CombComb

ORAORAINFORMATION

GE,GE

InsulationnsulationIced in boaed in boa

ONLYrequiremrequirem

limited toimited to

nufacturenufactureut arut


07 2100 – 4

MOLDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Expanded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively:

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Insulfoam, LLC.

b. Dow Chemical Company.

c. Owens Corning.

B. Products/Systems: EPS insulation boards, including the following:

1. Flat Stock Board: “R-Tech” exterior wall board insulation.

a. Material: Rigid, closed cell, expanded polystyrene (EPS) board stock base.

b. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C578.

c. Thickness: 2-in.

d. Nominal Density: 1.00 pcf.

e. Flamespread Index (ASTM E84): Contact manufacturer for test results.

f. Smoke Development Index (ASTM E84): Contact manufacturer for test results.

2. Flat Stock Board – Below Grade: “R-Tech” below grade (BG) perimeter insulation.

a. Material: Rigid, closed cell, expanded polystyrene (EPS) board stock.

b. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C578.

c. Thickness: As required to meet indicated R-value.

d. Nominal Density: 1.00 pcf.

e. Flamespread Index (ASTM E84): Contact manufacturer for test results.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 81 of 450

FOR oducts/Soducts/S

Flat StocFlat Sto

INFORMATION

MateriMatestock basstock bas

rial Standl Stand

2--in.in.

yy: 1.00 pc: 1.00 p

ASTM E8ASTM E8

ASTMSTMONLY

M E8M E8

below gralow gra


07 2100 – 5

f. Smoke Development Index (ASTM E84): Contact manufacturer for test results.

C. Federal Green Procurement

1. Contains 7% biobased materials.

2. Meets UL 2818 Greenguard Certification.

GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following, or as approved by the Construction Field Lead:

1. CertainTeed Corporation.

2. Johns Manville.

3. Owens Corning.

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics.

C. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated:

1. 3 1/2-in. thick sound walls with a thermal resistance of 11 degrees F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 degrees F.

2. 5 1/2-in. thick with a thermal resistance of 21 degrees F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 degrees F.

3. 12-in. thick with a thermal resistance of 38 degrees F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 degrees F.

D. Federal Green Procurement:

1. Contains at least 20% recovered glass cullet.

2. Meets UL 2818 Greenguard Certification.

SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Sound attenuation batt insulation as manufactured byOwens-Corning, or the Architect’s approved equal.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 82 of 450

FORre nre n

ad:ad:

CertainTCertainT

INFORMATION

ManvillManv

rning.rning.

Blanket IBlanket InnIIting ng of fibof fib

50, respec50, respe

is indicateis indicath thermaltherma

malmaONLYresisresis

degreesdegre FF


07 2100 – 6

B. Type: Unfaced glass fiber acoustical insulation complying with ASTM C665, Type I.

C. Thickness: 3 1/2-in. thick by 14 1/2-in. wide by length as required to fill cavity completely.

D. Surface Burning Characteristics:

1. Maximum Flame Spread: 10.

2. Maximum Smoke Developed: 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

E. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E136.

F. Sound Transmission Class: STC 50-54.

G. Dimensional Stability: Linear shrinkage less than 0.1 percent.

SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for closed-cell polyurethane foam system is based on BASF The Chemical Company’s “Spraytite 178” Series, 2 lb. density with an R-value of 6.7 per inch. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following, or as approved by the Construction Field Lead:

1. Dow Chemical Company.

2. Henry Company.

3. SWD Urethane Company.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 83 of 450

FOR

busbus

nd TransmTran

nal nal StaStINFORMATION

bilbi

THANE FHANE F

duct: Thect: Thehemical Chemical C

r inch. Sunch. Sur a compar a compa

ield Lead:ield Lead

ONLY


07 2100 – 7

B. Properties:

PROPERTY METHOD SPRAYTITE 178Cured Foam:Density, core (pcf @ 2" lifts) ASTM D1622 2.0 – 2.3Thermal resistance (aged) k-factor (Btu in/ft2 hr. ºF)

ASTM C518 0.149 at 1 inch thick0.145 at 4 inches thick

R-value (ft2 hr ºF/Btu in) Calculated 6.7 in< 4 inches thick6.9/in @ ≥ 4 inches thick

Compressive strength (psi) ASTM D1621 26+/.5%^Water vapor transmission –permeability (perm-inch)

ASTM E96 1.39

Water vapor transmission –permeance (perms)

ASTM E96 1.39 at 1 inch thickness0.70 at 2 inch thickness0.46 at 3 inch thickness0.35 at 4 inch thickness

Water absorption (volume %) ASTM D2482 0.60Response to thermal and humid aging (% linear change) 158º F/97% RH/ 168 hours

ASTM D2126 4.9

Closed cell content (%) ASTM D6226 98Surface burning characteristics –Flame Spread Index

ASTM E84 ∀ 25

Surface burning characteristics –Smoke Developed Index

ASTM E84 ∀ 350

Air leakage ASTM E283 <0.005 at 1 inch

VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Two outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 25 lb/1000 square feet, with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm.

1. Available Products:

a. Raven Industries, Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 6WW.

b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-65.

B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.

C. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 84 of 450

FOR

r vr vrmeancemeance

sorptioorptioRR

INFORMATION

n (vn (hermal ahermal a

change) 1change) 1oursurs

IN%))

FOeristics ristics ––

OR–– A

MAAATASTMASTM

ATATATIATIO

ONLYouter laouter laof either nof either n

eet, with met, with m


07 2100 – 8

D. Single-Component Non-Sag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25, use NT related to exposure, and use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates.

ACCESSORIES

A. Provide installation accessories for expanded polystyrene insulation as follows:

1. Adhesive: Material, type and manufacturer shall be compatible with EPS insulation board and acceptable to EPS insulation board manufacturer.

2. Wall Ties: Material, type and manufacturer shall be compatible with EPS insulation board and acceptable to EPS insulation board manufacturer.

3. Mechanical Fasteners: Material, type and manufacturer shall be compatible with EPS insulation board and acceptable to EPS insulation board manufacturer.

EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance.


PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.

INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer’s written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 85 of 450

FOR MecMeccompacompaboard maboard m

INFORMATION

conditionconditionn which suwhich s

performaperform

nlynly after u after yy

ONLYtion or vapon or v

retarders otarders


07 2100 – 9

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer’s standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or R-value.

INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer’s written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm-in-winter side of construction, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.

D. Install glass-fiber or mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. For framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96-in. support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to studs.

E. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.

F. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 86 of 450

FORubstraubstracement acement a

nts betwents betwedgedg INFORMATION

of eof eompletedompleted

y insulatioinsulati

ed units wed units wrwise indwise ind

es in vapoes in vapng construng constru

ulation in clation in irements:irements:

fif ONLYl the cathe cired to fillired to fil

ends.ends.

mbers tmbers tfr


07 2100 – 10

1. Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.

2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER INSULATION

A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24-in. below exterior grade line.

B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.

C. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection course with joints butted. Set in adhesive according to insulation manufacturer’s written instructions.

D. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying protection course with joints butted.

E. Apply a polystyrene-compatible caulk or mastic to the top of the board to minimize water infiltration behind the insulation board.

INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS

A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.

B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16-in. o.c.

C. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer’s written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.

D. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 87 of 450

FOR

ee

horizontal rizontal instructioinstructi

INFORMATION

grade ingrade inpplypplying ping p

ation manution man

orizontal iorizontal iwith joinwith join

caulk or caulk or the insulathe insul

S

ofo ONLYareas tareas

other anchother anneous voideous voi

ation.ation

ng n


07 2100 – 11

E. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder.

F. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.

INSTALLATION OF SOUND ATTENUATION BATT INSULATION

A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case.

B. Batts may be friction-fit in place until the interior finish is applied. Install batts to fill entire stud cavity. If stud cavity is less than 96-in. in height, cut lengths to friction-fit against floor and ceiling tracks. Walls with penetrations require that insulation be carefully cut to fit around outlets, junction boxes, and other irregularities.

C. Where insulation must extend higher than 8 feet, temporary support can be provided to hold product in place until the finish material is applied.

PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 88 of 450

FOR

ntirentirectionction-fit afit a

ation be cion be crities.rities. INFORMATION

ion muston musd product product

and vapoand vapobuse, andbuse, an

nsulation insulation ient constrent constr

0000ONLY


07 8413 – 1

SECTION 07 8413

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.






ASTM E814 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems

D. FM Global

FM 4991 Standard for the Approval of

Firestop Contractors Information and FCIA Member, FM Approved Contractor List

Building Materials Approval Guide

E. Intertek Group

Directory of Listed Building Products

Firestop Systems

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 89 of 450

FORDD

and generaand genend Divisiod Divisio

ummINFORMATION


herwise inerwise i

ASTM)ASTM)

StandarStandaCharacteriharacteri

ard Test Mrd Test MSySystemsstems

ONLYproval ofproval of

rmation armationntractorac


07 8413 – 2

F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

Fire Resistance Directory

UL 1479 Standard for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestops

SUBMITTALS


B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency’s illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer’s fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

D. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer’s written recommendations.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for penetration firestopping.

F. Include approved design intended for use with each fire stopping product. The design shall come from UL Fire Resistance Directory or other NRTL directory.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, “Approval of Firestop Contractors,” or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its “Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements.”

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer’s products per specified requirements. Manufacturer’s willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements:

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 90 of 450

FOR inspinspconditconditpenetratipenetrat

gineergineeINFORMATION

ng ng

Data: For qata: For

: From IFrom InnIIIwith requwith requ

n evaluation evaluatioetration firtration f

e with eac with ee DirectoDirectONLY

y

ed by FM d by FMor been or been

r Pro


07 8413 – 3

1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in “Penetration Firestopping” Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by the following:

i UL in its “Fire Resistance Directory.”

ii Intertek ETL SEMKO in its “Directory of Listed Building Products.”

iii FM Global in its “Building Materials Approval Guide.”


Not used.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer’s written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping.

C. Notify Owner’s testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 91 of 450

INFORMATION

iiiiii

E, AAND HND H

ot install pt install limits perlimits per

et becauset becaus

ONLYnufacturerufacture

s inadequainadequ


07 8413 – 4

PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Hilti, Inc.

2. Specified Technologies Inc.

3. 3M Fire Protection Products.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-in. wg

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls.

2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E84.

D. VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping that complies with the followinglimits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.

3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

E. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 92 of 450

FORATIONATIO

e penetrate penetrading toding tINFORMATION

rereoriginal original

stopping stopping g openingsg openings

sistancesistance--Rer ASTMASTM

of of 0.010.0 -inin

include finclude f

resistanceesistanc

ONLYducts withucts wit

respectiveespectiv

ies wi


07 8413 – 5

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation.

b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.

c. Fire-rated form board.

d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials.

3. Substrate primers.

4. Collars.

5. Steel sleeves.

FILL MATERIALS

A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.

E. Intumescent Putties: Non-hardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a non-shrinking, homogeneous mortar.

H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 93 of 450

FOR CollaColl

teel sleeeel sleINFORMATION

v

op DeviceDevicend consind consists

extendedextendeork, and aork, and a

nt latex forlatex fo

ars formears formpecifeciONLY

ic diac dia

isting isting of of

tant pan


07 8413 – 6

I. Silicone Foams: Multi-component, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam.

MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer’s written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer’s recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping’s seal with substrates.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 94 of 450

FOR ATIONATION

ne substrane substrnts fos INFORMATION

r opr opecting peecting p

llation onlation on

openopenings ingsnufacturernufacturer

g substratg substre with awith aONLY

d

ms to proms to prwith penewith pen

rom clearom clea


07 8413 – 7

INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.

C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 95 of 450

FOR tall fill mtall fill m

wing resuing resu

l voidvoINFORMATION

s ans annetratingnetrating

d

als so theys so theynetrating ietrating

will remaiwill rema, uniform , uniform

tot ONLYperformerfor

pping is daping is dpping to cpping to


07 8413 – 8

Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL’s “Fire Resistance Directory” under product Category XHEZ.

B. Where Intertek ETL SEMKO-listed systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers in Intertek ETL SEMKO’s “Directory of Listed Building Products” under “Firestop Systems.”

C. Where FM Global-approved systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers listed in FM Global’s “Building Materials Approval Guide” under “Wall and Floor Penetration Fire Stops.”

D. Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- F-A-WL.

2. F-Rating: 1 hour.

3. T-Rating: 1 hour.

4. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.

E. Firestopping for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-WL.




F. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-W-L.




RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 96 of 450

FOR here FM here FM

d in FM Gn FM GenetrationenetratioINFORMATION

or Metalor Meta

fied Syed Systeste

r

required trequired

duit, or Tuuit, or T

ONLY


07 8413 – 9

G. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-W-L.





RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 97 of 450



07 9200 – 1

SECTION 07 9200

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK


1. Silicone joint sealants.

2. Latex joint sealants.



The following documents and others referenced therein form the part of the Contract to the extent designated in this Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.


ASTM C834 Standard Specification for Latex Sealants


ASTM C1193 Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants

ASTM C1330 Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid-Applied Sealants

B. Code of Federal Regulation (CFR)

40 CFR 59 National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Consumer and Commercial Products


ASTM E814–88 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops

D. CIE/DIN Age Testing

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 98 of 450

FOR D DOCUD DOCU

general peneral pto tho INFORMATION

s Ses Se

nts and oths and otis Sectionis Section

herwise inerwise in

M)M)

andard Spandard Sp

d SpecificSpecifi

fof ONLYr Use oUse o

n for Cylinn for Cylold Lold Liquidu


07 9200 – 2

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

Fire Resistance Directory

SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Federal Green Procurement requirements as stated below via product data, cutsheet or other product information sheet.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Not used.


A. See Contract Statement of Work for general requirements.

B. Deliver products in original, unopened packaging with legible manufacturer’s identification.

PRODUCTS

MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Federal Green Procurement

1. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.

b. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.

c. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

C. Exposed Joint Sealants: To be paintable.

SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Type 1, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 99 of 450

FORY, SY, S

Contractontrac

roductsroductn INFORMATION

in

t sealants,t sealanter and withr and with

strated btrated byy

l ONLYnts and ts andomplomply wity wit

to 40 CFRto 40 CFR


07 9200 – 3

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Dow Corning®5 Corporation; Part 791.

b. GE®6 Advanced Materials - Silicones; UltraPruf II SCS2900.

c. Tremco®7 Incorporated; Spectrem 3.

B. Type 2, Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.


a. BASF Building Systems; Omniplus.

b. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.

c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700.

d. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 100 WF.

e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.

LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Type 5, Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF.


a. Bostik®8, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600.

b. Pecora®9 Corporation; AC-20+.

c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

ACCESSORIES

A. Fill, void, or cavity materials: As classified under Category XHHW in the UL Fire Resistance Directory.

B. Forming materials: As classified under Category XHKU in the UL Fire Resistance Directory.

5 Dow Corning is a trademark of Dow Corning Corporation, Midland, Michigan.6 GE is a registered trademark of General Electric Company, Schenectady, New York.7 Tremco is a registered trademark of Tremco Incorporated, Beachwood, Ohio.8 Bostik is a registered trademark of Bostik SA Corporation, Courbevoie, France.9 Pecora is a registered trademark of Weimbold Corporation, Wilmington, Delaware.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 100 of 450

FOR a.a.

b.b DD

INFORMATION

GE AGE Ad

ayay Nation Natioyy

o IncorporIncorpo

rylic latexrylic latex

with requwith requ

ONLY


07 9200 – 4

JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive firestop sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.


PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces to be in contact with seal materials of dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, rust, or other substances that may affect proper fitting and adhesion.

INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with firestop-sealant manufacturer’s written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C1193 for use of sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 101 of 450

FOR fillefille

ere applicere appli

ONON INFORMATION

dicated to icated to uirements rements

formance.rmance

after unsafter un

materialsmateriay affect affectONLY

p

s written writtenss more ss more


07 9200 – 5

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.

CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of firestop sealants.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 102 of 450



08 1113 – 1

SECTION 08 1113

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK


1. Interior standard hollow metal doors and frames.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 08, Section 08 7100, “Door Hardware,” for door hardware.

2. Division 09, Sections 09 9123, “Painting,” for field painting hollow metal door frames.

3. Division 26, Section 26 0519, “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables,” for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for door controls and operators.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS


The following documents and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to theextent designated in this Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Door and Hardware Institute (DHI)

ANSI/DHI A115 Hardware Preparations in Steel Doors and Frames

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Steel Door Institute (SDI)

ANSI/SDI A250.4 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors

ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames

ANSI/SDI A250.8 Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 103 of 450

FORdd

DivisDivi

Divisionivisionr frf INFORMATION

mes.mes.

26, Sectio6, Secti” for electror electr

nd operatond operat

Contract, intract, iections, apctions, ap

herein, foherein, fomentsentsONLY

are tare t

and Hardnd Hard


08 1113 – 2

ANSI/SDI A250.10 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames

ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames


ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

ASTM A591 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, for Light Coating Mass Applications

ASTM A1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable

ASTM A1011 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength

ASTM C665 Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing

ASTM C1363 Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Materials and Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus

ASTM E136 Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750°C

D. Steel Door Institute (SDI)

SDI 117 Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Other Protectives

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 104 of 450

TM A1TM A1

INFORMATION

HHLowLowImprovImpro

andard Spandard Spmal Insulamal Insula

nufacturedufactured

t MethoMethl ONLY

d s and Enand Ex Apparatx Apparat

r Behavior Behav750°C750°C


08 1113 – 3

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.

B. Shop drawings shall include the following:

1. Elevations of each door design.

2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.

3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.

4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.

5. Details of each different wall opening condition.

6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.

7. Details of accessories.

8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.

9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

C. Other Action Submittals:

1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.

D. Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.

F. Submit Federal Green Procurement requirements as stated below via product data, cutsheet or other product information sheet.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 105 of 450

FOR

mm

LocatiLocati

etails oetails INFORMATION

f ef e

of anchorof anchor

cessoriesssorie

gs, removags, remo

preparationreparatio

hollow mehollow mmee refreONLY

erenerenate with ate with

to be fire rbe fire

sive teve


08 1113 – 4


A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-in. high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.

1. Provide minimum 1/4-in. space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

1.6 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.

B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Amweld Building Products, LLC.

2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 106 of 450

FOR

highhig

ProvidProvidcirculatiocirculati

INFORMATION

ess: Minimess: Mini

Work: HWork: H

imensionsimension

ONLYmetal frameetal fram

horages, inorages, ichors. Dchors. D


08 1113 – 5

3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.

4. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Frame Anchors: ASTM A591, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A1008 or ASTM A1011, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153, Class B.

C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153.

D. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.

E. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics.

F. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section 08 8000, “Glazing.”

G. Federal Green Procurement:

1. Energy Star.

STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1. Design: Flush panel.

2. Core Construction: Manufacturer’s standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.

a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 107 of 450

FORAAASAS

Bolts, an Bolts, a

INFORMATION

ted Fastted Fasticated, fabcated, fab

evices for vices for

n: ASTMn: ASTMrs manufacmanufa

ximum flaximum fllly;y passin passin

DivisionDivision 0

ONLY


08 1113 – 6

b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 4.0 degrees F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C1363.

i. Locations: Exterior doors and interior doors where indicated.

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge.

a. Beveled Edge: 1/8-in. in 2-in.

4. Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2 1/8-in. radius.

5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-in. thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.

6. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, “Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.”

B. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush), 18 gauge.

a. Width: 1 3/4-in.

2. Color: Refer to Division 09, Section 09 0000 “Materials Legend.”

C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered and continuously welded corners.

2. Frames for Metal Doors: 0.053-in. thick steel sheet.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 108 of 450

FOR

22

Top anTop anclosures closures

INFORMATION

nces: Conces: Cd Steel Dod Steel D

sheets faheets faments indiments ind

NSISI/SDI/SDIIII AA

rformanceformance

09 09 ONLY0000 “M000 “

ANSINSI/SDI/SDIIeets.ets.

fromf


08 1113 – 7

3. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.053-in. thick steel sheet.


C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.

FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Steel Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage steel stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042-in. thick.

STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032-in. thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8-in. high unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032-in. thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed.

ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding.

B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-in. thick by 1-in. wide steel.

FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer’s plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.

C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 109 of 450

FOR ND MOND M

ngs for Glngs for Gerial aserial aINFORMATION

dod

Moldings: oldings: less otherwless otherw

d Lites in Fd Lites inmes in whes in wh

adjacent adjacent

11-inin. widwidONLYefects, wafects, wath minimth minim

s in min


08 1113 – 8

2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Steel Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18-in. from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32-in. o.c. and as follows:

ii. Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.

iii. Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.

iv. Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.

v. Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.

vi. Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions.

6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.

b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section 08 7100, “Door Hardware.”

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 110 of 450

INFORMATION

iii.iii.

Five Five

Five anchoFive anchoh 24 inche24 inche

hors per hhors per hmetalmetal-studstu

herer-stripp-striples cleares clearONLY

n strike jastrike j

jamb to ramb to r


08 1113 – 9

2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware.

3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.

4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections.

F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.

5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated.

STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer’s standard primer immediately after cleaning and pre-treating.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer’s standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 111 of 450

FOR SingSingside ofside of

ultipletipINFORMATION

GlaGlaeach glaeach gl

ed frame ed frame and framnd fram

and moldand mold

between between tion indicaion indic

prp ONLYmer immer im

uring, leadring, leaacceptanacceptan

co


08 1113 – 10

C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16-in., measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16-in., measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16-in., measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16-in., measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.

b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 112 of 450

FOR AligAligparalleparalle

wist: Pwist: INFORMATION

usuallel lineallel line

: Plus orPlus ord to floorto floor

mes to recmes to rec

mb, rigid, mb, rigidnd manud manuONLY

mes of sizees of siz

ed, and bed, and bctiont


08 1113 – 11

d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured.

e. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of post-installed expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members.

4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16-in., measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16-in., measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16-in., measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16-in., measured at jambs at floor.

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section 08 80 00 “Glazing” and with hollow metal manufacturer’s written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9-in.o.c. and not more than 2-in. o.c. from each corner.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 113 of 450

FORCeilCeiloverheoverheanchoredanchore

strutsruINFORMATION

to prto pe adjustae adjusta

TolerancTolerancst, and plut, and plu

Plus or mPlus or from jamfrom ja

minus minus 1/11to o plane oplane o

, meas, meaONLY

urrpendicupendi

measured measured

ionion 08 S08 Stru


08 1113 – 12

B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

C. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer’s written instructions.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 114 of 450



08 7100 – 1

SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section includes mechanical door hardware for swinging, sliding and folding doors:

1. Hinges.

2. Lock cylinders and keys.

3. Lock and latch sets.

4. Closers.

5. Miscellaneous door control devices.

6. Door trim units.

7. Electrified door hardware.


1. Division 08 Section 08 1113 “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.”




A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Steel Door Institute (SDI)

ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames

ANSI/SDI A250.8 Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 115 of 450

FORLoL

Lock anLock an

sere INFORMATION

neous dooeous do

s

dware.dware.

Hollow MHollow M

DARDDARONLY

S

ng Generang Generathis Sectithis Sec

rt of thert of thecu


08 7100 – 2

G. ASTM International (ASTM)

ASTM E283 Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen

H. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA)

BHMA A156.1 Butts and Hinges

BHMA A156.3 Exit Devices

BHMA A156.4 Door Controls-Closers

BHMA A156.6 Architectural Door Trim

BHMA A156.13 Mortise Locks

BHMA A156.16 Auxiliary Hardware

BHMA A156.18 Materials and Finishes

BHMA A156.21 Thresholds

BHMA A156.22 Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems

I. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI)

DHI WDHS.2 Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors

DHI WDHS.3 Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors

J. Housing and Urban Development (HUD)

Fair Housing Accessibility Guidelines

K. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 70, Article 100 National Electrical Code

NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives

NFPA 105 Standard for Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening Protectives

NFPA 252 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 116 of 450

FOR

AA

MAA A156A15

A156.13A156.1INFORMATION

166

ThreThr

Door Gaskoor Gask

ded Fasteded Faste

ONLYcations ations

Flush DoFlush D


08 7100 – 3

L. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of DoorAssemblies

UL 1784 Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies and Other Opening Protectives

M. U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board (ATBCB)

Accessibility Guidelines

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Other Action Submittals:

1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of a recognized architectural finish hardware supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Project manager, detailing Owner’s final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents.

C. Hardware Schedule: Submit six copies of final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related Work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into hardware groups indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Schedule hardware items for each door separately, and list each door in numerical order under a separate heading using door number in door schedule. Do not group doors with like or similar hardware under a single heading. Include the following information:

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 117 of 450

FORoduct Daoduct Da

allation deation deofiles, andofiles, an

INFORMATION

SubmittSubmi

dware Schdware Schrchitecturahitectura

or hardwaror hardwarnate final dte final d

nsure propnsure prop

y or underor undey keying inkeying

x each keach kththONLY

eye ContrCont

dware schware scsize, thicksize, thi


08 7100 – 4

Heading 26

Single door 41; Corridor 100 from Classroom 101

3070 x 134 – WD x HMF x LHR

1 1/2 pair Butts BB179 US26D 4 1/2 x 4 1/2

1 Lockset 786L-L9555 4532D x CLS x WBX

1 Door Closer P120 SBL x SBL

1 Kickplate 5014-8 x 34-410

1 Wall Bumper W9 US26D

3 Silencers 33

2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other Work that is critical in the project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop Drawings of other Work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule.

D. Templates: Submit templates for doors, frames, and other Work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop Drawings of other Work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

E. Qualification Data: For Architectural Hardware Consultant.

1. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies.

F. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes.

G. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware and keying schedule.

H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 118 of 450

FOR 1 Wal1 Wal

SilencSilencINFORMATION

rsrs

al Sequenal Sequeny where acwhere ac

other Wother Wode with scwith sc

cted by doed by doew of schew of sc

oors, framoors, fraf door harddoor ha

visions arevisions areicated icatedONLY

reqq

ConsultanConsultan

ttypypes anaor assemor assem


08 7100 – 5

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Supplier Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project’s vicinity.

2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware.

B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as follows:

1. For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer.

1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.

D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and Draft-Control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

F. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested pressure differential of 0.3-in. wg of water.

G. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

I. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 119 of 450

FOR

paraparao is curreo is curre

For door For door

INFORMATION

tions: Otions: O

rified doofied doounless othunless oth

ions and ons and authoritiesuthoritie

re firere fir --ratran assembliassemb

ng agencyng agencyure accoure accONLY

ord

e smokee smoke-hat meets rhat meet

omplianomplian


08 7100 – 6

Board’s ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines ICC/ANSI A117.1 HUD’s “Fair Housing Accessibility Guidelines.”

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.

2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.

b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch.

c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2-in. high.

4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3-in. from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.

J. Keying Conference: Not required; keying by Owner.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.

C. Deliver keys and permanent cores as directed.

COORDINATION

A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 120 of 450

FOR

cc

Bevel raiBevel raresholreshoINFORMATION

s ns n

door closedoor closehe door wie door wi

asured to tured to t

required; kquired; k

DLINGDLING

nd providnd provid

ntifitifONLYcationcationinstructioinstruct


08 7100 – 7

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.

3. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware.

4. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use.

5. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Exit Devices: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.

b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PRODUCTS

SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled on Drawings to comply with requirements in this Section.

B. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers’ products, as follows:

1. Butts: McKinney

2. Continuous Hinges: Select

3. Locksets: Corbin Russwin

4. Cylinders: Medeco

5. Mullions: Von Duprin

6. Exit Devices: Von Duprin

7. Closers: Corbin Russwin

8. Sliding Door Hardware: KNC

9. Pulls: Rockwood

10. Stops: Rockwood

11. Thresholds: Pemko

12. Sweeps: Pemko

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 121 of 450

FORb.b

TSTS

OOOINFORMATION

R HARR HA

dware for dware for Section.ection

vide quanvide quucts, as folucts, as fol

ONLY


08 7100 – 8

13. Gasketing: Pemko

C. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in hardware groups on Drawing Number H-2-837544, Sheet 1. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturers’ Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.

2. References to BHMA Designations: Provide products complying with these designations and requirements for description, quality, and function.

HINGES

A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hinges as manufactured by McKinney.

MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule on Drawing Number H-2-837544, Sheet 1.

B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows.

C. Lock Backset: 2 3/4-in., unless otherwise indicated.

D. Lock Trim:

1. Description: LWM

2. Levers: Wrought

3. Escutcheons: Wrought.

4. Operating Device: Lever with Escutcheon.

E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer’s standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 122 of 450

FOR BHMA BHMAmetameINFORMATION

dodo

cturer: Sucturer: Suctured btured by My

DD LATCLATC

d in door hd in door

quirementuiremen

icacaONLYted.ed.


08 7100 – 9

F. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Grade 1; Series 1000.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Series ML2000 locksets and latchsets as manufactured by Corbin Russwin.

LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Medeco.

EXIT DEVICE AND AUXILIARY ITEMS

A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 99 Series exit devices as manufactured by Von Duprin.

2. Mullion KR4954 – Von Duprin.

KEYING

A. Keying: All keying by Owner.

SURFACE CLOSERS

A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds Controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide DC6000 Series surface closers as manufactured by Corbin Russwin.

MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Wall-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16; polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum base metal.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wall stop 403 as manufactured by Rockwood, or a comparable product.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 123 of 450

FORCECE

Devices aevices

asisasis--ofofidi INFORMATION

DeDe 99 Se 99 S

KR4954 R4954 –

ner.er.

andand-piniopinioperatedoperated

comomONLYmendmend

weather, aneather, ameet fielmeet fiel

ith reth


08 7100 – 10

DOOR GASKETING

A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke Control, as tested according to ASTM E283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide door gasketing as manufactured by Pemko, or a comparable product.

OPERATING TRIM

A. Operating Trim: BHMA A 156.6; stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Rockwood.

THRESHOLDS

A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide thresholds as manufactured by Pemko, or a comparable product.

2.12 FABRICATION

A. Manufacturer’s Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer’s name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect.

1. Manufacturer’s identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.

B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer’s standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18.

C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 124 of 450

FOR

ratinratin

ManufManufproducts products

INFORMATION

MAMA A156.2A156.2

n Product: n Product: as manufas manuf

provide prprovide prle locatione locatio

approvepproveONLYd on rim oon rim

etal indicatal indicd metal ad metal a

alityl


08 7100 – 11

unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.

1. Fire-Rated Applications:

a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following:

i Hinges mortised to doors or frames; use threaded-to-the-head wood screws for wood doors and frames.

ii Strike plates to frames.

iii Closers to doors and frames.

2. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided:

a. Surface hinges to doors.

b. Closers to doors and frames.

c. Surface-mounted exit devices.

3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors.

3. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, “Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors.”

4. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.

FINISHES

A. General hardware finishes are to be 626 “Brushed Chrome” and 630 “Stainless Steel,” complying with BHMA A156.18, or as indicated in the door hardware schedule on Drawing Number H-2-837442, Sheet 2.

B. Door closers are to be painted to match adjacent door hardware.

C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 125 of 450

FOR Steel TSteel T

SINFORMATION

urfur

Closers tClosers t

ce--mountmou

lts: For thlts: For

ors: Comors: Comfor Woodor Woo

oncorrosioncorroscated.cated. ONLYhrome” anome” an

d in the dod in the do


08 7100 – 12

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

PREPARATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, Drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 “Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors.”

INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated on Drawings to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.

2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, “Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors.”

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 126 of 450

FOR ormaorma

mine roughne roughconnectioconnectiINFORMATION

nstallationstallati

: For surf: For surfNSINSI/SDI/SDIIII

II WDHSWDHSral Core Wral Core

ts ats ONLYt height heig

ndicated ordicated

50.8.50.8.


08 7100 – 13

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 in. of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cylinders to secure building and areas during construction period.

1. Owner shall replace construction cylinders with permanent cores two days prior to Substantial Completion.

E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section 07 92 00 “Joint Sealants.”

F. Wall Stops: Provide wall stops for doors unless other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule.

G. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

H. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.

I. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.

ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door Control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 127 of 450

FOR prpr

sholds: Sholds: Snt complnt comp

lantsn INFORMATION

ovide wallide waledule. edule.

pplyply to he to heyy

n to meetinto meetin

, forming forming

ONLYtem of dootem of dunit. Runit. R

tro


08 7100 – 14

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. As indicated in the Door Schedule on Drawing Number H-2-837544, Sheet 1.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 128 of 450



08 8000 – 1

SECTION 08 8000

GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Interior borrowed lites (including units in doors).


1. Division 08, Section 08 1113, “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames,” and interior borrowed lite frames.


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)

AAMA 800

AAMA 806.3

AAMA 807.3

AAMA 810.1

B. American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (ASCE/SEI)

ASCE/SEI 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures


ASTM C509 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 129 of 450

FORated Sectid Sec

ivision ivisionioi INFORMATION

08borrowborr

NTS/CONTS/COD

ons of the ons of theification Sification

eferenced ferenced nced docuced docu

sociationsociationONLY


08 8000 – 2

ASTM C716 Standard Specification for Installing Lock-Strip Gaskets and Infill Glazing Materials

ASTM C864 Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers


ASTM C1036 Standard Specification for Flat Glass

ASTM C1115 Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Silicone Rubber Gaskets and Accessories

ASTM C1330 Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid-Applied Sealants

ASTM E1300 Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings

D. Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (IGMA)

SIGMA TM-3000 North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealing Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glass Samples: Submit samples, 12-in. square, for each of the following:

1. Insulating glass.

2. Single glazed borrowed lites.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

D. Qualification Data: For Installers and manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-coated, low-e coatings.

E. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.

F. Product Test Report for Review and Record: Submit for tinted glass, coated glass, and insulating glass.

G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 130 of 450

M C1330M C1330

INFORMATION

nufacturerfacturer

North NorthInsulatinInsulatin

esidentialesidential

glazing mlazing ONLYfor each oor each


08 8000 – 3

H. Submit Federal Green Procurement requirements as stated below via product data, cutsheet or other product information sheet.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association’s Certified Glass Installer Program.

C. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain clear float glass, tinted float glass, coated float glass, and insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

D. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.

E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, “North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use.”

F. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer’s name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

G. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of Insulating Glass Certification Council.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer’s written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 131 of 450

FOR

ce Lce Lat glass, at glass,

glass tlass typeype

mitatiit INFORMATION

ons ons cturer focturer fo

ns: Compns: Comganizatioanizatio

e publicatipublicatd standarstandar

sulating Gsulating Ges for Seaes for Sea

se.”se.”

zing labzing laff ONLY

ely Glaziny Glazcturer’s ncturer’s n

ass complass com

rked eithked eithfic


08 8000 – 4

DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations according to ASTM C1036.

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ASTM E1300 by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria:

1. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings.

a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph.

b. Importance Factor: 1.15.

c. Exposure Category: B.

2. Design Snow Loads: Not less than snow loads applicable to Project as required by ASCE 7 “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures,” Section 7.0 “Snow Loads.”

3. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

1. Temperature Change: 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F, material surfaces.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 132 of 450

FOR

andandakage atakage atallation; faation; fa

ration of gration of

INFORMATION

sign: Deign: DeSTMSTM EE130130

riteria:riteria:

essures: Dessures: Do ASCE/SASCE/S

90 mph90 mph.

ONLYads applicds appli

for Buildfor Buil


08 8000 – 5

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 degrees F.

WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer’s standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer’s written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer’s Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer’s standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer’s written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PRODUCTS

INTERIOR BORROWED LITE

A. Interior borrowed lite frames are specified in Section 08 1113 “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.”

1. Glass: 1.4-in. clear monolithic (tempered where required).

GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:

1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C864.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 133 of 450

FORufacufac

ndard fondard fothat deterhat deter

defined adefinedkage ag INFORMATION

or to or tos written s written

eteriorationerioratio

od: 10 yed: 10 ye

arrantrranty on y ons manufacmanufa

ified warrified warric seal undc seal und

d cleaningd cleaningdence of fdence of f

surfacrfacONLY

es oes o

ubstantial ubstantial


08 8000 – 6

2. EPDM complying with ASTM C864.

3. Silicone complying with ASTM C1115.

4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C1115.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene, EPDM, silicone, or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C542, black.

GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers’ written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Federal Green Procurement.

a. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.

4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Construction Field Lead from manufacturer’s full range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. Basis-of-design product is Dow Corning No. 795, Black.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 134 of 450

FOR

ppglazglaz

trip Gasktrip Gasks withw INFORMATION

mo moblack.black

de glazingde glazingmaterials thmaterials th

glass uniglass ud applicatapplica

d field expd field exp

glal ONLYss manus mansuitable fsuitable f

of installaof instal


08 8000 – 7

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation

b. GE Advanced Materials

c. May National Associates, Inc.

d. Pecora Corporation

e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division

f. Tremco Incorporated

GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; non-staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.

2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.

2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant.

MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 135 of 450

FORf.f

APESAPES

ngINFORMATION

MasticMastpe; none; non--stasta

without spwithout spplication ication

ts indts indicateica

or glazing or glazing

g applicatg applica

ell, Pll ONLYVC fVC f

with AAMith AAM

n which tn which t


08 8000 – 8

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications,to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS UNITS

A. Uncoated Clear Float-Glass Units: Class 1 (clear) annealed or Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass where heat strengthening is required to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with system performance requirements. Provide FT (fully tempered) float glass where indicated or required.

1. Thickness: 1/4-in.

B. Coated Clear Float-Glass Units: Class 1 (clear) annealed or Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass where heat strengthening is required. Provide FT (fully tempered) float glass where indicated or required.

1. Thickness: 1/4- in.

2. Low E Coating: Sputtered, unless pyrolytic is indicated by product designation.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 136 of 450

FOR

TIOTIO

icate glazate glaznd face clend face c

structu INFORMATION

ons ons h syh systemstem

rind verticrind vertight chamfht chamf

xposed glposed gl

ITSITS

lass 1 (cless 1 (clngtheningngthenin

ndividundividuded ONLY

FT (fuFT (fu

Ki


08 8000 – 9

EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.

3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.

4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.

GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 137 of 450

FOR EffEff

d with insd with in

INFORMATION

annels andnnels andove coative coati

locate extlocate ed interiord interio

markmarks in s in

ns of manns of manmore oreONLY

stringstringpublicatiublicati

oject condect condm edge andedge an

es.s


08 8000 – 10

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50-in.

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-in. minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

3. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 138 of 450

FORcoco

ProvideProvidfrom movfrom mo

ss ms mINFORMATION

anufaanufaations.ations.

ch seriesch series

orientationrientatio

riven into riven intovide adeqvide adeq

movememoveme

dONLYinstall gnstallcorners frcorners fr

ded by gased by g


08 8000 – 11

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 139 of 450

FOR plyply cap bcap byy

AZING (AZING

INFORMATION

on gaskeon gasky, with allwith al

on gasket n gasket oints miteroints miter

dge Gaskdge Gaskagainst sofgainst sof

nstalled to stalled ttions at coons at c

a weathera weather with swith sONLY

eal

ass liass lites intes t. Install t. Insta

pressurpressurer


08 8000 – 12

position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING

A. Comply with ASTM C716 and gasket manufacturer’s written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 140 of 450

FOR

G AG A

ect exteriot exterid streamerd streame

ace. Race. RINFORMATION

emem

om contacom contacations. If, ations. If,

th glass, rglass, rcturer.cturer.

ent to or bnt to or ring constring const

deposits, odeposits,

hipped, ipped, vanONLY

ndalismdalism

roject notroject nodate of Sdate of S

ss m


09 0000 – 1

SECTION 09 0000

MATERIALS LEGEND

SECTION PRODUCT MANUFACTURER COLOR/FINISH

08 1113

Interior Hollow Metal Doors & Frames Pittsburgh Paints

Corridor Side: P3, No. 515-1 “China White”

Interior Hollow Metal Doors & Frames Pittsburgh Paints

Room Side: P4, No. 515-4 “Moth Gray”

08 7100 Door Hardware As specified626 “Brushed Chrome” and 630 “Stainless Steel

09 5123Acoustical Ceiling Tile Armstrong

“Fine Fissured Second Look,” color “White”

Acoustical Ceiling Tile Grid Armstrong“Prelude Plus XL Aluminum, color “White”

09 6513 Resilient Base Johnsonite No. 48 “Grey” WG

09 6519.19 Vinyl Composition Floor Tile Armstrong No. 55801 “Platinum”

09 6519.23 Luxury Vinyl Floor Tile Armstrong No. J6217 “Catalina Sand”

09 9123 Interior Paint Pittsburgh Paints

P1: No. 352-1 “Pale Innocence”

P2: No. 515-1 “China White”

P2: No. 515-1 “China White”

P4: No. 515-4 “Moth Gray”

10 2600Resilient Corner Guards Inpro Corporation

Extruded plastic cover, color “Dove Gray”

FRP Wall Protection Inpro CorporationSanparrel Rigid Vinyl Sheet, color “Dove Gray”


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 141 of 450

FORical Ceilingical CeilinF

seseO

on Fn R

ATION o CorporatiCorporat

INFORMA

oor Toor T

TileTileIN

PittPit

NFRRRMRMMA

porationporation

TIOONONLY


09 2900 – 1

SECTION 09 2900

GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK


1. Interior gypsum board.

2. Water-resistant gypsum board.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 05, Section 05 4000 “Cold Formed Metal Framing,” that supports gypsum board.

2. Division 07, Section 07 2100 “Thermal Insulation,” for insulation and vapor retarders installed in assemblies that incorporate gypsum board.

3. Division 09, Section 09 9123 “Painting,” for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces.





ASTM C36 Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard

ASTM C475 Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board

ASTM C840 Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board

ASTM C954 Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. to 0.112 in. in Thickness

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 142 of 450

FORated Sectated Sec

Divisionivisionsumu INFORMATION

m boardm boar

07, Sectio7, Sectiers installinstall

on 09 912on 09 9

ND STAND STA

act, includact, includns,ns applyapply tyy

ONLYform paform paare those are those


09 2900 – 2

ASTM C1396 Standard Specification for Gypsum Board

ASTM E90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements

ASTM E413 Classification for Rating Sound Insulation

B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-in. long length for each trim accessory indicated.

2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer’s standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work.

C. Submit Federal Green Procurement requirements as stated below via product data,cutsheet or other product information sheet.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency.


A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer’s written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 143 of 450

FOR mples: Fmples: F

Trim AcTrim AccessorssoINFORMATION

yy ii

ed Finished Finisheand on samand on sam

ProcuremeProcuremnformatioformatio

ted assemted assemassemblssembly y

TMTM EE4141ONLYd protectd protectructiouc


09 2900 – 3

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PRODUCTS

PANELS, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

B. Federal Green Procurement:

1. Meet UL 2818 Greenguard certification.

INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Complying with ASTM C36 or ASTM C1396, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. American Gypsum Co.

b. BPB America Inc.

c. G-P Gypsum.

d. Lafarge North America Inc.

e. National Gypsum Company.

f. PABCO Gypsum.

g. Temple.

h. USG Corporation.

B. Type X:

1. Thickness: 5/8-in.

2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (tapered) for pre-filling.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 144 of 450

FOR

ral ral

Meet UMeet U

PSUMPSUMINFORMATION

BB

plyplying witing witydicated andicated and

ufacturersufacturerering prodng prod

mited to, tmited to,

Co.Co.

ONLY


09 2900 – 4

C. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8-in., Type X.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C475/C475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.

2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.

3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer’s written recommendations.

1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 145 of 450

FOR GlassGlas

ile Backle BacINFORMATION

in

nd for Ind for IntenteIIe with othewith othe

n jointsn joints, rtingting--tytype pe yyy

: For embFor embse settingse setting

d for instad for instONLYe, alle, all--purppurp

purpose cpurpose c


09 2900 – 5

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112-in. thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section 07 21 00 “Thermal Insulation.”

D. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 07 Section 07 21 00 “Thermal Insulation.”

TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.

B. Texture: Gypsum sheathing boards shall receive a light orange peel texture for all areas, unless noted otherwise.

EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16-in. of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 146 of 450

FORE FINISE FINI

: As reco: As reco

INFORMATION

sum shesum sheoted otherwted other

with Instalwith Instalfor comfor compp

t panels tpanels ONLYconditionondition


09 2900 – 6

joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft.in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-in. wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-in. wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C919 and with manufacturer’s written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Type X: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Ceiling Type: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 147 of 450

FOR

FF

WhereWhereof floor/rof floor/

ucturctuINFORMATION

l ml m

er of gyer of gypsupsuyyyts, exceptts, except

dges with ees with d abuttingabutting

Attach pAttach ) edges of) edges of

ction at petion at pcontinuouontinuou

rtitions rtitionsiONLY

at h manuh maning off soung off sou

itions aboitions ab


09 2900 – 7

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Light orange peel.

E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer’s written instructions for use as exposed soffit board.

APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 148 of 450

FOR FasteniFastenicrews.rews.INFORMATION

M ACCEM ACCE

with backwith backor panels.r panels.

nstructionstruction

s, interiors, interioefects, anfects, a

Promptlyromptly ry

ONLYd damageddamaged

se with trise with t


09 2900 – 8

B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture, free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.

1. Textured finish shall be a light orange peel.

C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer’s written recommendations.

PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 149 of 450

FORotect instaotect inst

ght, constht, const

d rd INFORMATION

eplace peplace

ns that pans that panscoloratiolorat o

anels are manels areface contaface conta

NN 09 290009 2900

ONLY


09 5123 – 1

SECTION 09 5123

ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section includes acoustical tiles and suspension grid for ceilings.





ASTM A641 Standard Specification for Zinc—Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire

ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM C635 Standard Specification for Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings

ASTM C636 Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels

ASTM D3273 Standard Test Method for Pigment Content of Water-Emulsion Paints by Low-Temperature Ashing

ASTM D3274 Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Surface Disfigurement of Paint Films by Fungal or Algal Growth, or Soil and Dirt Accumulation


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 150 of 450

FORd gd g

and Dand D

g documendocumend in thisd in thi

ssINFORMATION

Sotherwotherw

nal (ASTMnal (ASTM

StaS(Galv(Ga

Standard Standard Slvanized) vanized)

nnealed) bnnealed)

ecificatioecificatind Td TONLY

estinestinstical Tileical Til

allation oallation ousticus


09 5123 – 2

ASTM E90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements


ASTM E580 Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions

ASTM E1264 Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products

ASTM G21 Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi

C. Ceiling and Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA)

Ceiling Systems Handbook

D. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)

SUBMITTALS


B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension system members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8-in. = 1 foot.

C. Shop Drawings: Contractor shall provide shop drawings indicating how bracing will avoid interference with other items being installed.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints for ceiling systems.

1. Include design calculations for seismic restraints including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 151 of 450

FOR M G21 M G21

INFORMATION

teriterior Syor Sy

andbookandbook

ArchitectArchitect

oduct indiduct ind

ng plans, g plansd with eawith eaONLYee


09 5123 – 3

E. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

F. Field quality-control test reports.

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each acoustical tile ceiling.

H. Research/Evaluation Reports: For acoustical tile ceiling and components and anchor and fastener type.

I. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

J. Submit Federal Green Procurement requirements as stated below via product data, cutsheet or other product information sheet.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain acoustical ceiling tile and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical tile ceilings that comply with the following requirements:

1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical tile ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical tiles with the following surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84:

a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

b. Flame Spread: 25 or less.

C. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical tile ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions according to the following:

1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E580.

D. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as required by Contract documents.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 152 of 450

FORheet heet

ASSURASSURA

imitatiomitatiINFORMATION

nsnsh one soh one so

se Characse Characequiremenuiremen

haracteristracteristhose of ashose of as

nother tesnother tesion.on.

Provide Providristics costics c

y tet ONLYsting idting i


09 5123 – 4


A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.

DEFINITIONS

A. AC: Articulation Class.

B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.

C. LR: Light-Reflectance coefficient.

D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical tiles and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 153 of 450

FOR IONSIONS

rticulationrticulatio

INFORMATION

AttenuaAttenu

tance tance coecoe

n Coefficin Coeffic

ot install at install k in spacesk in space

rature andature anct whent whenONLYnd suspennd suspe

d byd by them themyyartiti


09 5123 – 5

PRODUCTS

ACOUSTICAL TILES, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15 3/4 in. away from test surface per ASTM E795.

B. Acoustical Tile Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.

1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical tiles are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E1264 and not manufacturers’ proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Construction Field Lead from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.

C. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical tiles treated with manufacturer’s standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D3274 or ASTM G21.

D. Antimicrobial Fungicide Treatment: Provide acoustical tiles with face and back surfaces coated with antimicrobial treatment consisting of manufacturer’s standard formulation with fungicide added to inhibit growth of mold and mildew and showing no mold or mildew growth when tested according to ASTM D3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D3274 or ASTM G21.

E. Federal Green Procurement:

1. CA Section 10350 Standard for low-VOC materials.

ACOUSTICAL TILES FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2. BPB USA.

3. USG Interiors, Inc.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 154 of 450

FOR

ach ach

WhereWherereferencireferenc

oprietri INFORMATION

aryary ppyuction Fiuction F

uirementsrementsperformanperforman

crobial Furobial Fumanufacmanufac

ldew, and dew, anr bacterialr bacteria

ding to ASng to AS

vide acouvide acout consit consONLY

stinhibit grobit gro

ted accordted accorG21.G21.


09 5123 – 6

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Armstrong, or a comparable product as approved by the Construction Field Lead.

1. No added VOC formaldehyde.

C. Classification: Provide tiles complying with ASTM E1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows:

1. Pattern: C E.

2. Fire Class: A.

D. Color:

1. Ceiling Tile: White.

2. Grid: White.

E. SACT-1: Armstrong “Fine Fissured Second Look,” 24-in. by 48-in. by 3/4-in. lay-in panels, No. 1761.

1. Sound Absorption (NRC): 55.

2. Sound Blocking (CAC): 35.

3. Light Reflectance (LR): 84%.

4. Fire Performance: Class A.

5. Sag/Humidity Resistance: “HumiGuard Plus.”

METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content such that post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 37 percent.

B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer’s standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C635.

C. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer’s standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 155 of 450

FOR

r: r:

CeilinCeilin

rid: Wrid: WINFORMATION

hithi

strong “Fstrong “F1761. 1761.

on (NRC)on (NRC

C): 35.C): 35.

4%.%

ard Prd PONLY

us.”us.

heet with heet with half ohal


09 5123 – 7

D. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C635, Table 1, “Direct Hung,” unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

E. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C635, Table 1, “Direct Hung”) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-in. diameter wire.

F. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

G. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8-in. wide; formed with 0.04-in. thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A653/A653M, G90coatingdesignation; with bolted connections and 5/16-in. diameter bolts.

H. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer’s standard compression struts designed to accommodate lateral forces.

METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2. USG Interiors, Inc.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong 15/16-in. “Prelude Plus XL Aluminum,” or a comparable product as approved by the Construction Field Lead.

C. Direct-Hung, Double-Web Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from and capped with cold-rolled steel sheet, pre-painted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A653/A653M, G30coating designation.

1. Structural Classification: Intermediate duty system.

ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that maybe incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 156 of 450

FOR t Hangert Hanger

Hangers: Hangers:vanizeni INFORMATION

d sted stewith boltewith bolt

anufacturanufacturforces.orces.

M FOR AM FOR A

e with reqe with req

Inc.c.

ONLYe with with reqre

” or a comor a com

cros


09 5123 – 8

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:

a. OSI Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC-175 Rubber Base Sound Sealant.

b. Pecora Corporation; BA-98.

c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.

C. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer’s standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E90.

EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical tile ceilings.


PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

INSTALLATION, SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

A. General: Install acoustical tile ceilings to comply with ASTM C636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA’s “Ceiling Systems Handbook.”

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building’s structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 157 of 450

FOR

plyplyininsmissionsmissio

onstrated strated

N INFORMATION

areas, andeas, andustical tileustical tile

rements ments spsprage and wrage and

affecting paffecting p

after unsfter uns

ONLYcoustical oustical

d using led using led ceilined ceilin


09 5123 – 9

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.

8. Space hangers not more than 48-in. o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8-in. from ends of each member.

9. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or post-installed anchors.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles.

1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16-in. o.c. and not more than 3-in. from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 158 of 450

FORapapto agto ag

Secure flecure frmemINFORMATION

diate diateevices thevices th

are ate attachetachwill not cll not mperaturesperatures

does not pdoes notg channelg channel

s

eck tabs.eck tabs.

o.c. aloc. alONLY

ong ong ndicateddicated

gers to sugers to suerenceen


09 5123 – 10

system to a tolerance of 1/8-in. in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as follows:

1. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.

G. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so tile-to-tile joints are closed by double lap of material.

1. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tile for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations through tile.

2. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly.

CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 159 of 450

FOR

ingingtiletile--toto-titi

Fit adjoinFit adjoiat borat boINFORMATION

derder

lighting filighting fifor fireor fire--rere

oustical tioustical tacturer’s wacturer’s w

Remove anRemove alyy cleanedcleaneyy

ONLY


09 6513 – 1

SECTION 09 6513

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK


1. Resilient base.


1. Division 09, Section 09 9123 “Painting.”




A. ASTM International (ASTM):

ASTM E648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source

ASTM E662 Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials

ASTM F1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base


NFPA 253 Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source

NFPA 258 Recommended Practice for Determining Smoke Generation of Solid Materials

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 160 of 450

FOR

dd

DivisDivi

CUMECUMEINFORMATION

provisionprovisionSection.Section

others refothers reiion. Refeon. Re

e indicatee indicat

Test MetTest Mering Sring Sysystet

ONLYod for Speod for Sp

Solid MSolid M

Resiliensil


09 6513 – 2

C. Code of Federal Regulation (CFR)


SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including manufacturer’s specification summary sheet for specified products.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer’s standard-size samples but not less than 12-in. long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required, as directed by the Construction Field Lead.

C. Maintenance Information: Maintenance information for installed products in accordance with the Contract Statement of Work.

1. Methods for maintaining installed products.

2. Precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.

D. Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this Section who has specialized in installing work similar to that required for this project, and who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for seaming method indicated.

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this project who are trained or certified by floor covering manufacturer for installation techniques required.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

2. ASTM E662 (NFPA 258), Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials; <450.

3. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less.

4. Smoke Developed Index: 50 or less.

C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain resilient wall base tile and manufacturer’s recommended adhesive from a single supplier, or approved equal.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 161 of 450

FOR aintenanaintenan

rdance wance w

ethodsethodINFORMATION

forfor

ions againons againmance.mance.

ocuments ocuments

experiencexperienck similar tk similar

ed bd by many ma

ONLYs for this for this

for installor instal

ng i


09 6513 – 3

D. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, Manufacturer’s conditions, recommended adhesive depending on product, substrate type, and type of installation, manufacturer’s installation instructions, and manufacturer’s warranty requirements. Comply with requirements in Contract Documents.


A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with Identification labels intact.

B. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 degrees For more than 90 degrees F.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. In accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, areas to receive resilient sheet flooring shall be clean and ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 degrees F or more than 85 degrees F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.

3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Resilient sheet flooring and adhesive shall be conditioned in the same manner.

C. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 degrees For more than 95 degrees F.

D. Install resilient base after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

E. Install resilient transition strips during flooring installation.

F. Install welded resilient base during flooring installation.

COORDINATION

A. Finishing Operations: Install resilient wall base after finishing operations, including floor covering, painting and ceiling operations, have been completed.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 162 of 450

FOR ufactufact

CONDITONDIT

ance wceINFORMATION

ith ith shall be shall be

y mmanufaanufas to receivs to recei

tallation.allation.

be conde condONLYtemperatuempera

5 degreesdegrees

ng


09 6513 – 4

WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Materials Warranty: Submit, for Construction Field Lead’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Construction Field Lead may have under Contract Documents.

1. Warranty: 1 year limited warranty commencing on Date of Substantial Completion. Notice of any defect must be made in writing to manufacturer within 30 days after buyer learns of the defect.

EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish not less thereof, of each type, color, than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction pattern, and size of resilient product installed.


Not used.

PRODUCTS

RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base:

1. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Resilient products as manufactured by Johnsonite®10per Division 09, Section 09 0000 “Materials Legend”; or provide products by one of the following, as approved by Construction Field Lead:

a. Armstrong®11 World Industries, Inc.

b. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.

c. FLEXCO®12

d. Roppe®13 Corporation, USA.

10 Johnsonite is a registered trademark of Johnsonite, Inc., Chagrin Falls, Ohio.11 Armstrong is a registered trademark of AWI Licensing Company, Wilmington, Delaware.12 FLEXCO is a registered trademark of Flexco Corporation, Tuscumbia, Alabama.13 Roppe is a registered trademark of Roppe Corporation, Fostoria, Ohio.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 163 of 450

ish eish eotective ctective c

Furnish nFurnish 0 lineli INFORMATION

r fer f

EQUIREMEQUIREM

silient prilient pn 090ONLY

0000 0000, as approas appr


09 6513 – 5

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F1861.

1. Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic).

2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous).

3. Style: Cove (base with toe).

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125-in.

D. Height: 4-in., as indicated on Drawings.

E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48-in. long or coils in manufacturer’s standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Preformed.

G. Color: Refer to Division 09, Section 09 0000 “Materials Legend.”

INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Provide Armstrong S-725 Wall Base adhesive or as recommended by manufacturer for all substrates, including non-porous substrates at metal wall and casework locations.

EXECUTION

MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, case work, and cabinets in toe spaces and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 164 of 450

FORtside Ctside C

Refer to Refer to

MMINFORMATION

ATERATE

err--resistanresistan

l have a Vl have a VFR 59, SuFR 59, S

25 Wall B25 Wall Brates, inclutes, incl

ONLYnstructionnstruction


09 6513 – 6

G. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

PREPARATION

A. Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage while installing.

B. Substrate Preparation: Prepare substrate to be smooth, rigid, flat, level, permanently dry, clean and free of foreign materials such as paint, dust, grease, oils, solvent, old adhesive residue, vinyl wall coverings, non-porous surfaces and all other contaminants that may interfere with adhesive bond. Prepare substrate according to manufacturer’s written instruction to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

C. Do not install over existing floor covering or over substrates not approved by manufacturer.

D. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

E. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 165 of 450

ther ther cording toording to

ucts.ts

tall oll INFORMATION

ver ever e

and depreand deprend removd remov

ts untils until tht

stallation tallationin advancin adva

ereONLYd byd by rery


09 6519.19 – 1

SECTION 09 6519.19

VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK


1. Vinyl composition floor tile.


1. Division 09 Section 09 6513 “Resilient Base and Accessories” for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings.




A. Armstrong Flooring Technical Manuals

Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems Manual, F-5061

Armstrong Flooring Maintenance Recommendations and Procedures, Manual F-8663

B. ASTM International (ASTM)



ASTM F710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring

ASTM F1066 Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Tile

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 166 of 450

FOR

dd

DivisDivibase, redbase, redoveringveringINFORMATION

MENTS/CMENTS/C

isions of tons of tpecificatiopecificati

s referencs referenReferenceReference

cated.ated.

SyystestONLY

ms Mms M

ons and Prons and P


09 6519.19 – 2

ASTM F1482 Standard Guide to Wood Underlayment Products Available for Use Under Resilient Flooring

ASTM F1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride

ASTM F2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 253 Standard Test Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source

NFPA 258 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Smoke Generated by Solid Materials

SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings, seaming plan, coving details, and manufacturer’s technical data, installation and maintenance instructions (latest edition of Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems Manual, F-5061), for flooring and accessories.

B. Submit the manufacturer’s standard samples showing the required colors for flooring and applicable accessories.

C. Submit Safety Data Sheets (SDS) available for adhesives, moisture mitigation systems, primers, patching and leveling compounds, floor finishes (polishes), and cleaning agents and material information sheets for flooring products.

D. If required, submit the manufacturer’s certification that the flooring has been tested by an independent laboratory and complies with the required fire tests.

E. Closeout Submittals:

1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Division 01 Sections. Include methods for maintaining installed products, and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.

2. Warranty: Submit warranty documents as specified herein.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 167 of 450

FOR

A 2A 2

8 INFORMATION

seaming pseaming ptenance innance in

ion Syon Systemste

amples shomples sh

r aONLYdhesivedhesivnds, floor ds, floor

flooring pflooring

he floorihe flooriequ


09 6519.19 – 3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Single-Source Responsibility: provide types of flooring and accessories supplied by one manufacturer, including moisture mitigation systems, primers, leveling and patching compounds, and adhesives.

B. Select an installer who is experienced and competent in the installation of Armstrong resilient vinyl composition tile flooring and the use of Armstrong Flooring subfloor preparation products.

1. Engage installers certified as Armstrong Commercial Flooring Certified Installers

2. Confirm installer’s certification by requesting their credentials

C. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient vinyl composition tile flooring with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing material in accordance with ASTM test methods indicated below by a certified testing laboratory or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. ASTM E648 Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts per sq. cm. or greater, Class I.

2. ASTM E662 (Smoke Generation) Maximum Specific Optical Density of 450 or less.


A. Comply with Division 01 Sections as applicable.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.

C. Deliver materials in good condition to the jobsite in the manufacturer’s original unopened containers that bear the name and brand of the manufacturer, project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.

D. Store materials in a clean, dry, enclosed space off the ground, protected from harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. Protect adhesives from freezing. Store flooring, adhesives and accessories in the spaces where they will be installed forat least 48 hours before beginning installation.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 168 of 450

FOR

CC

Performanerformae followine followi

n accoac INFORMATION

dandaoryory or otor oyy

Critical Rritical R

GeneratioGenerati

NGG

cable.able.ONLYns and leas and le

manufactmanufactanu


09 6519.19 – 4

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements: Provide flooring which has been manufactured, fabricated and installed to performance criteria certified by manufacturer without defects, damage, or failure.

B. Administrative Requirements

1. Pre-Installation Meeting: Conduct an on-site pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer’s installation instructions and manufacturer’s warranty requirements. Comply with Division 01 Sections as applicable.

2. Pre-Installation Testing: Conduct pre-installation testing as recommended by the flooring manufacturer for specific project conditions, i.e. moisture tests, bond test, pH test, etc.

C. Test Installations/Mock-ups: Install at the project site a job mock-up using acceptable products and manufacturer approved installation methods, including concrete substrate testing. Obtain Construction Field Lead’s acceptance of finish color, texture and pattern, and workmanship standards.

1. Mock-Up Size: 4 feet by 4 feet.

2. Maintenance: Maintain mock-up during construction for workmanship comparison; remove and legally dispose of mock-up when no longer required.

3. Incorporation: Mock-up may be incorporated into the final construction with Construction Field Lead’s approval.

D. Sequencing and Scheduling

1. Install flooring and accessories after the other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Close spaces to traffic during the installation of the flooring.

2. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until they are sufficiently dry to achieve a bond with the adhesive, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended bond, moisture tests and pH test.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain a minimum temperature in the spaces to receive the flooring and accessories of 65 degrees F and a maximum temperature of 85 degrees F for at least 48 hours before, during, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Thereafter, maintain a minimum temperature of 55 degrees F in areas where work is completed. Protect all materials from the direct flow of heat from hot air

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 169 of 450

PPbyby ththyytests, btests, b

lationati INFORMATION

s/Ms/Mducts anducts an

te testing.testingpattern, anpattern, an

4 feet bfeet by 4y

in mockn mock--ulegallylegally didiyy

ncorporatncorporatoval.oval.ONLYfinishing ofinishing

paces topaces to


09 6519.19 – 5

registers, radiators, or other heating fixtures and appliances. Refer to the Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installations Systems Manual, F-5061, for a complete guide on project conditions.

LIMITED WARRANTY

A. Resilient Flooring: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace resilient flooring that fails within the warranty period.

B. Limited Warranty Period: Five years.

C. Limited Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.

D. For the Limited Warranty to be valid, this product is required to be installed using the appropriate Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation System. Product installed not using the specific instructions from the Guaranteed Installation System will void the warranty.

EXTENDED SYSTEMS WARRANTY

A. Resilient Flooring System: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace system subfloor preparation products, adhesive, and floor covering that fails within the warranty period.

B. Limited Warranty Period: 10 years on top of the Resilient Flooring Limited Warranty.

C. S-453 Level Strong cement based self-leveling compound, S-456 Patch Strongflexible patching and smoothing compound, S-454 Prime Strong acrylic primer for porous substrates, S-455 Prime Strong acrylic primer for non-porous substrates, or S-452 Seal Strong two part moisture mitigation system.

MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials from same production run as products installed. Packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.

1. Quantity: Furnish quantity of flooring units equal to 5% of amount installed.

2. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with Construction Field Lead’s requirements for delivery, storage and protection of extra material.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 170 of 450

FOR

undundd run cond run con

irements oements o

mitedit INFORMATION

WaWe Armstre Armst

ng the speg the sphe warranthe warran

RRANTYRANTY

ubmit a wubmit a wor replaceor replace

ils within ils within

p of the Rp of the R

ONLYompound,ompound,

Prime StroPrime Ster for noner for no

tion sytion sys


09 6519.19 – 6

PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURER

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Provide resilient products as manufactured by Armstrong Flooring, Inc., or products by other manufacturers as approved by the Construction Field Lead.

B. Manufacturer must have a headquarters in the United States of America.

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING MATERIALS

A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Premium Excelon®14 “Crown Texture™14 Raffia™14” tile flooring as manufactured by Armstrong Flooring, Inc.

1. Description: Tile composed of polyvinyl chloride resin, plasticizers, fillers, stabilizers and pigments with colors and texture dispersed uniformly throughout its entire thickness.

2. Vinyl composition tile shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F1066, “Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile", Class 2, through-pattern

3. Pattern and Color: Refer to Division 09, Section 09 0000 “Materials Legend.”

4. Size: 12-in. x 24-in.

5. Thickness: 1/8-in./0.125-in.

B. Substitutions: No substitutions will be allowed unless the product meets the criteria specified herein and is acceptable to the Construction Field Lead.

ADHESIVES

A. For Tile Installation System, Full Spread: Provide Armstrong S-515 Floor Tile Adhesive, S-525 BBT Bio-Flooring Adhesive, S-700 Floor Tile Adhesive Thin Spread, or S-750 Premium Floor Tile Adhesive under the tile, as recommended bythe flooring manufacturer for specific project conditions.

B. For Tile High-Moisture Installation Warranty, Full Spread: Provide Armstrong S-515 Floor Tile Adhesive or S-525 BBT Bio-Flooring Adhesive under the tile, as recommended by the flooring manufacturer for specific project conditions.

14 Excelon, Crown Texture, and Raffia are registered trademarks or trademarks of AFI Licensing LLC, Lancaster,Pennsylvania.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 171 of 450

FOR

loorloor

DescriDescrifillers, stfillers, s

iformiformINFORMATION

yy th thyy

ompositioompositioSpecificatSpecificat

rn n

Refer to Refer to

ed ud uONLYnless nless

ConstructConstruc

ong Sn


09 6519.19 – 7

ACCESSORIES

A. For patching, smoothing, and leveling monolithic subfloors (concrete, terrazzo, quarry tile, ceramic tile, and certain metals), provide Armstrong S-184 Fast-Setting Cement-Based Patch and Underlayment, S-194 Cement-Based Patch, Underlayment and Embossing Leveler / S-195 Underlayment Additive, S-453 Level Strong cement based self-leveling compound, or S-456 Patch Strongflexible patching and smoothing compound, as recommended by the flooring manufacturer for specific project conditions.

B. For priming porous substrates to aid in adhesive bond strength and reducing subfloor porosity, provide S-454 Prime Strong acrylic primer for porous substrates. For non-porous substrates, provide S-455 Prime Strong acrylic primer for non-porous substrates.

C. For creating a moisture barrier, provide S-452 Seal Strong two part moisture mitigation system.

D. Provide transition/reducing strips tapered to meet abutting materials.

E. Provide resilient edge strips of width shown on the drawings, of equal gauge to the flooring, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, with color to match or contrast with the flooring, or as selected by the Construction Field Lead from standard colors available.

F. Provide metal edge strips of width shown on the drawings and of required thickness to protect exposed edges of the flooring. Provide units of maximum available length to minimize the number of joints. Use butt-type metal edge strips for concealed anchorage, or overlap-type metal edge strips for exposed anchorage. Unless otherwise shown, provide strips made of extruded aluminum with a mill finish.

EXECUTION


A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including technical bulletins, product catalog, installation instructions, and product carton instructions for installation and maintenance procedures as needed.

EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions (i.e. moisture tests, bond test, pH test, etc.).

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 172 of 450

FOR nonnon--pp

reating a meating a mon syn systemsteINFORMATION

tion/redution/redu

dge strips dge stripsneous vinyeous viny

ontrast witntrast wiom standam standa

th shown oh shown of the floof the floo

er of jointer of jointmetal edgmetal edg

e of exof eONLY

xtrudxtrud


09 6519.19 – 8

B. Visually inspect flooring materials, adhesives and accessories prior to installation. Flooring material with visual defects shall not be installed and shall not be considered as a legitimate claim.

C. Examine subfloors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges, and other defects that might prevent adhesive bond or impair durability or appearance of the flooring material.

D. Inspect subfloors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are free from curing, sealing, parting and hardening compounds; residual adhesives; adhesive removers; and other foreign materials that might prevent adhesive bond. Visually inspect for evidence of moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, dusting, mold, or mildew.

E. Report conditions contrary to contract requirements that would prevent a proper installation. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

F. Failure to call attention to defects or imperfections will be construed as acceptance and approval of the subfloor. Installation indicates acceptance of substrates with regard to conditions existing at the time of installation.

PREPARATION

A. Subfloor Preparation: Smooth concrete surfaces, removing rough areas, projections, ridges, and bumps, and filling low spots, control or construction joints, and other defects with Armstrong Flooring S-184 Fast-Setting Cement-Based Patch and Underlayment, S-194 Cement-Based Patch, Underlayment and Embossing Leveler / S-195 Underlayment Additive, S-453 Level Strong cement based self-leveling compound, S-456 Patch Strong flexible patching and smoothing compound, S-454 Prime Strong acrylic primer for porous substrates, or S-455 Prime Strong acrylic primer for non-porous substrates, as recommended by the flooring manufacturer for specific project conditions. Refer to Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems Manual, F-5061, and ASTM F710 “Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring” for additional information on subfloor preparation.

B. Subfloor Preparation Moisture Mitigation: Smooth concrete surfaces, removing rough areas, projections, ridges, and bumps, and filling low spots, control or construction joints, mitigate moisture and other defects with Armstrong Flooring S-184 Fast-Setting Cement-Based Patch and Underlayment, S-194 Cement-Based Patch, Underlayment and Embossing Leveler / S-195 Underlayment Additive, S-453 Level Strong cement based self-leveling compound, S-456 Patch Strongflexible patching and smoothing compound, S-452 Seal Strong two part moisture mitigation system, S-454 Prime Strong acrylic primer for porous substrates, or S-455 Prime Strong acrylic primer for non-porous substrates, as recommended by the flooring manufacturer for specific project conditions. Refer to Armstrong

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 173 of 450

FOR port condport cond

lation.ation. DDen correcn correINFORMATION

attentionattentionapproval opproval

ard to conard to con

h concreteconcretnd filling nd filling

rong Flooong FlooCementCemen

t Additivet AdditivStrongronONLY

gg flefleic primerc prime

substratesubstrateons. Refens. Refe

61, and 61, and AAve Ree


09 6519.19 – 9

Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems Manual, F-5061, and ASTM F710 “Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring” for additional information on subfloor preparation.

C. Subfloor Cleaning: The surface shall be free of dust, solvents, varnish, paint, wax, oil, grease, sealers, release agents, curing compounds, residual adhesive, adhesive removers and other foreign materials that might affect the adhesion of resilient flooring to the concrete or cause a discoloration of the flooring from below. Remove residual adhesives as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Remove curing and hardening compounds not compatible with the adhesives used, as indicated by a bond test or by the compound manufacturer’s recommendations for flooring. Avoid organic solvents. Spray paints, permanent markers and other indelible ink markers must not be used to write on the back of the flooring material or used to mark the concrete slab as they could bleed through, telegraphing up to the surface and permanently staining the flooring material. If these contaminants are present on the substrate they must be mechanically removed prior to the installation of the flooring material. Refer to the Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems Manual, F-5061, and ASTM F710 “Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring” for additional information on subfloor preparation.

D. For Tile Installation System, Full Spread when using S-700 or S-750 adhesive, perform subfloor moisture testing in accordance with ASTM F2170, “Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Slabs Using in-situProbes,” ASTM F1869, “Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride” and “Bond Tests” as described in the Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems Manual, F-5061, to determine if surfaces are dry; free of curing and hardening compounds, old adhesive, and other coatings; and ready to receive flooring. Relative humidity shall not exceed 80%. Moisture vapor emission rate(MVER) shall not exceed 5 lbs./1000 sq. ft./24 hrs. On installations where both the Percent Relative Humidity and the Moisture Vapor Emission Rate tests are conducted, results for both tests shall comply with the allowable limits listed above. Do not proceed with flooring installation until results of moisture tests are acceptable. All test results shall be documented and retained.

E. For Tile High-Moisture Installation Warranty when using S-515 Adhesive, perform subfloor moisture testing in accordance with ASTM F2170, “Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Slabs Using in-situProbes,” ASTM F1869, “Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride,” and “Bond Tests” as described in the Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems Manual, F-5061, to determine if surfaces are dry; free of curing and hardening compounds, old adhesive, and other coatings; and ready to receive flooring. Relative humidity shall not exceed 95%. MVER shall not exceed 7 lbs./1000 sq. ft./24 hrs. On installations where both the Percent Relative Humidity and the Moisture Vapor Emission Rate tests are conducted, results for

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 174 of 450

FORfloorinfloori

ough, teleough, teleial.al. If theIf the

callyally remreyyngn INFORMATION

FlooriFlooStandard PStandard

g” for addg” for add

sstem, Fultem, Fue testing ine testing

g Relativeg Relativeard Test Mard Test M

or Using Ar Using strong Fltrong F

f surfacesf surfacether coaher coa

80%0 ONLY%. . MoMors. On inss. On i

por Emisspor Emisallowableallowab

ults of mults of md


09 6519.19 – 10

both tests shall comply with the allowable limits listed above. Do not proceed with flooring installation until results of moisture tests are acceptable. All test results shall be documented and retained.

F. For Tile High-Moisture Installation Warranty when using S-525 Adhesive, perform subfloor moisture testing in accordance with ASTM F2170, “Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Slabs Using in-situProbes,” ASTM F1869, “Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride,” and “Bond Tests” as described in the Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems Manual, F-5061, to determine if surfaces are dry; free of curing and hardening compounds, old adhesive, and other coatings; and ready to receive flooring. Relative humidity shall not exceed 90%. MVER shall not exceed 7 lbs./1000 sq. ft./24 hrs. On installations where both the Percent Relative Humidity and the Moisture Vapor Emission Rate tests are conducted, results for both tests shall comply with the allowable limits listed above. Do not proceed with flooring installation until results of moisture tests are acceptable. All test results shall be documented and retained.

G. For Spray Adhesive High-Moisture Installation Warranty, using Armstrong Flip™ Spray Adhesive, perform subfloor moisture testing in accordance with ASTM F2170, “Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Slabs Using in-situ Probes” and “Bond Tests” as described in Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation System Manual, F-5061, to determine if surfaces are dry; free of curing and hardening compounds, old adhesive, and other coatings; and ready to receive flooring. Internal relative humidity of the concrete shall not exceed 95%. Do not proceed with flooring installation until results of moisture tests are acceptable. All test results shall be documented and retained.

H. Concrete pH Testing: Perform pH tests on concrete floors regardless of their age or grade level. All test results shall be documented and retained.

INSTALLATION OF FLOORING

A. Install flooring in strict accordance with the latest edition of Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems Manual, F-5061. Failure to comply may result in voiding the manufacturer’s warranty listed in Paragraph 1.8 above.

B. Install flooring wall to wall before the installation of floor-set cabinets, casework, furniture, equipment, movable partitions, etc. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door recesses, closets, and similar openings as shown on the drawings.

C. If required, install flooring on pan-type floor access covers. Maintain continuity of color and pattern within pieces of flooring installed on these covers. Adhere flooring to the subfloor around covers and to covers.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 175 of 450

FORbs./100bs./100miditymidity ananyy

ests shall sts shall ring insring in

bb INFORMATION

documdocu

ive Highve Highive, perfoe, perfo

ard Test Mrd Test Mituitu ProbeProb

eed eed InstalInstalee of curiee of curi

readeady to rey to rddceed 95%.ceed 95%

s are accepare acc

ONLYrete floorsete floo

and retaiand reta


09 6519.19 – 11

D. Scribe, cut, and fit to permanent fixtures, columns, walls, partitions, pipes, outlets, and built-in furniture and cabinets.

E. Install flooring with adhesives, tools, and procedures in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions. Observe the recommended adhesive trowel notching, open times, and working times.

INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES

A. Apply top set wall base to walls, columns, casework, and other permanent fixtures in areas where top-set base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practical, with inside corners fabricated from base materials that are mitered or coped. Tightly bond base to vertical substrate with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces.

B. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring, and secure with adhesive recommended by the edge strip manufacturer. Install edge strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed.

CLEANING

A. Perform initial and on-going maintenance according to the latest edition of Armstrong Guaranteed Flooring Installation Systems Manual, F-5061.

PROTECTION

A. Protect installed flooring as recommended by the flooring manufacturer against damage from rolling loads, other trades, or the placement of fixtures and furnishings. See “Finishing the Job” in the latest edition of Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems Manual, F-5061.

END OF SECTION 09 6519.19

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 176 of 450

FORcal scal s

e resilient resilient mended bmended by

at wt wINFORMATION

ould oould

-going mgoing mFlooring Inooring I

mended bmended byes, or the ps, or the

he latest ehe lates5061.5061.ONLY


09 6519.23 – 1

SECTION 09 6519.23

LUXURY VINYL TILE FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK


1. Luxury vinyl floor tile.


1. Division 09 Section 09 6513 “Resilient Base and Accessories” for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings.




A. Armstrong Flooring Technical Manuals

Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems Manual, F-5061

Armstrong Flooring Maintenance Recommendations and Procedures, Manual F-8663


C. ASTM International:



ASTM F710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 177 of 450

FOR

dd

DivisDivibase, redbase, redoveringveringINFORMATION

MENTS/CMENTS/C

isions of tons of tpecificatiopecificati

s referencs referenReferenceReference

cated.ated.

SyystestONLY

ms Mms M

ons and Prons and P


09 6519.23 – 2

ASTM F1482 Standard Guide to Wood Underlayment Products Available for Use Under Resilient Flooring

ASTM F1700 Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Tile

ASTM F1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride

ASTM F2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

NFPA 253 Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source

NFPA 258 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Smoke Generated by Solid Materials

SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings, seaming plan, coving details, and manufacturer’s technical data, installation and maintenance instructions (latest edition of Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems Manual, F-5061), for flooring and accessories.

B. Submit the manufacturer’s standard samples showing the required colors for flooring and applicable accessories.

C. Submit Safety Data Sheets (SDS) available for adhesives, moisture mitigation systems, primers, patching and leveling compounds, floor finishes (polishes), and cleaning agents and material information sheets for flooring products.

D. If required, submit the manufacturer’s certification that the flooring has been tested by an independent laboratory and complies with the required fire tests.

E. Closeout Submittals:

1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Division 01 Sections. Include methods for maintaining installed products, and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.

2. Warranty: Submit warranty documents as specified herein.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 178 of 450

FOR

onalonal

A 253 2

INFORMATION

ng plan, cng plan, ce instructce instruct

ystems Mstems M

s showis showONLY

g

esives, mosives, moor finishoor finis

ng prodng prod


09 6519.23 – 3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Single-Source Responsibility: provide types of flooring and accessories supplied by one manufacturer, including moisture mitigation systems, primers, leveling and patching compounds, and adhesives.

B. Select an installer who is experienced and competent in the installation of Armstrong resilient vinyl composition tile flooring and the use of Armstrong Flooring subfloor preparation products.

1. Engage installers certified as Armstrong Commercial Flooring Certified Installers

2. Confirm installer’s certification by requesting their credentials

C. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient vinyl composition tile flooring with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing material in accordance with ASTM test methods indicated below by a certified testing laboratory or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. ASTM E648 Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts per sq. cm. or greater, Class I.

2. ASTM E662 (Smoke Generation) Maximum Specific Optical Density of 450 or less.


A. Comply with Division 01 Sections as applicable.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.

C. Deliver materials in good condition to the jobsite in the manufacturer’s original unopened containers that bear the name and brand of the manufacturer, project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.

D. Store materials in a clean, dry, enclosed space off the ground, protected from harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. Protect adhesives from freezing. Store flooring, adhesives and accessories in the spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 179 of 450

FOR

CC

Performanerformae followine followi

n accoac INFORMATION

dandaoryory or otor oyy

Critical Rritical R

GeneratioGenerati

NGG

cable.able.ONLYns and leas and le

manufactmanufactanu


09 6519.23 – 4

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements: Provide flooring which has been manufactured, fabricated and installed to performance criteria certified by manufacturer without defects, damage, or failure.

B. Administrative Requirements

1. Pre-Installation Meeting: Conduct an on-site pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer’s installation instructions and manufacturer’s warranty requirements. Comply with Division 01 Sections as applicable.

2. Pre-Installation Testing: Conduct pre-installation testing as recommended by the flooring manufacturer for specific project conditions, i.e. moisture tests, bond test, pH test, etc.

C. Test Installations/Mock-ups: Install at the project site a job mock-up using acceptable products and manufacturer approved installation methods, including concrete substrate testing. Obtain Construction Field Lead’s acceptance of finish color, texture and pattern, and workmanship standards.

1. Mock-Up Size: 4 feet by 4 feet.

2. Maintenance: Maintain mock-up during construction for workmanship comparison; remove and legally dispose of mock-up when no longer required.

3. Incorporation: Mock-up may be incorporated into the final construction with Construction Field Lead’s approval.

D. Sequencing and Scheduling

1. Install flooring and accessories after the other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Close spaces to traffic during the installation of the flooring.

2. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until they are sufficiently dry to achieve a bond with the adhesive, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended bond, moisture tests and pH test.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 180 of 450

FOR

PPbyby ththyytests, btests, b

lationati INFORMATION

s/Ms/Mducts anducts an

te testing.testingpattern, anern, an

4 feet bfeet by 4y

in mockn mock--ulegallylegally didiyy

ncorporatncorporatoval.oval.ONLYfinishing ofinishing

paces topaces to


09 6519.23 – 5

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain a minimum temperature in the spaces to receive the flooring and accessories of 65 degrees F and a maximum temperature of 85 degrees F for at least 48 hours before, during, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Thereafter, maintain a minimum temperature of 55 degrees F in areas where work is completed. Protect all materials from the direct flow of heat from hot-air registers, radiators, or other heating fixtures and appliances. Refer to the Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installations Systems Manual, F-5061, for a complete guide on project conditions.

LIMITED WARRANTY

A. Resilient Flooring: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace resilient flooring that fails within the warranty period.

B. Limited Warranty Period: 15 years for “Parallel® 20.”

C. Limited Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.

D. For the Limited Warranty to be valid, this product is required to be installed using the appropriate Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation System. Product installed not using the specific instructions from the Guaranteed Installation System will void the warranty.

EXTENDED SYSTEMS WARRANTY

A. Resilient Flooring System: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace system subfloor preparation products, adhesive, and floor covering that fails within the warranty period.

B. Limited Warranty Period: 10 years on top of the Resilient Flooring Limited Warranty.

C. S-453 Level Strong cement based self-leveling compound, S-456 Patch Strongflexible patching and smoothing compound, S-454 Prime Strong acrylic primer for porous substrates, S-455 Prime Strong acrylic primer for non-porous substrates, or S-452 Seal Strong two part moisture mitigation system.

MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials from same production run as products installed. Packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 181 of 450

FOR lient lient

reeing to reeing to d.

Warranrr INFORMATION

tty Pey P

ty shall noshall nrovisions rovisions

ith other wh other wtract Docuact Doc

e valid, the valid, ing Guaraing Guara

uctions froctions fro

ONLYrantyranty execexecyy

ubfloor prubfloor pnty periodnty period

oo


09 6519.23 – 6

1. Quantity: Furnish quantity of flooring units equal to 5% of amount installed.

2. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with Construction Field Lead’s requirements for delivery, storage and protection of extra material.

PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURER

A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Provide resilient products as manufactured by Armstrong Flooring, Inc., or products by other manufacturers as approved by the Construction Field Lead.

B. Manufacturer must have a headquarters in the United States of America.

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING MATERIALS

A. Luxury Vinyl Tile: “Parallel® Collection” 20 mil wear layer luxury solid vinyltile flooring as manufactured by Armstrong Flooring, Inc.

1. Description: A layered construction consisting of a tough, clear, vinyl wear layer protecting a high-fidelity print layer on a solid vinyl backing. Protected by a UV-cured polyurethane finish, the wear surface is embossed with different textures to enhance each of the printed visuals. Colors are insoluble in water and resistant to cleaning agents and light.

2. Luxury Solid Vinyl Tile shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F1700, “Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Tile,” Class III, Type B – Embossed Surface.

3. Pattern and Color: Refer to Division 09, Section 09 0000 “Materials Legend.”

4. Size: 12-in. by 24-in.

5. Wear layer thickness: 0.020-in.

6. Thickness: 0.100-in.

B. Substitutions: No substitutions will be allowed unless the product meets the criteria specified herein and is acceptable to the Construction Field Lead.

ADHESIVES

A. Provide Armstrong S-310 Roll Strong Adhesive for field areas as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 182 of 450

FORanufacturanufactur

TILE FLTILE FL

l INFORMATION

Tile: “Tile: manufactumanufactu

A layA layerederedcting a hicting a hi

cured polured polent textureent textur

water and rwater and r

conform tonform cation forcation f

ONLYSection 0Section


09 6519.23 – 7

ACCESSORIES

A. For patching, smoothing, and leveling monolithic subfloors (concrete, terrazzo, quarry tile, ceramic tile, and certain metals), provide Armstrong S-184 Fast-Setting Cement-Based Patch and Underlayment, S-194 Cement-Based Patch, Underlayment and Embossing Leveler / S-195 Underlayment Additive, S-453 Level Strong cement based self-leveling compound, or S-456 Patch Strongflexible patching and smoothing compound, as recommended by the flooring manufacturer for specific project conditions.

B. For priming porous substrates to aid in adhesive bond strength and reducing subfloor porosity, provide S-454 Prime Strong acrylic primer for porous substrates. For non-porous substrates, provide S-455 Prime Strong acrylic primer for non-porous substrates.

C. For creating a moisture barrier, provide S-452 Seal Strong two part moisture mitigation system.

D. For sealing joints between the top of wall base or integral cove cap and irregular wall surfaces such as masonry, provide plastic filler applied according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Provide resilient edge strips of width shown on the drawings, of equal gauge to the flooring, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, with color to match or contrast with the flooring, or as selected by the Construction Field Lead from standard colors available.

F. Provide metal edge strips of width shown on the drawings and of required thickness to protect exposed edges of the flooring. Provide units of maximum available length to minimize the number of joints. Use butt-type metal edge strips for concealed anchorage, or overlap-type metal edge strips for exposed anchorage. Unless otherwise shown, provide strips made of extruded aluminum with a mill finish.

EXECUTION


A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including technical bulletins, product catalog, installation instructions, and product carton instructions for installation and maintenance procedures as needed.

EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions (i.e. moisture tests, bond test, pH test, etc.).

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 183 of 450

FOR nonnon--pp

reating a meating a mon syn systemsteINFORMATION

nts betwents betwch as masoh as mas

ommendaommenda

rips of widps of wivinyvinyl or rul or yy

t with the t with the ndard coldard col

wn on thewn on theflooring. flooring.

oints.intsONLY

Us Usedge stripdge strip

xtruded alxtruded al


09 6519.23 – 8

B. Visually inspect flooring materials, adhesives and accessories prior to installation. Flooring material with visual defects shall not be installed and shall not be considered as a legitimate claim.

C. Examine subfloors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges, and other defects that might prevent adhesive bond or impair durability or appearance of the flooring material.

D. Inspect subfloors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are free from curing, sealing, parting and hardening compounds; residual adhesives; adhesive removers; and other foreign materials that might prevent adhesive bond. Visually inspect for evidence of moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, dusting, mold, or mildew.

E. Report conditions contrary to contract requirements that would prevent a proper installation. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

F. Failure to call attention to defects or imperfections will be construed as acceptance and approval of the subfloor. Installation indicates acceptance of substrates with regard to conditions existing at the time of installation.

PREPARATION

A. Subfloor Preparation: Smooth concrete surfaces, removing rough areas, projections, ridges, and bumps, and filling low spots, control or construction joints, and other defects with Armstrong Flooring S-184 Fast-Setting Cement-Based Patch and Underlayment, S-194 Cement-Based Patch, Underlayment and Embossing Leveler / S-195 Underlayment Additive, S-453 Level Strong cement based self-leveling compound, S-456 Patch Strong flexible patching and smoothing compound, S-454 Prime Strong acrylic primer for porous substrates, or S-455 Prime Strong acrylic primer for non-porous substrates, as recommended by the flooring manufacturer for specific project conditions. Refer to Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems Manual, F-5061, and ASTM F710 “Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring” for additional information on subfloor preparation.

B. Subfloor Preparation Moisture Mitigation: Smooth concrete surfaces, removing rough areas, projections, ridges, and bumps, and filling low spots, control or construction joints, mitigate moisture and other defects with Armstrong Flooring S-184 Fast-Setting Cement-Based Patch and Underlayment, S-194 Cement-Based Patch, Underlayment and Embossing Leveler / S-195 Underlayment Additive, S-453 Level Strong cement based self-leveling compound, S-456 Patch Strongflexible patching and smoothing compound, S-452 Seal Strong two part moisture mitigation system, S-454 Prime Strong acrylic primer for porous substrates, or S-455 Prime Strong acrylic primer for non-porous substrates, as recommended by the flooring manufacturer for specific project conditions. Refer to Armstrong

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 184 of 450

FOR port condport cond

lation. ation. DDen correcn correINFORMATION

attentionattentionapproval opproval

ard to conard to con

h concreteconcretnd filling nd filling

rong Flooong FlooCementCemen

t Additivet AdditivStrongronONLY

gg flefleic primerc prime

substratesubstrateons. Refens. Refe

61, and 61, and AAve Ree


09 6519.23 – 9

Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems Manual, F-5061 and ASTM F710 “Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring” for additional information on subfloor preparation.

C. Subfloor Cleaning: The surface shall be free of dust, solvents, varnish, paint, wax, oil, grease, sealers, release agents, curing compounds, residual adhesive, adhesive removers and other foreign materials that might affect the adhesion of resilient flooring to the concrete or cause a discoloration of the flooring from below.Remove residual adhesives as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.Remove curing and hardening compounds not compatible with the adhesives used, as indicated by a bond test or by the compound manufacturer's recommendations for flooring. Avoid organic solvents. Spray paints, permanent markers and other indelible ink markers must not be used to write on the back of the flooring material or used to mark the concrete slab as they could bleed through, telegraphing up to the surface and permanently staining the flooring material. If these contaminants are present on the substrate they must be mechanically removed prior to the installation of the flooring material. Refer to the Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems Manual, F-5061, and ASTM F710 “Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring” for additional information on subfloor preparation.

D. When using Armstrong S-310 Roll Strong Adhesive, perform subfloor moisture testing in accordance with ASTM F2170, “Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Slabs Using in-situ Probes” and “Bond Tests” as described in publication Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation System Manual, F-5061, to determine if surfaces are dry; free of curing and hardening compounds, old adhesive, and other coatings; and ready to receive flooring. Internal relative humidity of the concrete shall not exceed 90%. Do not proceed with flooring installation until results of moisture tests are acceptable. All test results shall be documented and retained.

E. Concrete pH Testing: Perform pH tests on concrete floors regardless of their age or grade level. All test results shall be documented and retained.

INSTALLATION OF FLOORING

A. Install flooring in strict accordance with the latest edition of Armstrong FlooringGuaranteed Installation Systems Manual, F-5061. Failure to comply may result in voiding the manufacturer’s warranty listed in Paragraph 1.8 above.

B. Install flooring wall to wall before the installation of floor-set cabinets, casework, furniture, equipment, movable partitions, etc. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door recesses, closets, and similar openings as shown on the drawings.

C. If required, install flooring on pan-type floor access covers. Maintain continuity of color and pattern within pieces of flooring installed on these covers. Adhere flooring to the subfloor around covers and to covers.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 185 of 450

FORfloorinfloori

ough, teleough, teleial.al. If theIf the

callyally remreyyngn INFORMATION

FlooriFlooStandard PStandard P

g” for addg” for add

g Sg S--310 R310 Rhh ASTMASTM F

ete Slabs Ute Slabs Urong Floorong Floor

urfaces arerfaces arcoatings; acoatings;

e shall notshall noisture tisture tONLY

e floors refloors rd retainedd retaine


09 6519.23 – 10

D. Scribe, cut, and fit to permanent fixtures, columns, walls, partitions, pipes, outlets, and built-in furniture and cabinets.

E. Roll with a 100-pound roller in the field areas. Refer to specific rolling instructions of the flooring manufacturer

F. Install flooring with adhesives, tools, and procedures in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions. Observe the recommended adhesive trowel notching, open times, and working times.

INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES

A. Apply top set wall base to walls, columns, casework, and other permanent fixtures in areas where top-set base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practical, with inside corners fabricated from base materials that are mitered or coped. Tightly bond base to vertical substrate with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces.

B. Fill voids with plastic filler along the top edge of the resilient wall base or integral cove cap on masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates.

CLEANING

A. Perform initial and on-going maintenance according to the latest edition of Armstrong Guaranteed Flooring Installation Systems Manual, F-8663.

PROTECTION

A. Protect installed flooring as recommended by the flooring manufacturer against damage from rolling loads, other trades, or the placement of fixtures and furnishings. See “Finishing the Job” in the latest edition of Armstrong Flooring Guaranteed Installation Systems Manual, F-5061.

END OF SECTION 09 6519.23

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 186 of 450

FOR

eas weas wh insideh inside

tlyy bond bbond byysurfacessurfaceINFORMATION

h plastic fplastic onrynry surfsurfyy

ng mainteng mainteng Installng Instal

ed by the d by ththe plache pla

esONLY

et editioneditio


09 9123 – 1

SECTION 09 9123

PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.

2. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.





ASTM D16 Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications

B. Code of Federal Regulation (CFR)


C. Master Painter’s Institute (MPI)

MPI Approved Products List

MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual

D. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)

SSPC-SP 2 Hand Tool Cleaning

SSPC-SP 7/NACE #4 Brush-off Blast Cleaning

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 187 of 450

FOR SecS

Do not pDo not purfaces,rfacesINFORMATION

opop

ENTS/CENTS/C

sions of thons of thon.on

s referencs referencReferenceReference

cated.ated.

inolonolONLYogygy fofoyy

plicationslication

ompom


09 9123 – 2

SUBMITTALS


1. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).

2. Refer to Division 09, Section 09 0000 “Materials Legend” for colors.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. MPI Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in “MPI Approved Products List.”

2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in “MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual,” for products and paint systems indicated.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

C. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Construction Field Lead will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 square feet.

b. Other Items: Construction Field Lead will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Construction Field Lead at no additional cost to Construction Field Lead.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 188 of 450

FORY ASSUY ASS

tandards:tandards:

d INFORMATION

ts: Comts: Cved Produced Produc

and Workmd Workainting Spainting S

mers and mers and er as the fr as the f

nt sysystem temions madns mad

y sty sONLYandardandar

e to repreto reprepecified ipecified i


09 9123 – 3

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Construction Field Lead specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the complete Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 degrees F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

DEFINITIONS

A. Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D16 apply to this Section.

B. “Flat” refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter.

C. “Eggshell” refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

D. “Satin” refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

E. “Semi-gloss” refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

F. “Full gloss” refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 degrees F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 degrees F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 189 of 450

FOR

MMresiresi

Remove Remove

INFORMATION

erms defierms defi

ess or maess or mameter.eter.

finish withfinish with

a gloss rangloss ra

ONLYh a gloss ra gloss

e more the more th


09 9123 – 4

EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than one gallon of each material and color applied.

PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Benjamin Moore®15 & Co.

2. Columbia®16 Paint & Coatings.

3. PPG®17 Architectural Finishes, Inc.

4. Sherwin-Williams®18 Company (The).

PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.

15 Benjamin Moore is a registered trademark of Columbia Insurance Company, Omaha, Nebraska.16 Columbia is a registered trademark of Central Petroleum Company, Cleveland, Ohio.17 PPG is a registered trademark of PPG Industries, Cleveland, Ohio.18 Sherwin Williams is a registered trademark of SwimC, Inc., Newark, Delaware.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 190 of 450

ufacuface of the fe of the f

BenjaminBenjami

INFORMATION

bia®bia®161

ArchitecturArchitectur

ms®ms®1818 CoC

n each painn each paidicated, udicated, u

factuactuONLYrer, brer, b

ucts recomcts recomem and oem and o


09 9123 – 5

2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.

3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L.

4. Flat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.

5. Nonflat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.

6. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L.

7. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L.

8. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC content of not more than 340 g/L.

9. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: VOC content of not more than 420 g/L.

C. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 191 of 450

FOR

PP200200

ZincZinc--RicRic00 g/g/LLINFORMATION

atment Watment W

nts of Fielof Fielcorrosivecorrosiv

chemicalchemicale applied ie applied

nts and conts and caromatic romatic

ore benzenre benz

ONLY


09 9123 – 6

2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile.

c. Antimony. d. Benzene.

e. Butyl benzyl-phthalate. f. Cadmium.

g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.

i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.

k. Diethyl phthalate. l. Dimethyl phthalate.

m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde.

o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone.

q. Lead. r. Mercury.

s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.

u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene.

w. Toluene (methylbenzene). x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.

y. Vinyl chloride.

D. Colors: Refer to Division 09, Section 09 0000 “Materials Legend.”

PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Seal Grip Primer 17-921: MPI #3 as manufactured by Pittsburgh Paints.

1. VOC Content: .74 g/L.

B. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.

1. VOC Content: E Range of E1.

ALKYD PAINTS

A. Urethane Modified Gloss Oil: Speedhide 6-284, MPI #48, Gloss level as manufactured by Pittsburgh Paints.

1. VOC Content: 332 g/L.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 192 of 450

FOR m.m.

o.o HHINFORMATION

x

Lead.Lead.

hyl ethethylyl k

e chloridechlorid

yllbenzene)benzene)

0 “M0 “ONLYMateriaMateri

PittsburghPittsburgh


09 9123 – 7

EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor’s acceptance of substrates and conditions.

PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations in “MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual,” applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 193 of 450

fyfy susuyyh existinh existin

coating apcoating aces areces arINFORMATION

drydry

ng coatinng coatinand condand cond

written iwritten iation Manuation Man

nd similarnd similaor impossr impos

fore surfore surONLYe workersworker

ed. Remod. Remo

ncies


09 9123 – 8

E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer, but not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 2, “Hand Tool Cleaning.”

2. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, “Brush-off Blast Cleaning.” Contractor to prevent airborne particles.

F. Sanding: Dry sanding is not permitted on any surface.

APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Construction Field Lead reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Construction Field Lead deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:

1. Construction Field Lead will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 194 of 450

yy papyy

Use apUse ap

aint suraint suINFORMATION

facfacd surfacd surfacentlently fixedy fixed

nd backsidbacksidged items tged items t

shade to shade to are to be are to be

ifference fference

ough topugh toplororONLY

and apand a

diness, spiness, spther surfacher surfa


09 9123 – 9

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.

3. Construction Field Lead may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-paint materials from project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Construction Field Lead, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Interior Finish Schedule:

Surface to be Finished No. of Coats Type of Finish

Wallboard (general) 1 PPG 9-900 Primer 0g/L VOCPPG 6-2 Primer 98g/L VOC

Eggshell 2 6-411 Speedhide 64 g/L VOC PPG 9-300 Pure Performance 0g/L VOC

Steel, including doors and 2 90-1210 DTM Enamel 90g/Lframes

Steel door relites 2 90-1210 DTM Enamel 90g/L

B. Colors: Refer to Division 09, Section 09 0000 “Materials Legend.”


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 195 of 450

FORnd ofnd of

terials froterials fro

ompletingompletinwashas INFORMATION

ng, sng, sces.ces.

heh r trades tradesher trades er trades

tion Fieldion Field

activitieactivitiesaces.aces.

ONLYTyType ope oyyy

ONPG 9PG -900 P0

6--2 Pri2 P


10 1400 – 1

SECTION 10 1400

SIGNAGE

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK


1. Room identification signs.




A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)

AAMA 611

B. Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)


C. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities

D. Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)


E. ASTM International (ASTM)

ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 196 of 450

FORDD


ummINFORMATION

ents anents ahis Secthis Sectioio

herwise inerwise i

al Manufacl Manufa

ONLYies ies


10 1400 – 2

F. Code of Federal Regulation (CFR) and Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

29 CFR 1910.34 Coverage and Definitions

29 CFR 1910.36 Design and Construction Requirements for Exit Routes

29 CFR 1910.37 Maintenance, Safeguards, and Operational Features for Exit Routes

G. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)

Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products

H. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA)

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code


I. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 924 Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment

SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.

1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories.

2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign.

3. Submit wiring diagrams including power, signal and control wiring.

C. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.

E. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.

F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 197 of 450

FOR

l Fl F

onal Fire al Fire

INFORMATION

atories (Uries (U

StandStanEquipmEquipm

t indicatedt indicate

lationatioONLY

detdet

supplemensuppleme

includnc


10 1400 – 3

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 Article 100.


Not Used.

DEFINITIONS

A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board’s “Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines.”

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit installation of signs in exterior locations to be performed according to manufacturers’ written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

COORDINATION

A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs.

WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Deterioration of metal and polymer finishes beyond normal weathering.

b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors and sign lamination.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 198 of 450

FORssibssib

BA) AccBA) Acc

ONDITIOONDITI

INFORMATION

ations: ationons permons perm

ing to manng to man

ifyy recess recess yyurements urements

ices with tces with

ONLYn which mn which m

erials or wrials or w


10 1400 – 4

PRODUCTS

MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability properties of Alloy 6063-T5.

EXIT SIGN

A. Available Manufacturers: Ultra Glow, Inc., as manufactured by Glow Tech; 822 W. 8th Street; Mishawaka, IN 46544; 1-888-832-1050; or the Construction Field Lead’s approved equal.

B. Materials: Lightweight injection-molded polypropylene with letters and arrows of photoluminescent polypropylene.

C. Comply with the following:

1. UL 924 Standards (ETL listed).

2. NFPA 101-2003, Life Safety Code.

3. OSHA 1910.34, 1910.36 and 1910.37.

D. Mounting: Wall mounted.

E. Color: Red.

DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. ACE Sign Systems, Inc.

2. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division.

3. A. R. K. Ramos.

4. ASI-Modulex, Inc.

5. Bunting Graphics, Inc.

6. Charleston Industries, Inc.

7. Gemini Incorporated.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 199 of 450

aterials: aterials: hotolumintolumin

with thwith thINFORMATION

fo fo

StandardStandard

003, Life 3, Life

910.36 an0.36 an

ONLYe with reqwith re

porated inporated in


10 1400 – 5

8. Grimco, Inc.

9. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc.

10. Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg. Co.

11. Mills Manufacturing Company.

12. Mohawk Sign Systems.

B. Cutout Characters: Provide characters with square-cut, eased edges. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Aluminum Sheet: 0.25-in. thick.

a. Finish: Anodized.

2. Mounting: Projected, with concealed non-corroding studs for substrates encountered.

ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: “Lucent” style as manufactured by Best Sign Systems, Inc. Other manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. ACE Sign Systems, Inc.

2. ASI-Modulex, Inc.

3. Best Sign Systems Inc.

4. Gemini Incorporated.

5. Nelson-Harkins Industries.

6. Southwell Company (The)

B. Interior Room Identification Signs (Type 2):

1. Process: Printed letters on glass.

2. Copy Size: 3/4-in. text.

3. Copy Text:

a. 5-B – quantity 1.

b. 6-A – quantity 1.

c. 6-C – quantity 1.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 200 of 450

FORa.a

MountingountinINFORMATION

: tered.tered

TION ION SIGSIG

ct: “Lct: “LuceucLLoffering poffering

mited to, tmited to, t

ONLY


10 1400 – 6

ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.

FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer’s standard signs of configurations indicated.

1. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

2. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration.

3. Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly.

4. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous.

FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: Manufacturer’s standard Class 1 clear anodic coating, 0.018 mm or thicker, over a satin (directionally textured) mechanical finish, complying with AAMA 611.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 201 of 450

FOR

ddsurfsurf

Mill joMill joininter per INFORMATION

netrnetr

mble signsmble signsas necessaas necessa

r reassereassembmbblly.y.

ossible; otssible; o

Manual ManualandONLY

designdesig

m damagm damaging.ing.

abu


10 1400 – 7

EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, are sized and located to accommodate signs.


INSTALLATION

A. Appearance Standard: Completed sign work shall have a sharp and uniformly delineated appearance as viewed by Architect from building interior at 10 feet away from painted surface and from building exterior from the street.

B. Comply with manufacturers’ written instructions for surface preparation and paint-application for each substrate condition.

C. Apply a transition coat over incompatible existing coatings and substrate material.

D. Apply primers, sealers, undercoats and transition coats so they do not extend beyond the limits of the painted signage. Remove excess without damaging the substrate.

E. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, with uniform delineation and borders, and at locations and heights indicated.

1. Prespaced characters with template, cutout stencil, or ruler and straightedge.

F. Signs Painted on Glass: Provide opaque black paint matching painted signmaterial and finish onto opposite side of glass to conceal back of sign.

G. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer’s written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3-in. of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 202 of 450

TITI

earance Srance Sated appeated appe

m painm painINFORMATION

ed ed

manufacturanufacturfor each sufor each su

over incomover incom

rcoats andrcoats andsignage. signage.

with uniforth unifo

ONLYut stencil,t stenci

ching paching paack o


10 1400 – 8

H. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer’s written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply.

I. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners.

1. Flush Mounting: Mount characters with backs in contact with wall surface.

J. Glass-Mounted signs: Signs shall be vinyl lettering, of style and size as indicated for wall-mounted signs.


A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 203 of 450

FOR NG ANDNG AND

nstallationnstallations. Pr INFORMATION

otecotec

END OFEND OF

ONLY


10 2600 – 1

SECTION 10 2600

WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK


1. Rigid vinyl sheeting (FRP wainscot).

2. Corner guards.





ASTM D256 Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics

ASTM D635 Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position

ASTM D1308 Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes

ASTM D1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds



NFPA 255 Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 204 of 450

FORD DOCUDOCU

eneral pneral pvisisINFORMATION

on 01 Son 01



M)M)

ndard Tesdard Teslum Ium Impampa

est Methoest Methome of e ofONLY

BurnBurnn

for Effector Effecigmentedigmented


10 2600 – 2

C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 723 Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, materials descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-resistant wall protection unit.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size indicated below. Include samples of accent strips to verify color selected.

1. Wainscot: 12-in. square. Include examples of trim pieces.

2. Corner Guard: 12-in. long. Include examples of joinery, corners, and field splices.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall protection units from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impact-resistant wall protection units and are based on the specific system indicated.

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Construction Field Lead, except with Construction Field Lead’s approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Construction Field Lead for review.

D. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall protection units with surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency.

E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A117.1.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 205 of 450

FOR

tedted

WainsWains

orner Gorner INFORMATION

uauaplices.plices

e of speciae of specia

empemployloyer er

esistant wesistant w

filefileONLYs, and , andbased on ased on

ed solelyed solelyppro


10 2600 – 3


A. Store impact-resistant wall protection units in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 degrees Fduring the period plastic materials are stored.

2. Keep plastic sheet material out of direct sunlight.

3. Store plastic wall protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 degrees F.

a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall protection units until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 degrees F for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period.

WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures.

b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use.


PRODUCTS

MATERIALS

A. PVC Plastic: ASTM D1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout; extruded and sheet material, thickness as indicated.

1. Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. of notch when tested according to ASTM D256, Test Method A.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 206 of 450

FORa.a.

ONDITIOONDITI

INFORMATION

l Ll Limitaimitas until buiuntil bui

AC syAC systemstems than 72 hhan 72 h

uction peruction per

standard standardct--resistanresista

ed warraned warra

tht ONLYe folloe follo

ls beyls beyondond


10 2600 – 4

2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D543 or ASTM D1308.

3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D635.

4. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

5. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Fasteners: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view.

C. Adhesive: As recommended by impact-resistant plastic wall protection manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

RIGID VINYL SHEETING WAINSCOT

A. Manufacturer shall be IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, or the Construction Field Lead’s approved equal.

B. Product: “Sanparrel Rigid Vinyl Sheet.”

C. Wall Wainscot: 4 feet high and 8 feet high, where indicated on Construction Drawing H-2-837542, Sheet 2.

1. Thickness: .040-in.

2. Finish: Haircell texture.


4. Accessories: Top caps, inside corners, outside corners, and divider bars as required for a complete installation.

5. Materials: Vinyl Sanparrel sheets shall be manufactured from chemical-and stain-resistant polyvinyl chloride with the addition of impact modifiers. No plasticizers shall be used.

a. Top caps, inside corners, divider bars and outside corners shall be made of extruded PVC.

b. Vertical joints shall be caulked joints of same color as wainscot.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 207 of 450

FOR

esivesivnufacturnufactur

rding to 4ing to 4

SHEESHEEINFORMATION

TINTI

hall be hall be IPIPoved equaoved equa

gid Vinygid Vinyly

and 8 feet and 8 feet

ONLY0000 “Ma000 “M

e corners,corners


10 2600 – 5

CORNER GUARDS

A. Surface-Mounted, Resilient, Plastic Corner Guards: Assembly consisting of snap-on cover installed over continuous retainer; including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Model No. 160BN “bullnose” as manufactured by IPC Door and WallProtection Systems, Division of InPro Corporation; or the Construction Field Lead’s approved equal by the following:

a. Balco, Inc.

b. Construction Specialties, Inc.

c. Pawling Corporation.

2. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.078-in. wall thickness, as follows:

a. Profile: Nominal 2-in.-long leg and 1 1/4-in. corner radius.

b. Height: 4 feet high and 8 feet high, where indicated on Construction Drawing H-2-837542, Sheet 2.

c. Color: Refer to Division 09, Section 09 0000 “Materials Legend.”

3. Retainer: Minimum 0.060-in.-thick, one-piece, extruded aluminum.

4. Retainer Clips: Manufacturer’s standard impact-absorbing clips.

5. Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching cover; field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.

FABRICATION

A. Fabricate impact-resistant wall protection units to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.

B. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 208 of 450

FOR b.b.

c PP

INFORMATION

Extrud Extrud

e: Nomin Nomin

feet high aet high aDrawing HDrawing H

vision 09, ision 09

hick, oneck, one-p

ardrdONLYmpacmpac

tiontion--moldmoldnment witment wi


10 2600 – 6

EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners.

1. For impact-resistant wall protection units attached with adhesive, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.


PREPARATION

A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall protection system components.

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

INSTALLATION

A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.

B. Impact-Resistant Wall Covering: Install top and edge moldings, corners, and divider bars as required for a complete installation.

CLEANING

A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.

B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 209 of 450

FOR

ccwithwith

d with insd with in

INFORMATION

g operatiog operatioion syn systemstem

substrate tbstrate t

l protectiol protectioterials witerials w

nished Wished WONLYedge moedge m


10 2650 – 1

SECTION 10 2650

STAINLESS STEEL DOOR PROTECTION

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK


1. Stainless steel protection plates for doors.

2. Stainless steel mop plates for doors.



SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer’s printed product data for each type of stainless steel door protection plate specified.

B. Detail Drawings: Provide mounting details with the appropriate adhesives for specific project substrates.

C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Provide printed installation instructions for stainless steel door protection plates.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Not Used


A. Store stainless steel door protection plates in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

B. Inspect materials at delivery to assure that specified products have been received.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install stainless steel door protection plates until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVACsystem is operating and maintaining temperature at

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 210 of 450

FORD DOCUDOCU

eneral pneral pvisis INFORMATION

on 01 Son 01

manufactmanufacction platetion pla

unting detunting det

s: Provides: Provid

ONLY


10 2650 – 2

70 degrees F for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period.

WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s standard limited lifetime warranty against material and manufacturing defects.

PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURER

A. Manufacturer shall be IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, or the Construction Field Lead’s approved equal.

B. Provide all stainless steel door protection plates from a single source.

MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: Door protection plates shall be manufactured from Type 430, 16 gauge stainless steel.

B. Adhesive: Field-applied heavy-duty adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Fasteners: Beveled mounting holes and stainless steel screws.

D. Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 satin finish.

E. Size: Refer to details on Drawing Number H-2-837544, Sheet 1.

FABRICATION

A. Fabricate stainless steel door protection plates to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.

EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors to which protection plates will be attached for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the work.

B. Complete all finishing operations, including painting, before beginning installation of door protection plates.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 211 of 450

FOR

LeLe

vide all stae all sta

INFORMATION

Door prDoor preel.eel.

ed heaved heavy-y

holes and soles and s

nish.nish.

r Hr H-2--2-8383ONLYmplyly with rwith yyluding thluding th


10 2650 – 3

PREPARATION

A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing door protection plate components.

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate door protection plates as indicated on the approved drawings and in compliance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Install door protection plates level and plumb at the height indicated on the drawings.

B. Installation of Stainless Steel Door Protection Plates:

1. Surface must be dry, clean and properly sealed.

2. Cement-On: Apply a bead of “PL Premium Heavy Duty Adhesive,” in a zig-zag pattern over the back of the door protection plate. Position plate on the door and apply pressure until a tight fit is achieved.

3. Screw-On: Position the door protection plate on the door and attach it using stainless steel screws.

CLEANING

A. At completion of the installation, clean surface in accordance with the manufacturer’s cleaning and maintenance instructions.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 212 of 450

FORlatlat

SurfacSurfac

ementementINFORMATION

OnOng patterng patterndoor and aoor and a

Position thsition thteel screwteel screw

clean surfalean surfance instrance instr

ONLY


10 4413 – 1

SECTION 10 4413

FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK


1. Fire protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers.


1. Division 10, Section 10 4416 “Fire Extinguishers.”


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.



ASTM A240/A240M Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

ASTM A526 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Commercial Quality.

ASTM A1008 Standard Specification for Commercial Steel (CS) Sheet, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent) Cold-Rolled

ASTM B209 Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

ASTM B221 Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes.

ASTM C1048 Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 213 of 450

FOR

dd

DivisDivi

CUMECUMEINFORMATION

provisionprovision01 Specif01 Speci

others refothers reion. Refeion. Re

e indicatee indicat

SpecificaSpecificaNickel StNickel S

ure Vre VONLY

esseesse

ed (Galvad (Galvaalityality.


10 4413 – 2

B. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)

Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products


NFPA 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

As applicable to fire extinguishers.

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets.

1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, “Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.”

C. Fire extinguishers shall be listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide fire extinguishers listed and labeled by FM.

COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire hoses, hose valves, and hose racks indicated are accommodated.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 214 of 450

FORoduct Daoduct D

erial descal dess for fire ps for fire

PP INFORMATION

otectiootectig mounting mountin

on, door hon, door h

re protectre proteco other woother wo

otection catection ca

s andanONLYd cabid cabi

shers to cohers to c


10 4413 – 3

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.

PRODUCTS

MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: Carbon steel, complying with ASTM A366, commercial quality, stretcher leveled, temper rolled.

B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows:

1. Sheet: ASTM B209.

2. Extruded Shapes: ASTMB 221.

C. Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick.

FIRE PROTECTION CABINET

A. Cabinet Type: Model No. C2409-6R, steel, as manufactured by Larsen, with clear door and black letters, or the Construction Field Lead’s approved equal.

B. Cabinet Construction: Provide manufacturer’s standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-in. thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-in. thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet.

1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.

D. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated.

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Aluminum sheet.

F. Door Material: Aluminum sheet.

G. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.

H. Door Glazing: Tempered break glass.

1. Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 215 of 450

FOR ExtExt

ered Breakred Brea3, 1.5 m3, 1.5 INFORMATION

mmmm

N CABI CABINN

el No. C2No. C2tters, or thtters, or t

de manufde manufit cabinet t cabinet

ter and wer and w

fireire-ratedratedoldd--rolledrolle

ateriterONLYal. Pral. Pr


10 4413 – 4

I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer’s standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide manufacturer’s standard.

2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180 degrees.

J. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer’s standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Break-Glass Strike: Manufacturer’s standard metal strike, complete with chain and mounting clip, secured to cabinet.

3. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle.

4. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Construction Field Lead.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words “FIRE EXTINGUISHER.”

i Location: Applied to cabinet glazing.

ii Lettering Color: Black.

iii Orientation: Vertical.

K. Finishes:

1. Color: Stainless steel, or the Construction Field Lead’s approved equal.

FABRICATION

A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer’s standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

1. Weld joints and grind smooth.

2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 216 of 450

FOR

ff

BreakBreakchain andchain an

INFORMATION

Lock: CLock: Csharplsharply ony on

: LetterinLetterinize, spacinize, spacin

Lead.Lead.

nguishenguisher inr inSHER.”HER.”

d to cabind to cab

ONLY


10 4413 – 5

4. Install door locks at factory.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer’s standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2-in. thick.

2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged.

3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.

GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets will be installed.


PREPARATION

A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated.

1. Fire Protection Cabinets: 48-in. above finished floor to center of cabinet’s pull handle.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 217 of 450

FORgrougrou

L FINISHFINISH

with NAwith NINFORMATION

AArecommrecomm

al finishesal finishesa strippabstrippab

Work: Notrk: Notpearance opearance

roved Samroved Sam

ONLYdepth and depth and

ns hans


10 4413 – 6

B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semi-recessed fire protection cabinets.

2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.

3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 218 of 450

oveoveotection ctection c

ten installn install

e protee protINFORMATION

ctioctiog deviceg device

fire protecfire protended byded by mmyy

or replacer replacppearanceppearanc

re protectre protect

e been dame been dor similor simiONLY


10 4416 – 1

SECTION 10 4416

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers.


1. Division 10, Section 10 4413, “Fire Extinguisher Cabinets.”




A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher.

B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule with fire protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, “Portable Fire Extinguishers.”

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 219 of 450

FORD DOCUDOCU

eneral pneral pvisisINFORMATION

onon 01 S01

ts and othes and oths Section. ection.

erwise inderwise in

sociation (ociation

ndard for dard for

cated.catedONLY

IIncncIIIof indiviof indiv

final fire einal fire eoper fpe


10 4416 – 2

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.


Not Used.

COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.

b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PRODUCTS

PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Shall be manufactured by Amerex and shall be 10 pound ABC multi-purpose type consistent with those available through Hanford Stores.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or the Architect’s approved equal:

a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group: “Cosmic 5E.”

2. Valves: Manufacturer’s standard.

3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer’s standard.

4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 220 of 450

FORNTYNTY

l Warrantl WarranreplacereplacINFORMATION

firfiaantynty perperyy

nclude, bunclude, bu

of hydrostof hydros

ion of valvion of val

rs from dafrom da

UISHISHONLY

ERER

erex and erex andble througle throug

with reqth


10 4416 – 3

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 2-A:10-B:C, 5-lb. nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

EXECUTION

EXAMINATIONA. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.


INSTALLATIONA. General: Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 221 of 450

FOR LATIONLATION

al: Installl: Instalnts ofnts oINFORMATION

autaut

END OF SD OF

ONLY


21 1313 – 1

SECTION 21 1313

WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK

A. Scope of work includes modification of existing cross main piping, branch line piping, and sprinklers to accommodate the remodeled configuration of the affected space.

B. Section Includes:

1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.

2. Sprinklers.


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification, apply to this Section.


A. American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (ASCE/SEI)

ASCE/SEI 7 American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (ASCE/SEI)


ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch

ASME B16.1 Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250

ASME B16.4 Gray Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 125 and 250

ASME B16.5 Carbon Steel Pipe Fittings

ASME B16.9 Factory Made Wrought Butt-Welding Fittings

ASME B18.2.1 Square, Hex, Heavy Hex, and Askew Head Bolts and Hex, Heavy Hex, hex Glange, Lobed Head, and Lag Screws (Inch Series)

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 222 of 450

FOR

on on

Pipes,Pipes,

prinklerprinkleINFORMATION

s.s.

ENTS/CENTS/C

sions of thons of tpecificatioecificati

s referencs referencReferenceReference

cated.ated.

tructural Euctural

etty oyONLYf Civf Civ

ute (ASCte (ASC

ose, Inse


21 1313 – 2

ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping


ASTM A47/A47M Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings

ASTM A53/A53M Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

ASTM A234/A234M Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service

ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings

ASTM A733 Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples

ASTM A865 Standard Specification for Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black or Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded or Seamless, for Use in Steel Pipe Joints

D. American Water Works Association (AWWA)

AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings

AWWA C606 Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints

E. American Welding Society (AWS)

AWS B2.1 Standard Welding Procedure Specification (SWPS) for Shielded Metal Arc Welding of Carbon Steel, (M-1/P-1/S-1, Group 1 or 2), 1/8 Throught 1 1/2 Inch Thick, E7018, As-Welded or PWHT Condition

AWS D10.12M/D10.12 Guide for Welding Mild Steel Pipe

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems

G. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET)

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 223 of 450

FOR TM A5TM A5

A733A733

INFORMATION

or Sor S

ciation (Aciation (A

tile-ile-Iron aIron a

for Groovor Groo

ONLYrocedure Socedure S

Welding oWelding2), 1/8 T2), 1/8 T

ed od


21 1313 – 3

H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 199 Standard for Automatic Sprinklers for Fire-Protection Service

UL 213 Standard for Grooved and Plain End Fittings

UL 860 Standard for Pipe Unions for Flammable and Combustible Fluids and Fire-Protection Service

UL 864 Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and System Designer.

C. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared by a NICET Certificate of Competency holder. Drawings shall be prepared according to requirements of NFPA 13, Chapter 22 and shall include all content and detail described herein, including details of hangers, braces and attachments. Submittal drawings shall include, but not be limited to, the sprinkler plan view and section(s). Drawings shall not be provided on a single sheet, but shall be divided among as many sheets as necessary to provide quality drawings for eventual release of as-built drawings. WRPS FPE’s have authority to reject drawings deemed unusable or unreadable.

D. Hydraulic Calculations: Calculations showing the ability of the system to provide required application densities, prepared by a NICET Certificate of Competency holder. Drawings shall be prepared according to requirements of NFPA 13 (2016 Edition), Chapter 23, “Plans and Calculations” and shall include all content described herein. Calculations shall be prepared using the HASS®, Version 6.8 computer software by HRS Systems, Inc.

E. Hanger and Bracing Calculations: Calculations showing suitability of hangers and braces to support developed loads and stresses, prepared by a registered professional engineer. Drawings shall be prepared according to requirements of NFPA 13, Chapter 9 and shall include all content described herein.

F. Welding certificates.

G. Acceptance Test Plan: Written plan for conducting testing of system piping and components to verify the systems perform as required. Test procedures shall list all inspection, tests, analyses, and acceptance criteria. Any deficiencies noted

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 224 of 450

FORALSAL

duct Data:ct Data:ng characng chara

INFORMATION

Data: FData: F

er Piping er Piping etency holncy hol

13, Chapt13, Chaptg details odetails o

ot be limitot be limie providee provide

y to providy to provFPE’s havePE’s hav

g thONLYhe abilite abilET CertifET Certif

quirementuiremenll includell includ

e HASSe HASS


21 1313 – 4

during the tests shall be documented and tracked until resolved or corrected. The acceptance test shall be performed as required by NFPA 13.

H. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include “Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping.”

I. Field quality-control reports.

J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operations, and maintenance manuals.

K. As-built Drawings: Working plans revised to depict final installed condition and incorporating all approved changes to the submitted design.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer’s responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a NICET Certificate of Competency holder.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to AWS B2.1.

C. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13, “Installation of Sprinkler Systems.”

D. Piping Materials: Schedule 10 piping shall not be used in the design of the fire sprinkler system.


Not used.


A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 225 of 450

FOR

rporarpor

ASSURASSURA

QualifiQualifINFORMATION

caticat

r’s respon’s responystems anstems an

gineering neering t

Responsibiesponsibfield testfield test

ures and oures and

ONLYspecialtiespecialti

wing:ing:


21 1313 – 5

B. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by Hanford Fire Marshall and WRPS Fire Protection prior to installation.

1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers, but not less than 10 psig. Available water supply has a static pressure of 126 psig, and a residual pressure of 102 psig flowing 1,087 gallons per minute.

2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:

a. All areas: Ordinary Hazard Group 2.

3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:

a. Ordinary Hazard Group 2: greater than or equal to 0.20 gpm per square foot over the hydraulically most remote 2,000 square feet.

4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:

a. As required by NFPA 13.

5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:

a. All Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

6. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ordinary Hazard Group 2 Occupancies: 250 gpm for 90 minutes.

C. Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE/SEI 7.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler without Construction Manager’s written permission.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 226 of 450

FOR

MM

a.asqs

INFORMATION

mum Protmum Pro

required brequired b

ection Areection Are

ccording tccording tted.ted

m Demand m Demand

upaupaONLYncies: ncies:

tand the etand the eE/SEI/SEI 7.II


21 1313 – 6

COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction at ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

PRODUCTS

PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in “Piping Schedule” Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Standard Weight, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method. Other pipe materials allowed by NFPA 13 are acceptable.

B. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733, made of ASTM A53/A53M, standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

C. Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A865, threaded.

D. Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

E. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

F. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.

G. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.

H. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M and ASME B16.9. Other types of fittings may be used as allowed by NFPA 13.

I. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:


a. Anvil International, Inc.

b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 227 of 450

FORmplymply wiwiy

, and fittinnd fittinns, and pins, and p

D INFORMATION

FITTFITTINI

BlackBlack-SteSteor field fofield fo

FPA 13 arFPA 13 ar

STM A73STM A73h threadedh threaded

A865, threA865, thre

ASME B1ME BONLY


21 1313 – 7

c. Victaulic Company.

2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.

3. Uncoated, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A47/A47M, malleable-iron casting or ASTM A536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.

4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.

PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8-in. thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.

1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets.

2. Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type gaskets.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES

A. General Requirements:

1. Standard: UL’s “Fire Protection Equipment Directory,” listing or “Approval Guide,” published by FM Global, listing.


B. Angle Valves:


a. Fire Protection Products, Inc.

b. United Brass Works, Inc.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 228 of 450

FOR pee-FlangeFlangeME B16.2E B16.2

ass 12ass 12INFORMATION

5, C5, ce gaskece gaske

CastCast--IronIronskets.ets.

and Nuts: d Nuts:

ith AWS Dth AWSss and ches and ch

ONLYectory,” lctory,” l


21 1313 – 8

C. Ball Valves:


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.

b. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.

c. Kitz Corporation.

d. Milwaukee Valve Company.

e. NIBCO INC.

f. Potter Roemer.

g. Red-White Valve Corporation.

h. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

i. Victaulic Company.

j. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Branch Outlet Fittings:


a. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

b. Victaulic Company.

c. Sigma Piping Products.

2. Standard: UL 213.


4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.

5. Type: Mechanical-T and –cross fittings.

6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 229 of 450

FOR f.f

RRINFORMATION

d

TyTyco Fireco Fire

aulic Comic Com

ter Technoer Techn

ITTINGSITTING

iance withance with

ONLY


21 1313 – 9

7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to match connected branch piping.

8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.

SPRINKLERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products byone of the following:

1. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

2. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

3. Victaulic Company.

4. Viking Corporation.

B. General Requirements:

1. Standard: UL’s “Fire Protection Equipment Directory,” listing or “Approval Guide,” published by FM Global, listing.

2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum.

C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:

1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.

2. All Areas: Quick response, nominal 1/2-in. orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for “Ordinary” temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application.

D. Sprinkler Finishes:

1. Ares with suspended ceilings: Chrome plated.

2. Areas without suspended ceilings: Bronze.

EXECUTION

PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.

B. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint device materials and installation in NFPA 13.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 230 of 450

FORVicVic

Viking CViking C

q INFORMATION

rementremen

UL’s UL’s “Fi“Fiuide,” pubde,” pu

or Automar Autom

t--ResponsRespons

ULUL 199199LL

nal 1/2nal 1/2-ininryy” te” tyy ONLY

mpempeapplicatapplica


21 1313 – 10

C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.

D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2 1/2 and larger end connections.

F. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

G. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.

H. Refill sprinkler system piping with water.

JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system’s pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2 1/2 and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.

H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to “Quality Assurance” Article.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 231 of 450

FORl spl sp

ONSTRUCSTRU

uplingsuplingINFORMATION

fl fs that ha that haure rating re rating

nt to eachto each

pters, or cers, or cving NPS ving NPS

remove bremove b

m inside ainside

ONLYal in sizeal in siz

t and boltsand bolt

cordio


21 1313 – 11

1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.

I. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.

J. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

K. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.

SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers according to requirements in NFPA 13.

B. Install pendent sprinklers in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels.

C. Install upright sprinklers on riser nipples, length as necessary to position sprinkler within required distances from ceilings.

IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 232 of 450

FOR imilimil

terials ofterials of

SPECIASPECIAINFORMATION

rere--protecprotePA 13 anA 13 an

TIIONON

g to requirto requir

ter of narrter of narr

, length alength

ONLYping accoping acc


21 1313 – 12

3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, “Systems Acceptance,” chapter.

4. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.

C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.

PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

B. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 1/2 to 3, shall be one of the following:


2. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with cut- or roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

3. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded joints.

C. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 4 and larger, shall be one of the following:


2. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with cut- or roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

3. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded joints.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 233 of 450

move anmove an

HEDULEEDULE

esINFORMATION

sure, wesure, w

ight, blackht, blacks; and thres; and thr

sprinkler sprinkler

pipe with pipe withoints.nts.

h cutcuONLY- or r- or r

iping; grping; gnts.ts.

s; steel ws; steel w


21 1313 – 13

SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

A. Sprinkler types shall be as described in NFPA 13.

B. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:

1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.

2. Rooms with suspended ceilings: Semi-recessed pendent sprinklers.

C. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.

1. Upright Sprinklers: Rough bronze.

2. Pendent Sprinklers: Chrome-plated.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 234 of 450

FOR PenP

INFORMATION

EE

ONLY


22 0517 – 1

SECTION 22 0517

SLEEVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK


1. Sleeves.

2. Grout.





ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless


SUBMITTALS


QUALITY ASSURANCE

Not used.


Not used.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 235 of 450

FORD DOCUDOCU


DivisioDivisi



M)M)

ndard Spedard Speipped, Zinpped, Zin

pecificatiopecificatiment Gent ONLY

GrouGrou


22 0517 – 2

PRODUCTS

SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel collar; zinc coated.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.

D. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-in. minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

EXECUTION

SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Sleeve installation shall not interfere with the proper functioning of piping and equipment.

B. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Seal penetrations through all floors to provide and maintain a watertight installation.

D. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

1. Exception: Extend Sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other potentially wet areas 2-in. above finished floor level.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 236 of 450

lvanizedlvanizeded with wwith w

INFORMATION

TM C1107M C1107draulicdraulic--cemce

rink; recorink; reco

ayay comprecompreyy

packagedpackaged

ONLYer functiofunctio

oors, oo


22 0517 – 3

2. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants specified in Section 07 9200, “Joint Sealants.”

3. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.

E. Install Sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-in. annular clear space between sleeve and pipe, or pipe insulation.

SLEEVE SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:

a. Piping Smaller than NPS 6: Cast-iron wall sleeves.

i Select sleeve size to allow for 1/4-in. annular clear space between piping and sleeve.

2. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 237 of 450

FOR

bb

CHEDULHEDU

es andes andINFORMATION

slesle

e Slabse Slabs--oo

g Smaller Smaller

ect sleevet sleeven piping en piping

S 6: Galva6: Galv

ONLY


22 0518 – 1

SECTION 22 0518

ESCUTCHEONS FOR MECHANICAL PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK


1. Escutcheons.

2. Floor plates.



SUBMITTALS


QUALITY ASSURANCE

Not used.


Not used.

PRODUCTS

ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and with concealed hinge and setscrew.

E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed and exposed-rivet hinge, and spring-clip fasteners.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 238 of 450

D DOCUD DOCU

general pgeneral pher Der INFORMATION

visvis

ach type oh type o

NGG

ONLYd finid f


22 0518 – 2

FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.

b. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge or split-plate, stamped-steel type with exposed-rivet hinge.

c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast- brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass or split casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.


A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 239 of 450

FOR

g ag a

EscutcEscu

PPINFORMATION

pipdeepdeep-p

sulated Piulated Pipedd--steel tsteel t

e with expe with ex

t Wall andt Wall andbrass tbrass typyp

g Penetratig Penetratshed, chrohed, chr

viceiceONLYSpacSpac

lished, chished, c

nee--piece, cpiece, plated finplated fi


22 0523 – 1

SECTION 22 0523

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK


1. Brass ball valves.

2. Bronze ball valves.

3. Bronze swing check valves.

4. Bronze gate valves.

5. Bronze globe valves.




A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose

ASME B16.1 Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250

ASME B16.10 Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Valves

ASME B16.18 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B16.34 Valves Flanges, Threaded and Welding End


ASTM B61 Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 240 of 450

FOR BronzBron

Bronze gronze INFORMATION

e globe vae globe va

TS/COCODED



(ASM(ASMONLY

E)E)

ral Purposral Purpo

nd Flangend Flange


22 0523 – 2

ASTM B62 Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings

C. NSF International Standard / American National Standard (ANSI)

NSF/ANSI 61 Drinking Water System Components Health Effects

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

D. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.

2. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

E. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.

3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.

4. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

5. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

6. Maintain valve end protection.

7. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 241 of 450

FORce Lce L

m singlem single

E CompliaComplia

MEM INFORMATION

B16.1B16.criteria.riteria.

9 for buildor build

1 for valv1 for va

NDLINGDLING

ws:ws:

and corroand corros

ONLYd weld ed weld e

event rattlevent ratt

tional sonal


22 0523 – 3

1.6 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

B. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

C. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.

2. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller.

D. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-in. stem extensions and the following features:

1. Gate Valves: With rising stem.

2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

E. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.

2. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

3. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

F. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 242 of 450

FORWP: SteWP: St

TSTS

UIUI INFORMATION

REMEREME

nd Temped Tempes and nd tempemp

stream pipstream p

r than quathan qua

es NPS 6 es NPS 6

ONLYensions ansions a

th


22 0523 – 4

2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:

1. Manufacturers: Subject with compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following:


b. Flow-Tek, Inc., a subsidiary of Bray International, Inc.

c. Milwaukee Valve Company.

d. NIBCO Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS-SP-110.

b. SWP Rating: 150 psig.

c. CWP Rating: 600 psig.

d. Body Design: Two-piece.

e. Body Material: Forged Brass.

f. Ends: Threaded.

g. Seats: PTFE or TFE

h. Stem: Brass.

i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

j. Port: Full.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:



b. Hammond Valve.

c. Milwaukee Valve Company.

d. NIBCO INC.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 243 of 450

FOR DescrDesc

SSINFORMATION

a

SWP RatSWP Ra

P Rating: P Rating

sign: Twosign: Tw

l: Forgedl: Forged

ONLY


22 0523 – 5

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.

b. SWP Rating: 150 psig.

c. CWP Rating: 600 psig.

d. Body Design: Two piece.

e. Body Material: Bronze.

f. Ends: Threaded.

g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.

h. Stem: Stainless steel.

i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented.

j. Port: Full.

2.4 BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Lift Check Valves with Bronze Disc:


a. Hammond Valve.

b. Milwaukee Valve Company.

c. NIBCO INC.

d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2.

b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.

c. Body Design: Vertical flow.

d. Body Material: ASTM B61 or ASTM B62, bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Disc: NBR, PTFE, or TFE.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 244 of 450

FOR g.g

h.h. S

INFORMATION

Ball: Ball:

ort: Full.rt: Full

AALVESLVES

es with Bes with B

o compliacompliawing:ing:

ONLYWater TeWater Te


22 0523 – 6

2.5 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:


a. Hammond Valve.

b. Milwaukee Valve Company.

c. NIBCO INC.

d. Red-White Valve Corporation.

e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:



c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.

d. Body Material: ASTM B62, bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Disc: PTFE or TFE.

2.6 BRONZE GATE VALVE

A. Class 125, NRS Bronze Gate Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance, provide products by one of the following manufacturer’s:

a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division

b. Milwaukee Valve Company

c. NIBCO

d. WATTS Regulator Co.; a division of WATTS Water Technologies, Inc.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 245 of 450

FOR e.e

escriptiescriptINFORMATION

on

StandardStandard

P Rating: ating:

ign: Horign: Hor

ASTM BASTM B

ONLYroducts roducts


22 0523 – 7

2. Description:


b. CWP Rated: 200 psig.

c. Body Material: ASTM B62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint.

e. Stem Bronze.

f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.

g. Packing: Asbestos free.

h. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

B. Class 125, RS Bronze Gate Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance, provide products by one of the following manufacturer’s:

a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division

b. Milwaukee Valve Company

c. NIBCO

d. WATTS Regulator Co.; a division of WATTS Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:


b. CWP Rated: 200 psig.



e. Stem Bronze.

f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.


h. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 246 of 450

FOR g.g

HHINFORMATION

n

Bronze GBronze G

ers: Subje Subjeufacturer’sufacturer

rane Valvrane Valv

Companyompany

ivision ovision oONLY


22 0523 – 8

2.7 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:


a. NIBCO INC.

b. Red-White Valve Corporation.

2. Description:





e. Stem: Bronze.

f. Disc: PTFE or TFE.


h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 247 of 450

FOR b.b.

BBINFORMATION

din bonin bo

nds: Threads: Threa

Bronze.Bronze.

or TFE.or TFE.

s free.free.

iron, broniron, bron

ONLYoreign mareign macks, usks, u


22 0523 – 9

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball or butterfly valves.

2. Throttling Service except Steam: Globe or butterfly valves.

3. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with nonmetallic disc.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 248 of 450

FOR Lift CLift

INFORMATION

ace valve pace valve pe final adjufinal adju

S FOR VAOR V

dicated, usicated, us

erflyerfly valvvalvyy

Globe or Globe or

ONLYheck valveheck valve


22 0523 – 10

4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

5. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

3.5 POTABLE AND PROCESS HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.

2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 150, nonmetallic disc.

3. Ball Valves: Two-piece, full port, bronze, with stainless-steel trim.

4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, nonmetallic disc.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 249 of 450

FOR BaB

Bronze SBronze

INFORMATION

ENDEND O

ONLY


22 0553 – 1

SECTION 22 0553

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK


1. Equipment labels.

2. Warning signs and labels.

3. Pipe labels.

4. Stencils.

5. Valve tags.

6. Warning tags.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS /CODES AND STANDARDS



A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

ASME A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.


Not used.


Not used.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 250 of 450

FOR Pipe lPipe

tencils.encilsINFORMATION

tags.tags.

gs.

ODES ANODES A

he Contrache Contracication Seation Se

ed thereind thereincuments acuments

ONLYME)ME)

ation of Pition of Pi


22 0553 – 2

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER’S

A. Equipment Tags, Valve Tags, and Markers:

1. Marking Systems, Inc.

2. W.H. Brady Company

3. Graphic Products, Inc.

2.2 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Stainless steel, 0.025-in. Aluminum, 0.032-in. or anodized aluminum, 0.032-in. minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2 1/2 by 3/4-in.

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4-in. for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24-in., 1/2-in. for viewing distances up to 72-in., and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

6. Tag Attachment Wire: 20-gage, solid, stainless steel.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 251 of 450

FOR

TUTU

ipment Tament Ta

arkingarkingINFORMATION

SSyy

radrady Comy Com

ducts, Inc.cts, Inc

inless steenless steeminimum tminimum

ardware.ardware.ONLYvaryvary for foryy

if viewinif viewinnn , an


22 0553 – 3

B. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.3 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8-in. thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.

C. Background Color: Yellow.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2 1/2 by 3/4-in.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4-in. for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24-in., 1/2-in. for viewing distances up to 72-in., and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.

2.4 PIPE MARKERS

A. Pipe markers shall conform to ASME A13.1, “Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.”

B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 252 of 450

FOR

kgroukgrou

imum Temmum Tem

LabeLabeINFORMATION

SizSizbyby 3/43/yy

Size: 1/4Size: 1/4wing distaing dista

wing distawing distaincipal letncipal let

or selfor sel -tap-tapff

dhesive, chesive,

infonfONLYormatiormati

the h I


22 0553 – 4

E. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Include nominal operating pressure of compressed air (e.g. 45 psig or 90 psig).

3. Lettering Size: At least 1 1/2-in. high.

2.5 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1 1/4-in. for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4- in. for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.

1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal.

2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.

3. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-in. letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-in. numbers.

1. Tag Material: Stainless steel, 0.025-in. minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, (in Excel). Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 253 of 450

FOR cils: Prepls: Prep

um letter hum letterpaneanINFORMATION

andand

terial: Fierial: Fi

xterior, glxterior, glayy be in prbe in pyy

erior, alkerior, alkyydicated.icated.

lelONLYetters fotters f

um thicknum thickare.are.


22 0553 – 5

2.7 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5 1/4-in. minimum.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE."

4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations.

B. Install pipe markers completely around pipe in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09.

B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles, complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.

2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 254 of 450

FORUTIONUTIO

shhINFORMATION

all be inall be ons.ns

completemplete

ces of subes of suboil, greasoil, greas

ONLYitem of mitem of m


22 0553 – 6

C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 20 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

8. Provide at least one (1) marker in each room on all piping systems.

9. Provide an arrow marker with each pipe marker pointing away from the pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Potable (Domestic) Water, Hot Potable Water:

a. Label Abbreviation: DCW, DHW, DHWR

b. Background Color: Green.

c. Letter Color: White.

2. Process Cold Water, Process Hot Water:

a. Label Abbreviation: PCW, PHW, PHWR



RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 255 of 450

FOR

AAconcconc

Near majNear maminatinINFORMATION

on.on

at maximuat maximun areas ofn areas of

e removabremovab

marker in marker in

each pipeach pipof flow.of flow

ONLYter:r:

RR


22 0553 – 7

3. Fire Protection Water:

a. Label Abbreviation: FIRE

b. Background Color: Red.


4. Vacuum Air Sampling Piping:

a. Label Abbreviation: VAS



5. Compressed Air Piping:

a. Label Abbreviation: CA45, CA90

b. Background Color: Blue.


6. Nitrogen, Helium Gas:

a. Label Abbreviation: N2, He

b. Background Color: Blue.


7. Liquid Nitrogen

a. Label Abbreviation: LN2

b. Background Color: Black

c. Letter Color: White

8. Specialty Gases:

a. Label Abbreviation: SG

b. Background Color: Yellow.

c. Letter Color: Black.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 256 of 450

FOR c.c

CompresCompre

INFORMATION

Label Labe

ackgroundckground

Color: WColor: W

as:as:

n: N2, HeN2, He

ue.e

ONLY


22 0553 – 8

9. Sanitary Sewer, Sanitary Vent:

a. Label Abbreviation: SS, SV



10. Process Sewer, Process Vent:

a. Label Abbreviation: PS, PV



11. Storm Drain:

a. Label Abbreviation: SD



3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:a. Water: 1 1/2-in., round.b. Gas: 1 1/2-in., round.

2. Valve-Tag Color:a. Water: Natural.b. Gas: Yellow.

3. Letter Color:a. Water: Black.b. Gas: Black.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 257 of 450

FOR c.c

Storm DStorm D

INFORMATION

LabelLabe

ackgroundckground

Color: WColor: W

devices inevices iipment unpment un

onnectiononnectiond-d use fixuse fix

ONLYording to ording to

n the follothe follo


22 0553 – 9

3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 258 of 450

INFORMATION ONLY


22 0719 – 1

SECTION 22 0719

PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section includes insulating the following piping systems:

1. Potable and process cold-water piping.

2. Potable and process hot-water piping.

3. Roof drains and rainwater leaders.

4. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.

5. Condensate drain piping, indoors.





ASTM A240/240M Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

ASTM B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

ASTM C195 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement

ASTM C449 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finish Cement

ASTM C534 Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 259 of 450

FOR RoofRoo

uppliesuppliesINFORMATION

nsatensate draidrai

TS/CODECODE



ONLYion for Chion for Ch

inless Steenless Stes and for Gand for G


22 0719 – 2

ASTM C547 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation

ASTM C795 Standard Specification for thermal Insulation for use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel

ASTM C871 Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Thermal Insulation for leachable Chloride, Fluoride, Silicate, and Sodium Ions

ASTM C921 Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation

ASTM1136 Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation

ASTM D1644 Standard Test Methods for Nonvolatile Content of Varnishes

ASTM D1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinly Chloride) (CPVD) Compounds


ASTM E96/E96M Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

ASTM F1249 Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through Plastic Film and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor

B. Federal Codes and Regulations (CFR)

40 CFR 59 National Volatile Organic Compound Emissions Standards for Consumer and Commercial Products

C. Department of Defense Index of Specifications and Standards (DODISS)

MIL-A-3316C Adhesives, Fire-Resistant, Thermal Insulation

MIL-A-24178A Adhesive, Flexible Unicellular-Plastic Thermal Insulation

MIL-C-20079H Cloth, Glass: Tape Textile; & Thread, Glass & Wire-Reinforced Glass

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 260 of 450

M1M1

D1644D1644

INFORMATION

PP

StandaStandaCharacterCharacte

dard Test dard Tesission of sion of

t MethoMethoatet ONLY

dThrougThrou

ModulatedModulated

mp


22 0719 – 3

MIL-PRF-19565C Coating Compounds Thermal Insulation, Fire and Water Resistant, Vapor Barrier

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated (insulation, jacket, adhesives, and fastening methods). Include product description, manufacturer’s data sheets indicating density, thermal characteristics, temperature ratings, water-vapor permeance, and thickness.

B. Insulation installation details (manufacturer’s installation instruction/details).

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed anapprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by theDepartment of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, asdetermined by testing identical products according to ASTM E84, UL listed. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, andcement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testingagency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, andsmoke-developed index of 50 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be manufacturer’s original factory packaging, and shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTMstandard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

B. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction activities. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage.

C. Maintain ambient temperature and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 22 0529, "Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment."

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 261 of 450

FOR Y AY ASSUSSU

erer QuaQuallifiifieshhip pip INFORMATION

rogrogff Labor,Labor,

CharacteCharacterrg identicaidentica

andand jackjac, withwith appapp

s:s: FlameFlameor less.r less.

ONLYbe manufbe manu

cturerturer wiwe tetemperae

her


22 0719 – 4

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulationapplication.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, whererequired, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application maybegin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possiblein each area of construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Paragraph 3.11, “Piping Insulation Schedule,” forwhere insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C795.

E. Flexible Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C534, Type I for tubular materials. Minimum nominal density of 6 lb./ft3, thermal conductivity not more than 0.27 at 75°F mean temperature, and suitable for temperatures from -70°F to 220°F.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of thefollowing:

a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel.

b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.

c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS.

F. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type I, 850°F Materials: Mineral orglass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin, with thermal conductivity of not more than 0.23 at 75°F. Comply with ASTM C547, Type I, Grade A, withfactory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in"Factory-Applied Jackets" Article


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 262 of 450

FOR TIONTION MM

yy withwith reqreulatingulatinINFORMATION

mm

notno coconntaitai

n contactcontactppmppm whenwhe

nn austenaustenC795.C795.

sulation:ulation:C534,C534, TTy

mal conmal coneraer ONLY

tures fures

ements,ments, pp


22 0719 – 5

a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.

b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.

c. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.

e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation, SSL II with ASJ.

G. Removable Insulation Blankets: Flexible, reusable, removable blanket thermalinsulation system custom designed for each item to provide close contoured fit,with no gaps or seams. 2-in. thickness, 2.4 lb/ft3 density, 1000 deg F thermalinsulating wool, interior and exterior fabric of 17.5 oz/sq yd silicone rubber typewith buckle and strap assembly (D-ring closure) or Velcro attachments.


a. Advanced Thermal Corp.

b. Remco Technology, Inc.

c. Thermal Energy Products.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substratesand for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwiseindicated.

B. Products shall be fire retardant, moisture resistant and mildew resistant and vermin proof.

C. Products shall be as recommended by insulation manufacturer for specified application.

D. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C195.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, thefollowing:

a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Super-Stik.

E. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C449.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 263 of 450

FOR

aatintinthh bubuccklkl

ProductsProductllowinlowinINFORMATION

g:g:

AdvancedAdvanced

o TechnoTechno

nergyrgy ProPr

nsulationnsulationtoo surfacsurface

ONLYnt and miland m

cturer focturer fo


22 0719 – 6


a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.

2.3 ADHESIVES




D. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with aservice temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F.


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a businessof H. B. Fuller Company; CP-97.

b. Marathon Industries; 290.

c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a businessof H. B. Fuller Company; 81-27.

d. Mon-Eco Industries, nc.; 22-30.

e. Vimasco Corporation; 760.

2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/Lor less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPAMethod 24).

E. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100to plus 200 deg F.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 264 of 450

FOR

min pmin p

ducts shallcts shalltion.tion.

INFORMATION

ateate AdhAdhture rangeture range

bjectect too coco

d,d SpeciaSpeciaComCompanypany;;

90.0.

onstructinstruct-272 ONLY


22 0719 – 7

a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a businessof H. B. Fuller Company; 81-84.


F. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.


a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal.

b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive.


d. K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive.

2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPAMethod 24).

G. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.




c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a businessof H. B. Fuller Company; 85-60/85-70.

d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 265 of 450

FOR b.b.

c.c FF

INFORMATION

ff HH

K-K FlexFlex USU

pplicationslicationslatedlated accoacco

lyy withwith MM

ncence withwithWoWorkrk ini

ONLYructionuction BB


22 0719 – 8

H. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply withMIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams andjoints.







I. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC Jacket.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone.

b. Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent WeldingAdhesive.

c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.

d. Speedline Corporation; Polyco VP Adhesive.


2.4 MASTICS



RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 266 of 450

FOR

cc

d.d MM

INFORMATION

doordoor apppwhen calwhen cal

)

CoC mpmpatibatib

ompmplianclianc

tion;on; 739,739

maa-WeldWelONLYive.ve.

ive.ive


22 0719 – 9


D. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates;comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/Lor less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPAMethod 24).

E. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambientservices.


a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a businessof H. B. Fuller Company; 30-80/30-90.

b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M, Procedure B, 0.013 permat 43-mildry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.

4. Solids Content: ASTM D1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.

5. Color: White.

F. Weather Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use onabove-ambient services.


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a businessof H.B. Fuller Company; CP-10.


c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a businessof H.B. Fuller Company; 46-50.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 267 of 450

FOR

PPthatthatfof llowilowi

FINFORMATION

ostosofof H.H B

mamascoco CorCor

ermrmeanceeancehickness.ckness.

nge:nge: MinuMinu

, 5858 perceperc

ONLYnddooroor andand

av


22 0719 – 10

e. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-in. dry filmthickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F

4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.

5. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS




D. Joint Sealants:

1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products: Subject to compliance withrequirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:





e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, andsubstrates.

3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.


5. Color: White or gray.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 268 of 450

FORiaia

dd forfor bobcated.ed

shall bshall bff INFORMATION

fif

as recommas recomm

ulular-ar-GlasGlasoductsducts thatha

, the, the follofollo

Construconstru7676ONLYrands,rands, InIn


22 0719 – 11

6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/Lor less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPAMethod 24).

E. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:







3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


5. Color: Aluminum.


F. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:




4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 269 of 450

FOR

bb

c.coo

INFORMATION

MonMon-EE

shahallll bebe coco

istant,tant, flexfle

nge:nge: MinuMin

shallhall havha400 CONLY

FRFR 55

acketcket FlashFlas

, avaa


22 0719 – 12

5. Color: White.


2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on variousapplications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with thefollowing:

1. ASJ: White, Kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foilbacking; with self-sealing adhesive joints, complying with ASTM C1136,Type I.

2. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with Kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II.

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCED MESH

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10strands by 10 strands/sq. in. for covering pipe and pipe fittings.


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a businessof H. B. Fuller Company; Chil-Glas Number 10.

B. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10strands by 10 strands/sq. in. in a Leno weave, for pipe.


a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a businessof H. B. Fuller Company; Mast-A-Fab.

b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave,and pre-sized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 270 of 450

FOR

bbTTypyp

FSK JackFSK Jacper bar INFORMATION

ckinckin

BRICBRIC--RR

Fabric:bric: ApApin. forin. for coco

oompliancmpliandd inintoto thehe

y ConstruConstChilhil--GlaGlaONLY

qq yd.yd. wiwpe.pe

nts,nts, avaavaare


22 0719 – 13

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, thefollowing

a. Alpha Associates, Inc.; Alpha-Maritex 84215 and 84217/9485RW,Luben 59.

2.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C921, Type I, unless otherwiseindicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with Kraft-paperbacking.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTMD1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or fieldcutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.


a. Johns Manville; Zeston.

b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.

c. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke.

d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

3. Color: White.

4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise,field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees,valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps,mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

D. Metal Jacket:


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 271 of 450

FOR

ing.ing.

C Jacacket: etClass 16Class 1

d foformINFORMATION

mimingng

s: SubjectSubjece incorporincorpor

villle;le; ZestZest

c.;c ; FGFG SeSe

Smmoke.oke.

okeSafe.keSafe.ONLYaterialerial mam

availava


22 0719 – 14

a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a businessof H. B. Fuller Company; Metal Jacketing Systems.

b. ITW Insulation Systems; Aluminum and Stainless Steel Jacketing.

c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.

2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B209 Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or5005, Temper H-14.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.

b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and Kraft paper.

d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and Kraft paper.

e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

i Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.

ii Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- andlong-radius elbows.

iii Tee covers.

iv Flange and union covers.

v End caps.

vi Beveled collars.

vii Valve covers.

viii Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricatedfitting covers are not available.

E. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A240/A240M.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.

b. Material, finish, and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacketschedules.

c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and Kraft paper.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 272 of 450

FOR c.c

MMINFORMATION

oobobonndedd

ctorctory-Faby-Fab

SameSame matma

mmeded 22-piepius elbowus elbow

vers.ers. ONLY


22 0719 – 15

d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and Kraft paper.

e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

i. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.

i Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- andlong-radius elbows.

ii Tee covers.

iii Flange and union covers.

iv End caps.

v Beveled collars.

vi Valve covers.

vii Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricatedfitting covers are not available.

F. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil-thick, laminated vapor barrier andwaterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; a composite membrane consisting of a multi-ply embossed UV-resistant aluminum foil/polymer laminate to which is applied a layer ofrubberized asphalt specially formulated for use on insulated duct applications.


a. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Alumaguard.

2.10 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket withacrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C1136.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.

b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson0836.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 273 of 450

FOR vv

INFORMATION

vivi

i FielFiefittingfitting

acket: acket: 606r installatr install

ee coconsistnsistmminatenate toto

tedted forfor uu

withth requrequrkk iniONLY

cludeclude


22 0719 – 16

c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105.

d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CWPlus/SQ.

2. Width: 3-in.

3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.

4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

5. Elongation: 2 percent.

6. Tensile Strength: 40 lb./inch in width.

7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket withacrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C1136.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK.



d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

2. Width: 3-in.





7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket withacrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 274 of 450

FORASJASJ T

e:e: FoilFoilsiINFORMATION

acve; cve; como

SubjectSubject tncorporatorporat

pepe DivisiDivisi

orrpprrr oratiratioo

and 1and 111.11.ONLY8 CW,CW, aa


22 0719 – 17


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape.

b. Compac Corporation; 130.

c. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.

2. Width: 2-in.

3. Thickness: 6 mils.




D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive:


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF.


c. Compac Corporation; 120.

d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.

2. Width: 2-in.





RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 275 of 450

AdA

ElongatiElongati

sili INFORMATION

StrengStren

ape:ape: VapoVapo

ect toect to cocommporatedporated ini

ivision;ision; 44

atiatioon, SpeSpe

ONLY


22 0719 – 18

2.11 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.

b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015-in. thick, 3/4-in. wide with wing seal or closed seal.

3. Aluminum: ASTM B209 Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; TemperH-14, 0.020-in. thick, 3/4-in. wide with wing seal or closed seal.

4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat andslotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer forapplication.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-in.-de, stainless steel orMonel.

C. Wire: 0.062-in. soft-annealed, stainless steel.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, availablemanufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Workinclude, but are not limited to, the following:

a. C & F Wire.

2.12 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide TruebroLav Shield or equivalent product by one of the following:

a. Sloan Valve Company.

B. Description: Manufactured rigid, impact-resistant PVC enclosure for concealingwater supplies and stop valves, drain pipe and traps below wall-hung lavatories,stainless steel screws and anchors for wall mounting. Comply with Americanswith Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 276 of 450

FORtt

AlA umumH-14, 0.0H-14, 0

INFORMATION

s:s: TwinTwtoo acceacceppt t

hinghing insulinsu

tainlesstainless ss

mpplianliancce e thathat maymay

followinollowinONLY


22 0719 – 19

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements forinstallation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulationapplication.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have beencorrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Removematerials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Beforeinsulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F Consult coating manufacturer forappropriate coating materials and application methods for operatingtemperature range.

2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperaturebetween 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coatingmanufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methodsfor operating temperature range.

C. If applicable, coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heattracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that applies to insulation.

D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to bein contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, andeven surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings,valves, and specialties.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 277 of 450

FORcc

ATIONION

repparaaraINFORMATION

oowwill advill adv

on:on: CleCleanancorrosionrrosion

oat 300300 sexyy finishfinish

300300 degdeg FFalsls andand apap

peratingeratingooxxONLY

y cocoaatintiaterialsterials ana

raderade insinsplie


22 0719 – 20

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, andthicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation systemschedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for theservice. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attackinsulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, andspecialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seamsand joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations ininsulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barriermastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchorattachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extendinsulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item topoint of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment tostructure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or punctureby hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coveragerate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 278 of 450

FOR

ialtieialtie

insulationsulatio

sulatioulatioINFORMATION

wwh adhesh adhes

withwith leastleast

indicatedindicatedports,rts, ana cc

slysly ththroouug

por barror barrff aONLY

acachhmmndd sealseal ene

ightghtlyly jojos


22 0719 – 21

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-in.-de strips, of same material asinsulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinchingstaples along both edges of strip, spaced 4-in. o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1 1/2-in. Install insulation withlongitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receiveself-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at2-in. o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic overstaples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation materialmanufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seamsand joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percentof its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separationsand cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material overdamaged areas. Extend patches at least 4-in. beyond damaged areas. Adhere,staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Manholes.

5. Handholes.

6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 279 of 450

mm

WhereWhereandand jointjoinINFORMATION

inin a ma maahickness.ckness.

thh sysyststeemmmal mmal moveov

facingsacings bybat leleast 4st 4

uttutt joints.joints.

ll insulatioinsula

ONLY


22 0719 – 22

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applicationsrequiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoorapplications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with jointsealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2-in. below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminateinsulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulationinside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applicationsrequiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoorapplications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with jointsealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlapwall flashing at least 2-in.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are NotFire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 07 8413, "Penetration Firestopping,"for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 8413, "Penetration Firestopping."

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 280 of 450

FOR ulationulation II

ation conion con

al penp INFORMATION

etraetra

licaticationsions rrsurface asurface a

ooror andand ootlyy jojoinineded

r insulatinsulati

flashinglashing se

ar ONLYtiontion PPghgh wwallsalls a

n PPenetraenetrwallswalls anan


22 0719 – 23

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials exceptwhere more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation materialinstallation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and otherspecialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unlessotherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or miteredfittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded withadhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulatingcement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniformwith adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipeinsulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cutsectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the nextand hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipeinsulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacentpipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-boxstuds, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipeinsulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacentpipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulatestrainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide aremovable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services,provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformedpipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than twotimes the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever isthicker.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 281 of 450

FORfifiEacEacadhesadhesiicementment fi

h adja INFORMATION

oininoinin

teee fifittingttingoff same mame m

insulationnsulatiocee withwith tt

preformedpreformiial,l, densidensi

e insulatioinsulatiorr oneon pippip

udinguding thetheams, ams, ONLY

ndnd

ulationation oess ess as uussee

ththan


22 0719 – 24

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cementand coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambientservices and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce themastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth andwell-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except forflexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows,tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVCend caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVCtape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word"union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressuretemperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, andtransmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by taperingit to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishingcement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shallconform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipeinsulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install sameinsulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation,extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times theinsulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange orunion. Secure flange cover in place with stainless- steel or aluminumbands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as forflanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line ofvalve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, eachconsisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure thiswire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extendinsulation at least 2-in. over adjacent pipe insulation on each side ofvalve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation withinsulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to asmooth finish.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 282 of 450

FOR"u"u

atee instrunstrutureure ttapsap

ono INFORMATION

insulinsundnd ththee conco

andnd fflashinlashfff

ulationulation ccg:g:

gege andand unness asss as thath

g pipe insupipe insu

mademade frofronn lonloONLY

ngng aansulationsulation

tainless-tainless-insulationsulation

mee mma


22 0719 – 25

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finishexposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

E. Insulate exposed hot- and cold-water supplies, stops, and traps at handicapaccessible lavatories and sinks with protective shielding covers.

3.6 EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Pumps: Removable insulated flexible blankets. Removable insulation shall overlap adjoining pipe insulation by 2-in.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturers recommendedadhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surfacebeing insulated.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts,plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outercircumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections ofsheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturersrecommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allowpassage of air to surface being insulated.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer'srecommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allowpassage of air to surface being insulated.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipeinsulation when available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections ofpipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permitaccess to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbinginsulation.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 283 of 450

FOR

lonlonhesivehesive toto

g insulatensulate

InnsstaltINFORMATION

atiat

pipeipe ininsulasul

of insulatiinsulathicknesshickness o

nnerner circcir uuntnt straistra ghtght

ickness ckness aas

sealseal sseaeamopeninopenin

dd ONLY

g


22 0719 – 26

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams withmanufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulationthat allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire orbands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints,and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces,secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6-in. o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces,do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additionaladhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and sealwith vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts,plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outercircumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiberblanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapseams at least 1-in. and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipeinsulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, installmitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoiningpipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 284 of 450

FOR

WWandand

ForFor insuinsuurere lalINFORMATION

psps

ulationulation wwple longiple longi

coommendmmener mamasticstic

Flanges:Flanges

lationation toto o

samesame as asulation.lation.ONLY

of flf flangeangmentsents witwit

nde


22 0719 – 27

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipeinsulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections ofpipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valveoperation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation orinsulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-in. overlap at seams andjoints.

2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-in. thick coats of lagging adhesive.

3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposedinsulation.

B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.

3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

4. Install jacket with 1 1/2-in. overlaps at longitudinal seams and 3-in.-dejoint strips at end joints.

5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets andexposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.

C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-in. overlap at longitudinalseams and end joints; for horizontal applications. Seal with manufacturersrecommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one beadunder lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 285 of 450

FORPPLILI

ere glag ss-ssionion with fwith

INFORMATION

aacketcket sm

clothot betwbetw

sulatelate insuin

installnstall asas

d tight.tight.

ateerriaiONLYll asas jj

rerrer's's recrecoom

iinalna seamseam


22 0719 – 28

D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-in. overlap at longitudinalseams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Sealend joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12-in. o.c. and at end joints.

3.10 FINISHES

A. Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material:Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 09 9113, "Exterior Painting," and Section 09 9123, "Interior Painting."

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that iscompatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidalagent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, applytwo coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allowvisual inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.

3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. General:

1. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials andthicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. Ifmore than one material is listed for a piping system, selection frommaterials listed is Contractor's option.

2. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not installinsulation on chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potentialfor personnel injury.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 286 of 450

FOR agag

a.a

Elaastos INFORMATION

mermensulationsulatio

as selectas selecthee cocompmplele

m or stm or stainin

bularular insinpinginONLY

sysystesteingng sysyststeme

dd, do no, do nos th


22 0719 – 29

B. Provide insulation and jackets as indicated in the following schedule. The schedule applies to both exposed and concealed applications unless otherwise noted.

Insulation Thickness According toPipe Size

Service Insulation Type Jacket Type 3/4” and

Less 1” – 1-1/4” 1-1/2” – 3”

Potable Cold Water

(DCW)

Mineral Fiber, Pre-

Formed (2.1.G)

ASJ (2.6.A.1) 1” 1” 1”

Potable Hot Water

(DHW)

Mineral Fiber, Pre-

Formed (2.1.G)

ASJ (2.6.A.1) 1” 1” 1-1/2”

Potable Hot Water Return

(DHWR)

Mineral Fiber, Pre-

Formed (2.1.G)

ASJ (2.6.A.1) 1” 1” 1-1/2”

Process Cold Water

(PCW)

Mineral Fiber, Pre-

Formed (2.1.G)

ASJ (2.6.A.1) 1” 1” 1-1/2”

Process Hot Water (PHW)

Mineral Fiber, Pre-

Formed (2.1.G)

ASJ (2.6.A.1) 1” 1” 1-1/2”

Process Hot Water Return

(PHWR)

Mineral Fiber, Pre-

Formed (2.1.G)

ASJ (2.6.A.1) 1” 1” 1-1/2”

C. Roof Drain Bodies and Rainleaders: Insulation shall be Mineral-Fiber, PreformedPipe, Type I, 1-in. thick minimum.

D. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Potable Hot and Cold Water, and Stops at ADA-compliant Plumbing Fixtures:

1. All Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4-in. thick.

b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1-in. thick.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 287 of 450

FOR

FibFibForFor(2.1.G)(2.1.G

FMineral Mineral

r, PreP

ORINFORMATION

ddNASJASJ

(2.2.66.A.1).A.1)

FOMA

1””

MAMAMAMAONNN

ONLYONL

MineralMineral--


22 0719 – 30

E. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 deg F

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4-in. thick.

b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2-in. thick.

3.12 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-appliedjacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor'soption.

C. Piping, Concealed: None.

D. Piping, Exposed

1. PVC: 20 mils thick. (Paragraph 2.10.C)


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 288 of 450

FORrere

ion. ion.

, Conceale Conceal

osINFORMATION

eded

mmilsils thickthick

F SECTIOSECTI

ONLY


22 1116– 1

SECTION 22 1116

POTABLE AND PROCESS WATER PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK


1. Under-building slab and aboveground potable and process water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings.




A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

ASSE 1079 Performance Requirements for Dielectric Pipe Unions

MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports

MSS SP-123 Non-Ferrous Threaded and Solder-Joint Unions for Use with Copper Water Tube


ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch

ASME B16.18 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B16.21 Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges

ASME B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings

ASME B18.2.1 Cap Screws & Hex Bolts

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 289 of 450

FOR DD DOCDO

d general pgeneral pother Dither DINFORMATION

i

ents and oents and oSection. RSection. R

wise indicse ind

ards Institards Inst

Performanerformanonsns

gers and Sgers and

ThreadreaONLY

ed aed aWater TuWater Tu

ose, Inse


22 1116– 2


ASTM A674 Standard Practice for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe for Water or Other Liquids

ASTM B32 Standard Specification for Solder Metal

ASTM B88 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube

ASTM B813 Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxesfor Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube

ASTM B828 Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings

ASTM F1545 Standard Specification for Plastic-Lined Ferrous Metal Pipe, Fittings, and Flanges

D. American Water Works Association (AWWA)

AWWA C105/A21.5 American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems

AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile-Iron Mains and Their Appurtenances

AWWA C651 Disinfecting Water Mains

AWWA C652 Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities

AWWA M41 Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings

E. American Welding Society (AWS)

AWS A5.8 Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding

F. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO)

IAPMO PS 66 Dielectric Fittings

G. NSF International Standard / American National Standard (ANSI)

NSF 14 Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 290 of 450

FOR

M BM

545545INFORMATION

Works AssWorks Ass

AmAEncasEncas

nstallationnstallationurtenanceurtenance

ng Water g Wate

WaWONLYter Stoer St

d Fittingsd Fittings


22 1116– 3

NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects

H. Structural Engineering Institute (SEI)/American Society of Civil Engineers(ASCE)

SEI/ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For piping, transition fittings, and dielectric fittings.

B. System purging and disinfecting activities report.

C. Field quality-control reports.


Not used.


Not used.


A. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Underground, 3” and Smaller:

1. Copper:

a. Pipe: Copper tube, Type K, soft (annealed) temper, ASTM B88.

b. Fittings: Cast-Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18; Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.22.

c. Joints: Brazed, BCuP type.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 291 of 450

FOR

em pem p

d qualiqualityty

URANURANINFORMATION

CEC

AND HAND H

TSS

ter pipinger pipings determins determi

ONLYh NSF 14 h NSF 14


22 1116– 4

B. Above Ground, 3” and smaller:

1. Copper

a. Pipe: Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L water tube, hard drawn temper.

b. Fittings: Cast-Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18; Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.22.

2. Copper Unions:

a. MSS SP-123.

b. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.

c. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.

d. Solder-joint or threaded ends.

3. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

i. Elkhart Products Corporation.

ii. NIBCO Inc.

iii. Viega.

b. Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber, O-ring seal in each end.

c. Fittings for NPS 2 1/2 to NPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM- rubber, O-ring seal in each end.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8-in. thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.

2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 292 of 450

FOR

a

b.b.

BBINFORMATION

alal

SolderSolder--jojo--

suree-Sealea

urers: Subrers: Sune of the ne of the

ducts Coructs Cor

ONLYWroughtrought-coc

d

nze or wze oh


22 1116– 5

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B813.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:


a. Hart Industries International, Inc.

b. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

c. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079.

3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 180°F.

4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group.

b. Matco-Norca.

c. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

d. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079.

3. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

4. Pressure Rating: 300 psig.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 293 of 450

FOR ManManproduproduc

HINFORMATION

artar

Watts; a dWatts; a d

ns; a Zurn; a Zurn

079.79.

sig at 180°ig at 180°

nt copper nt copper

ONLYith requith requ

er of the Per of the P


22 1116– 6

5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Central Plastics Company.

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

4. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

5. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.

6. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples:


a. Elster Perfection Corporation.

b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

c. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66.

3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F1545.

4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F.

5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.

6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 294 of 450

FORd.d

NoncondNoncon

s INFORMATION

re Ratinre Rat

Neoprene oNeoprene o

Phenolic oPhenolic

with steel with stee

pliancepliance ww

ONLY


22 1116– 7

2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig

2. End Connections: NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper tube.

3. End Connections: NPS 2 1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.

B. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

4. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.

5. End Connections: NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.

6. End Connections NPS 2 1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.

2.6 ESCUTCHEONS

A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.

B. One Piece, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with setscrews.

C. One Piece, Deep Pattern: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish.

D. One Piece, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with setscrew.

E. Split Casting, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge and setscrew.

F. Split Plate, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge, setscrew.

G. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners

H. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 295 of 450

FOR

esses

WorkiWorki

nd Connd ConINFORMATION

ee

nnectionsnnection

eiling, floeiling, f

ed, chromd, chrom

wn, boxn, box--shsh

inish ishONLY

withwith

d finish wd finish w

ncealedea


22 1116– 8

Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

D. Install underground copper tube and ductile-iron pipe in PE encasement according to ASTM A674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.

E. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside the building at each potable water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 22 0519, "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping," and with requirements for drain valves and strainers in Section 22 1119, "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

F. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

G. Install water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.

H. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 22 0548, "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

I. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated, and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

J. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

K. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

L. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

M. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

N. Install piping free of sags and bends.

O. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 296 of 450

FOR

valvvalvh requireh requirembing Pipiing Pipi

9, "Dome, "DomINFORMATION

valve imvalve im

g level wig level wi

n piping. piping. 2 0548, "V0548, "

t.""

d protecteprotectcated, andcated, and

ONLYin equipmin equipm

iagonal ruagonal

pac


22 1116– 9

P. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

Q. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 22 0519, "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

R. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for thermometers in Section 22 0519, "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 22 0517, "Sleeves and Sleeve Schedules for Plumbing Piping."

T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 22 0517, "Sleeves and Sleeve Schedules for Plumbing Piping."

U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Cut pipes square and ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.

D. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

E. Brazed Copper Pipe Joints:

1. Cut pipes square and ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

2. Joints shall be cleaned and polished before brazing.

3. Apply heat carefully to prevent damage to pipe, fittings and valves.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 297 of 450

FOReduleedule

ll sleeve ssleeve squiremenquiremen

heduld INFORMATION

es foes fo

ons for pips for pi

ends of pnds of p

bris from bris from

red pipe thed pipe harp dieharp di

tinti ONLY

s.gs and gs and

to externato extern

gs wigs with tth t


22 1116– 10

4. Purge lines with dry nitrogen during brazing.

F. Pressure-Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer and in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. The fitting alignment shall be checked against the mark on the tubing to assure tubing is fully engaged (inserted) in the fitting. The joints shall be pressed using the tool approved by the manufacturer.

G. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.3 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.

3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 22 0548, "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 22 0529, "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

c. Longer than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8-in.

E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 298 of 450

FOR

all diall diing.ing

ric Fittingric Fittin

INFORMATION

PPORTPPORT

irements firements mic Controc Contro

s for pipe for pipe nd Suppornd Suppo

e 8 or 42, 8 or 42

Piping Ruiping R

e 1,1 ONLYadjustadjust

3, adjusta3, adjusta

TyType 49e 49y ,,


22 1116– 11

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60-in. with 3/8-in. rod.

2. NPS 1 and NPS 1 1/4: 72-in. with 3/8-in. rod.

3. NPS 1 1/2 and NPS 2: 96-in. with 3/8-in. rod.

F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

G. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1 1/4 and Smaller: 84-in. with 3/8-in. rod.

2. NPS 1 1/2: 108-in. with 3/8-in. rod.

3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-in. rod.

H. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.

I. NPS 1 and Smaller: 3-in. with 3/8-in. rod.

J. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 andmanufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect potable water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect potable and process water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than that required by plumbing code.

3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 299 of 450

FOR NPS NPS

ppopporrtsts fINFORMATION

r

aller:aller: 33--ii

tubbing noing noinstructioinstructio

ement of pment of p

ipment anipment an

ONLYervice pirvice p

vice pipingice piping


22 1116– 12

3.6 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

B. Escutcheons for New Piping:

1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.

2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

5. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, cast brass.

6. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor plate.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Section 22 0553, "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


A. Cleaning: Flush and clean piping prior to testing. Remove corrosion by mechanical means or chemical means. Use chemical that are non-toxic and compatible with piping materials.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 300 of 450

FORbb

Bare PBare Ppolished polished

PINFORMATION

iping iniping in

ngng at Floorat Floor

Complyomply wiwiyon 22 0553n 22 055

ng pressug pressuONLYmove cormove corat are nonat are non


22 1116– 13

iv. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

v. Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below, and to ensure compliance with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill potable and process water piping, use high-point vent valves to remove air from piping during filling. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 100 psig, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Provide pressure gauge with shutoff and bleeder valve at highest point of system tested. Inspect all joints in system under test. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping, or portion, thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Do not conceal pipe until satisfactorily tested.

g. Testing with air will not be allowed.

h. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 301 of 450

FOR dd

Piping TePiping TINFORMATION

Fill potaFill potemove airmove air

ermine tharmine tha

ks and defs and dee been alte been a

ments, subments, subam of portm of port

ded, or repded, or repbeen tebeen tONLY

steed befod bef

r pressure r pressurem materm mat

ProvidProvt


22 1116– 14

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.

3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.

4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.

6. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use.

7. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

8. Check mixing valves for adequate flow and temperature to plumbing fixtures.

9. Check automatic flow control valve settings to maintain specified circulation flow.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable and process water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

i. Fill system, or part thereof, with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 302 of 450

FOR pluplu

Remove RemoveecifiedecifieINFORMATION

fofo

plumbing lumbing

valves for valves for

ontrol valontrol val

r pippipONLYing aing a

ng that hang that ha

d byby ay


22 1116– 15

ii. Fill system, or part thereof, with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Clean interior of water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

3.12 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller.

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller.

3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Automatic flow control valves.

4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of water flow to and from equipment.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 303 of 450

FOR

aterater

n interior interior ses.es.

INFORMATION

EE

ecial fittincial fittincations betions be

e used forused for

d. Where. Whery: ONLY

r piping Npiping

piping NPiping N

utomato


22 1316– 1

SECTION 22 1316

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section Includes: Pipe, tube, and fittings.


1. Section 07 8413, “Penetration Firestopping,” for piping penetrating fire-rated walls.







ASME B16.23 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings: DWV

ASME B16.29 Wrought copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: DWV


ASTM A888 Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications

ASTM B32 Standard Specification for Solder Metal

ASTM B306 Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV)

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 304 of 450

FORratra

DOCUMEOCUME

rara INFORMATION

provisprovon 01 Speon 01 Spe

nd others others on. Referon. Refe

ndicated.ndicated

nstitute (Anstitute (A

Hangers anangers an

rsrs (ASME(ASM

ONLYy Solder JSolder y

ught Copught CopVV


22 1316– 2

ASTM B813 Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube

ASTM B828 Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings

ASTM C564 Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D2321 Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications

ASTM D2235 Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D2564 Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems

ASTM D2661 Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D2665 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D2855 Standard Practice for the Two-Step (Promer and Solvent Cement) Method of Joining Poly (vinyl Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Pipe and Piping Components with Tapered Sockets

ASTM D3311 Standard Specification for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fittings Patterns

ASTM F402 Standard Practice for Safe Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners Used for Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings

ASTM F656 Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 305 of 450

FOR TM D22TM D22

INFORMATION

SSStyStyyand Veand V

andard Spandard SpC) Plastic D) Plastic D

ctice fortice fo) MONLY

thMethod Method

ChlorinaChlorinae and Pie and Pip

in


22 1316– 3

D. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook (CISPI)

CISPI 310 Specification for Coupling for use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications

E. Federal Codes and Regulations (CFR)


F. NSF International Standard / American National Standard (ANSI)

NSF 14 Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.


Not used.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 306 of 450

F 14F 14

INFORMATION

For each tFor each t

reports.eports.

l, stamp, ol, stamp, o

Piping Syping Sys Includenclude

F--seONLYwer" wer"


22 1316– 4

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A888, CISPI 301.

B. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:


a. ANACO-Husky SD 4000.

b. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

c. Tyler Pipe.

2. Standards: ASTM C1540-04 and CISPI 301.

3. Description: Heavy duty stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C564, neoprene elastomer sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B306, drainage tube, drawn temper.

B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder-joint fittings.

C. Solder: ASTM B32, lead free with ASTM B813, water-flushable flux.

2.4 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D2661, Schedule 40.

B. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D2661, made to ASTM D3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.

C. Solvent Cement: ASTM D2235.

1. ABS solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 325 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 307 of 450

FOR MaMaproducproduc

AAINFORMATION

NN

Mission RMission R

Pipe.ip

M C1540M C1540-0

y stainlesy stainlesdevices; aevices; a

ipe pe stop.stop.

ONLYe, drawn , drawn

er or ASMr or ASM

h


22 1316– 5

2. Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, drain, waste, and vent.

B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D2665, made to ASTM D3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F656.

1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D2564.

1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 308 of 450

FOR AdhAdhcalculacalcula

dhesivdhesivINFORMATION

e pre prCalifornCaliforn

of Volatilof Volatilronmentaonmenta

M D2564.M D2564.

shall haveshall have40 CFR 5940 CFR 59

with the teith the talth Serviclth Serv

ons fromns fromONLY

V


22 1316– 6

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

H. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

I. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

J. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

K. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

L. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

M. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

N. Install aboveground ABS piping according to ASTM D2661.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 309 of 450

FOR

p 1/p 1m horizm horiz

o fixturesfixturest tees, elbt tees, el

of flowfl INFORMATION

mmf pipes of pipes o

on of flown of flow

drainage painage pd alignmenalignme

pstream. Istream. tions for uions for

ain swab iain swab

iping at thiping at th

ONLYward in diward in di

ard in direard in di

nw


22 1316– 7

O. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D2665.

P. Install underground ABS and PVC piping according to ASTM D2321.

Q. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 22 0517, "Sleeves and Sleeve Schedules for Plumbing Piping."

S. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 22 0518, "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

B. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B828. Use ASTM B813, water-flushable, lead-free flux, and ASTM B32, lead-free-alloy solder.

C. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D2235 and ASTM D2661 Appendices.

3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D2855 and ASTM D2665 Appendices.

3.3 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12-in. of each fitting and coupling.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-in.minimum rods.

D. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 310 of 450

FOR

mbingmbin

NSTRUCSTRUC

ess, caess, caINFORMATION

tt--irirFitFittings tings

nd fittingnd fittingflushable,ushable,

SolventSolvent--CCaccordingaccording

safeafe-hand-han

M DDONLY2235 a2235 a

and ASTMand AST


22 1316– 8

2. NPS 3: 60-in. with 1/2-in. rod.


E. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

F. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1 1/4: 72-in. with 3/8-in. rod.


3. NPS 2 1/2: 108-in. with 1/2-in. rod.

4. NPS 3: 10 feet with 1/2-in. rod.

G. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

H. Install hangers for ABS and PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:




I. Install supports for vertical ABS and PVC piping every 48-in.

J. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 311 of 450

FOR NPS NPS

pports fpportsINFORMATION

or

for ABS for ABS mum rod mum rod

NPS 2: 4NPS 2: 4

1/21/2--inin.. rodro

rod.ro

VC pipingVC pipin

ccordccordONLY

ng ng

and spand s


22 1316– 9

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Section 22 1319, "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

5. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2 1/2 and larger.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 22 0553, "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Re-inspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for re-inspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 312 of 450

FOR

CATCAT

tifyfy exposexposycation specation sp

mente INFORMATION

ONONTROLTROL

notifytify auth authyye. Performe. Perform

Arrange Arrange er roughiner rough

nal inspectal insped belowd belowONLY

d that pipd that pipor re-inspor re-ins

by a


22 1316– 10

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-in. wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Exposed ABS and PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint.

3.8 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground, soil, waste and vent piping shall be any of the following:

1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 313 of 450

FORcocoleakleak

Finished nishedtraptr INFORMATION

s filles fillatertight. atertight.

eyy leave bleave yy1-inn.. wg. wg.

ure this prere this pronal air thonal air

nnections fnnections

with new mth new mults are obults are ob

red correcred corre

ONLYwork progwork prog

avoid cvoid


22 1316– 11

2. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.

3. ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

4. PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

B. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be any of the following:

1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI heavy-duty cast-iron hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints.

2. ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

3. PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 314 of 450



22 4000– 1

SECTION 22 4000

PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section includes the following healthcare fixtures and specialties:

1. Combination safety eye wash/drench hoses.





ANSI Z358.1 Eyewash Standard


ASME A112.18.1 Plumbing Supply Fittings

ASME A112.18.6 Flexible Water Connectors

C. NSF International Standard (NSF)/ American National Standard (ANSI)

NSF/ANSI 61 Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fixtures.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Submit Federal Green Procurement Requirements as stated below via product data, cutsheet, or other product information sheet.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 315 of 450

FORDD


ummINFORMATION


herwise inerwise i

ndards Inndards In

EyEyewasewa

Engineersngineers

g Supplyg Supply F Fyy

r Connr ConONLY

ectec

ional Staional Sta

Componenomponen


22 4000– 2

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures and faucets, include operation and maintenance manuals (which shall address servicing and adjustments of flushometer valves and electronic sensors).

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Not used.


Not used.

PRODUCTS

COMBINATION EYE WASH/DRENCH HOSE

A. Emergency Eyewash/Drench Hose Combination Units:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Guardian, Model G5026FSH (wall mount) and G5022FSH (deck mount), or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Acorn Safety; a division of Acorn Engineering Company.

b. Bradley Corporation.

c. Encon Safety Products.

d. Guardian.

e. Haws Corporation.

2. Description: Dual purpose eyewash/drench hose for wall mounting. Unit may be left in the mounting bracket for use as a fixed eyewash, leaving user’s hands free. Alternatively, unit may be removed for use as a drench hose to rinse any part of user’s eyes, face or body.

a. Construction: Chrome plated brass eye/face wash supply fittings, brass unions, 8-foot stainless steel flexible hose. ANSI compliant signage.

b. Standard: ANSI Z358.1-2014.

3. Piping:

a. Material: Stainless steel.

b. Unit Supply: NPS ½” minimum.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 316 of 450

FOR ATATIONIO

encyency Ey Eyyy ee

s INFORMATION

ff--fff DesigDes GuardianGuardian

r comparar compara

afetyafety; a di; a d

oration.oration.

ucts.cts.

ONLYh hose forh hose fo

s a fixed ea fixed emoved formoved for


22 4000– 3

4. Eyewash/Drench Hose Unit:

a. Capacity: Not less than 3.2 gpm for at least 15 minutes.

b. Supply Piping: NPS 3/8.

c. Activation: Squeeze valve with lever handle.

d. Spray-Head Assembly: Two spray heads.

SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated-brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet connection matching supply piping.

E. Risers: ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel, flexible hose riser.

EXECUTION

PRE-INSTALLATION EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation.

B. Examine walls, floors, cabinets, and counters for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.

C. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install counter-mounted fixtures in and attached to casework.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 317 of 450

FORponpon

h potablh potab

rd: ASMrd: ASM

ngINFORMATION

: Chrom: Chriping sizeping size

platedplated--brbn matchinmatchin

dedded-- or coor co

ONLYdrainage drainage

ns before s before

conditon


22 4000– 4

C. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water- distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

1. Exception: Use ball valve if supply stops are not specified with fixture.

CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

B. Comply with requirements for water piping specified in Section 22 1116, "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Comply with requirements for soil and waste drainage piping and vent piping specified in Section 22 1316, "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."


A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.

B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings and other specified components.

C. Adjusting: Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning plumbing fixtures, fittings, and controls.

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation.


A. After installing plumbing fixtures, inspect installed fixtures for damage and repair damaged finishes or components.

B. Clean plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 318 of 450

FOR

mestmest

mplyy with rwith ryed in Sected in Sec

INFORMATION

CONTROCONTR

ed plumbied plumbilled.ed

res are cos are co

cets and cets and tings, and ngs, and

are presse pressONLYxtures for tures for


22 6213– 1

SECTION 22 6213

VACUUM PIPING SYSTEM FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Laboratory vacuum piping designated “vacuum.”

SUBMITTALS



QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. ASME Compliance:

1. Vacuum piping shall be fabricated, assembled, inspected, and tested in accordance with ASME B31.3, “Process Piping.”

B. Piping and fittings shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name, size of the fitting, alloy composition, and appropriate production code. Piping and fittings shall be of the same manufacturer.

COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of vacuum piping with HVAC ducting and water piping.

PRODUCTS

PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A312, Type 304L, up to 2-1/2”, for vacuum service to 1 ATM external pressure and pressure service up to 150 psig.

B. Fittings: Stainless steel pressure-seal fittings, with EPDM sealing elements, for vacuum service and pressure service up to 150 psig, and a 0 to 200°F temperature rating. Pressure-seal piping system shall be Propress by Viega.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 319 of 450

FOR tion In Incluncl

INFORMATION

For each tFor each t

l reports.eports

icated, asscated, ass“Process “Process

manufmanuONLY

factufactuction cotion co


22 6213– 2

C. Joints: Propress as manufactured by Viega, or Engineer approved equal.

D. Threaded joints in laboratory vacuum distribution piping shall be limited to connections to pressure/vacuum indicators, instrument gauges, and source equipment. All threads shall be tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose, and be made up with polytetrafluorethylene (PTFE) (such as TeflonTM) tape or other thread sealant recommended for oxygen service, with the sealant applied to the male threads only.

a. Mechanically formed, drilled and extruded tee-branch connections shall not be permitted.

JOINING MATERIALS

A. Threaded-Joint Tape: PTFE.

VALVES

A. General Requirements for Valves:

B. Stainless Steel Ball Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the available manufacturer(s):

a. Propress as manufactured by Viega, or Engineer approved equal.

2. Description: Three-piece body, 316 Stainless Steel.

3. Pressure Rating: 200 psig minimum/vacuum.

4. Ball: Full-port, stainless steel.

5. Seats: PTFE.

6. Handle: Lever type with locking device.

7. Stem: Blowout proof with PTFE seal.

8. Ends: Viega ProPress press connection.

C. Stainless Steel Diaphragm Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Saunders (Crane ChemPharma & Energy)

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 320 of 450

FOR MATMAT

adedde -JoinJoin

INFORMATION

ements foements fo

Valves:lves:

ubject to cject to cable manuble manu

ctured byctured byy

316 Stain16 Stai

vacuacONLYumum.


22 6213– 3

b. Hills-McCanna, LLC

2. Description: Stainless steel body, weir-type valve, neoprene diaphragm.

3. Pressure Rating: 200 psig for sizes less than 2-1/2”, 120 psig for sizes up to 6”

4. Handle: Rising handwheel indicating.

5. Ends: Flanged, ANSI 125/150

EXECUTION

PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of vacuum piping. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Comply with ASME B31.3 for installation of vacuum piping.

C. Install piping Propress connections in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Cut stainless steel piping only with an approved stainless steel pipe cutting tool. The piping must be fully inserted into the fitting and the piping marked to verify insertion depth. The joints must be pressed using tools approved by the manufacturer.

D. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

G. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

H. Install vacuum piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow.

I. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than piping pressure rating used in applications specified in “Piping Schedule” Article unless otherwise indicated.

J. Install eccentric reducers, if available, where vacuum piping is reduced in direction of flow, with bottoms of both pipes and reducer fitting flush.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 321 of 450

FOR

TT

wing planng plaement of vement of

e approe approINFORMATION

vedve

ASME B3SME B3

ess connecconnecs. Cut stain. Cut sta

e piping mpiping mrtion depthtion depth

nd protectnd protecticated andcated an

ONLYin equipmin equipDiagonal ragonal

pace


22 6213– 4

K. Provide drain leg and drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points.

L. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

M. Install piping free of sags and bends.

N. Install fittings for changes in direction and for branch connections.

O. Connect vacuum piping to equipment requiring vacuum service or cap for future connection(s).

P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22, Section 22 0517, “Sleeves and Sleeve Schedules for Plumbing Piping.”

Q. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22, Section 22 0518, “Escutcheons for Piping.”

VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install shutoff valve at each connection to and from vacuum equipment and specialties.

JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside of cleaned piping and fittings before assembly. Wipe ends clean and dry.

C. Check fitting to ensure that sealing element is properly seated.

D. Threaded Joints: Apply appropriate tape to external pipe threads.

E. Flanged Joints:

1. Join stainless steel piping to pressure-seal flanges using tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

2. Install Teflon™ gasket between flanges

3. Fasteners to be stainless steel Grade B8 bolts and Grade 8F nuts

4. Tighten fasteners in a crossing pattern and torque to 15-20 ft-lbs for flanges less than 2”, 20-30 ft.lbs for flanges up to 4”

F. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join stainless steel piping and fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 322 of 450

FOR

ve Sve S

all escutchescutchquiremenquiremen

ons foons fINFORMATION

r Pir Pi

TITIONON

at each coeach co

remove bremove b

m outside outside

ONLYoperly seperly s

pipe threape threa


22 6213– 5

HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 22, Section 22 0548, “Vibration and Seismic Controls for Piping and Equipment,” for seismic-restraint devices.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 22, Section 22 0529, “Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping,” for pipe hanger and support devices.

C. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

D. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

1. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel, clevis hangers.

2. Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable, roller hangers.

E. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. Comply with requirements in Division 22, Section 22 0529, “Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping,” for trapeze hangers.

F. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

G. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.

H. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch-minimum rods.

I. Install hangers for stainless steel pipe with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1/4: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: 72 inches with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.

3. NPS 3/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

4. NPS 1: 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch rod.

5. NPS 1-1/4: 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch rod.

6. NPS 1-1/2: 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch rod.

J. Install supports for vertical stainless piping every 10 feet.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 323 of 450

FORLongLong

e, StraighStraigSupSuINFORMATION

port pport 0529, “H0529, “H

g: MSS Tg: MSS T

within 12 iithin 12

e size fore size for

h the folloh the foll

ONLY(10(10-mm) mm


22 6213– 6

IDENTIFICATION

A. Install identifying labels and devices for laboratory vacuum piping, valves, andspecialties. Comply with requirements in Division 22, Section 22 0553, “Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.”

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR LABORATORY FACILITY VACUUM PIPING

A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Piping Leak Tests for Vacuum Piping: Test new and modified parts of existing piping. Cap and fill vacuum piping with oil-free, dry nitrogen. Isolate test source and let stand for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required, to test pressure; hold for two hours with no drop in pressure.

a. Test Pressure for Stainless Piping: 150 psig.

2. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

B. Remove and replace components that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.

PROTECTION

A. Protect piping from damage.

B. Retain sealing plugs in piping, fittings, and specialties until installation.

C. Clean piping not properly sealed

PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges may be used where connection to flanged equipment is required.

B. Laboratory Vacuum Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range:

1. NPS 3 and Smaller: Stainless steel piping, ASTM A312, TP 304L

VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Shutoff Valves: Stainless steel diaphragm valves as specified in “Valves” article; valves to match line size unless specified other.

END OF SECTION

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 324 of 450

FOR

IsIsRefiRefiin presin pres

INFORMATION

estes

eaks and reaks and r

componenomponen

and speciand spec

ONLYment is rment is r


23 0700– 1

SECTION 23 0700

HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, supply air.





ASTM A240/A240M Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

ASTM B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

ASTM C195 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement

ASTM C553 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications

ASTM C1136 Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation

ASTM C1290 Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 325 of 450

FORDD

and genergenedd DivisioDivisio

ummINFORMATION


herwise inerwise i

ASTM)ASTM)

StandarStandaChromiumhromium

p for Presfor Presationsations

ecificatioecificatioyy SSyy ONLY

heet heet

on for Minon for Mi

Mineraine


23 0700– 2

B. Department of Defense Index of Specifications and Standards (DODISS)

MIL-A-3316C Adhesives, Fire-Resistant, Thermal Insulation

C. Federal Codes and Regulations (CFR)


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermalconductivity, water-vapor permeance, thickness, and jackets (both factory andfield applied if any).

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed anapprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by theDepartment of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, asdetermined by testing identical products according to ASTM E84, UL listed. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, tapes, and cementmaterial containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, andsmoke-developed index of 50 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturerwith appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum usetemperature.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 326 of 450

FOR

appapp

lificationication

URAURANNINFORMATION

CECE

fications:ications:ogramogram oror

r BureauBureau

ristics:stics: Fcalcal producprodu

acket mateacket mateiateate markimark

ameme-spsprreaes ONLYmarkedarked byb

grade,grade, anan


23 0700– 3

B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C553, Type II and ASTM C1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.

b. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap.

c. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C195.


a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Super-Stik.

2.3 ADHESIVES


B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.




c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a businessof H. B. Fuller Company; 85-60/85-70.



RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 327 of 450

FORTINGTING CC

all-FiberFiber InIn

INFORMATION

ts:ts: SubSuby be incorbe incor

nsulation,nsulation

h insulatioinsulationdd toto surfasurf

A--333ONLY16C,16C,

uirireements,mentse butbut arere


23 0700– 4

2.4 SEALANTS

A. FSK Flashing Sealants:









5. Color: Aluminum.


2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on variousapplications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with thefollowing:

1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with Kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II.

2.6 TAPES

A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket withacrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C1136.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 328 of 450

FORcc

d.d MM

INFORMATION

alsals shash les.es

er--resr iistansta

re Range:Range

lantsants shalshalngg to 4040 C

ONLYd jacketsjacketsd,d, coompmpll


23 0700– 5

a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK.



d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

2. Width: 3-in.

3. Thickness: 6.5 mils



6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

2.7 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.

b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015-in. thick, 3/4-in. wide with wing seal or closed seal.

3. Aluminum: ASTM B209 Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; TemperH-14, 0.020- in. thick, 3/4-in. wide with wing seal or closed seal.

4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat andslotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer forapplication.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-in.-de, stainless steel orMonel.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 329 of 450

FOR ElongElon

ensileensile SINFORMATION

re

apeape DiDiskssks

mpliancempliancentoto thehe WW

GerrardGerrard StSt

ONLYtrappingrapping

304 or T304 or T


23 0700– 6

C. Wire: 0.062-in. soft-annealed, stainless steel.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, availablemanufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Workinclude, but are not limited to, the following:

a. C & F Wire.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements forinstallation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulationapplication.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have beencorrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Removematerials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials as specified in duct insulation schedule.

B. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to duct.

C. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

D. Bond insulation seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulationmaterial manufacturer.

E. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

F. Apply adhesives and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate andwet and dry film thicknesses.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 330 of 450

FORllatat

plicationplication

VerifyVerify thth

ff INFORMATION

thatthat surs

ithith installinstall

d drydry surfsurft insulatioinsulatio

ENTSNTS

ct insinONLYulatiulati

vicesvices too d

ishing.ishing.

d


23 0700– 7

G. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-in. strips of same material asinsulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinchingstaples along both edges of strip, spaced 4-in. o.c.

3. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of duct.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape according to insulation materialmanufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (that are notfire rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

3.5 DUCT INSULATION SC

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, supply air.

B. Items not Insulated:

1. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.

3.6 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Rectangular and round, supply air duct insulation shall be:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2-in. thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 331 of 450

FORTIOTIO

lationio InIned): Instaed): Inst

OOINFORMATION

N SCN SC

ts Requirits Requiri

air.air

ducts.ucts.

TION SCTION SC

ation ionONLY

shalhal

55-lb/cu. ftlb/cu. f


23 3113– 1

SECTION 23 3113

METAL DUCTS

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section includes the following for ducting specified to SMACNA standards:

2. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.

3. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.

4. Sheet metal materials.

5. Sealants and gaskets.


1. Section 23 3300, “Air Duct Accessories,” for dampers, sound-control devices, duct- mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

2. Section 20 0700, “Mechanical Insulation,” for indoor supply duct insulation.




A. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

ASHRAE 62.1 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)/Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Energy Standard for Building Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 332 of 450

FOR SheeShee

ealants ealantsINFORMATION

ns:ns:

3300, “Air0, “Amounting mounting

hanical Inhanical In

TANDARTANDAR

cludincludiONLY

g Gg Gyy to thisto thisyy

m part of tm part of hose curreose curre


23 3113– 2


ASTM A36/A36M Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

ASTM A653/A653M Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Valvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A1008/A1008M Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable


D. National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA)

NADCA ACR The Standards for the Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems

E. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTLs)

F. Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA)

G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 723 Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Sealants and gaskets.


QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 -“Systems and Equipment,” and Section 7 - “Construction and System Start-up.”

B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - “HVAC System Construction and Insulation.”

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 333 of 450

FOR TM C92TM C92

Air Dur INFORMATION

ct Cct C

Testing LaTesting L

ing Contring Contr

for Test foor Test cs of Bus of BuONLYs:


23 3113– 3


Not used.


A. Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, and reinforcements shall comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible” and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in “Duct Schedule” Article.

B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the supply airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

PRODUCTS

SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible” based on scheduled static-pressure class.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,” Figure 2-1, “Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints,” for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.”

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,” Figure 2-2, “Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams,” for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.”

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,” Chapter 4, “Fittings and Other Construction,” for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.”

SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,” Chapter 3, “Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct,” based on specified static-pressure class.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 334 of 450

FORUCTSUCTS

LL RECLL REC

INFORMATION

cation Rcation Rtandards andards

ct joint tyct joint typpyyyn StandarStandar

e Joints,” e Joints,”d, ductd, duc - susu

uction Staction St

and fabricnd fabrtal and Fal and

tat ONLY

eicc--prespreupport inteupport int

on Standaon Stand

er D


23 3113– 4

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Lindab®19 Inc.

b. McGill AirFlow LLC.

c. SEMCO®20 Incorporated.

d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.

e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,” Figure 3-1, “Round Duct Transverse Joints,” for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.”

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,” Figure 3-2, “Round Duct Longitudinal Seams,” for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.”

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,” Figure 3-5, “90 Degree Tees and Laterals,” and Figure 3-6, “Conical Tees,” for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.”

SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible” for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.

19 Lindab is a registered trademark of Lindab AB, Bastad, Sweden.20 SEMCO is a registered trademark of Semco LLC, Columbia, Missouri.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 335 of 450

FOR ansverseansverseVAC DuctC Du

ransverseransversinvolvinvolINFORMATION

ed, edConstruConstru

ms: Selectms: Selectuction Stction St

ms,” for stams,” for stavolved, duolved, du

onstructionstructio

fabricatefabricatand Flexibnd Flex

Tees,” forTees,” foructuc --suppsup

t ONLY

poruction Sction

“H


23 3113– 5

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A1008/A1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.

D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-in. minimum diameter for lengths 36-in. or less, 3/8-in. minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36-in.

SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 4-in.

3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.

4. Water-resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-in. wg, positive and negative.

7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.

8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum.

10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 336 of 450

FOR

ral ral lants andlants andimum smmum sm

d bd by y an Nan N

INFORMATION

e Sealinge Sealin

ven cottonven cottonne activatactivat

seal.seal.

crycrylic.lic.

ONLY, positive positive


23 3113– 6

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.

4. Water-resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).

7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-in. wg, positive and negative.

8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.

2. Type: S.

3. Grade: NS.

4. Class: 25.

5. Use: O.

6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

EXECUTION

DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss and for other design considerations.

Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved by Construction Field Lead.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 337 of 450

FOR SubSubare),bare

Joint Seoint SINFORMATION

al

al: Singlel: Single

hall have ahall have CFR CFRONLY

59, 59,

olyolymer wmer yyy


23 3113– 7

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible” unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1-in., plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1 1/2-in.

J. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA’s “IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction,” Appendix G, “Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines.”

INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from dents, scratches, or damages.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

D. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,” Chapter 5, “Hangers and Supports.” and design drawings.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 338 of 450

FORll dll d

d permand perman

ducts witducts wit

INFORMATION

ass throass throview, covview, cov

eet metal feet metal es by at leby at le

moisturemoistureith SMACith SMA

AppendixAppendix

RKRK

dedeONLYnts, scrnts, sc

oth and unh and un

nge


23 3113– 8

B. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,” Table 5-1, “Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size,” and Table 5-2, “Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct,” for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24-in. of each elbow and within 48-in. of each branch intersection.

C. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at maximum intervals of 16 feet.

CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible” for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

B. Connect ducts to air terminal units per manufacturer’s instructions.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.

2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according to “Vacuum Test” in NADCA ACR, “Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems.”

a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

C. Duct system is defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Submit test and inspection reports.

DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

1. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.

B. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuum collection system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 339 of 450

FOR ible”ible”

nect ducts ct ducts

TY COY CINFORMATION

ONTONT

nd inspectnd inspect

ness Testess Test

uct syt systemstem

sysystem, cstem, uum Test”um Test

AC SystemAC Syst

NeN ONLYt weighweig.75 mg/1075 mg/

nspectionsspection


23 3113– 9

2. When venting vacuum collection system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.

C. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

2. Exhaust-air ducts, dampers, actuators.

3. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators.

D. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that operating continuously during cleaning. While cleaning, connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas are under negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer’s written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.

DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate supply and exhaust ducts designated as SMACNA ducting with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:

B. Supply Ducts:

1. Pressure Class: Positive 2-in. wg.

2. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.

3. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24.

4. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 12.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 340 of 450

FORCleCcontamcontambuilding.building

INFORMATION

cuumcuum-cg. While cg. While

ns so areans so area

agitation agitation amaging inmaging i

Coatings: Coatingspplyply antim antimyy

ns after rens after

ONLYACNA duACNA das followas follow


23 3113– 10

C. Exhaust Ducts:

a. Pressure Class: Negative 6-in. wg.

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.

2. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6.

3. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 3.

D. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.

E. Insulation:

1. For interior supply ducts, comply with requirements in Section 23 0700, “HVAC Insulation.”

F. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,” Figure 4-6, “Branch Connection.”

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.

b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.

2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,” Figure 3-5, “90 Degree Tees and Laterals,” and Figure 3-6, “Conical Tees.” Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.

c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 341 of 450

FOR lationlation

For For inteinte“HVAC HVACINFORMATION

guration:guration:

r Duct: Cor Duct: Cetal and Ftal and F

Main tMain to Ro

n to Roundn to Round

MACNA’sACNA’Figure 3-Figure 3-

Tees.” Tees.”ONLY

Sa

ree tap. ree tap.


23 3300– 1

SECTION 23 3300

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section includes the following for installation in ducting specified to SMACNA standards:

1. Manual volume dampers.

2. Flexible ducts.

3. Duct accessory hardware.





AMCA 500-D Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

ASHRA/IESNA 90.1 Energy Standard for Building Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings


ASTM A653/A653M Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Valvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

E. Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA)

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 342 of 450

FOR Duct aDuct

CUMECUMEINFORMATION

NN

provisionprovision01 Specif01 Specif

others refothers re Referen Refere

cated.cated.

itute (ANute (AN

ry MethodMethoy

andnd AONLY

Air-Air CC

uilding Exlding Ex


23 3300– 2


UL 181 Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


Not used.


Not used.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, “Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.”

B. Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible” for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.

2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts.

C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-in. minimum diameter for lengths 36-in. or less; 3/8-in. minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36-in.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 343 of 450

FOR STORAGSTORA

INFORMATION

nstallationnstallati

Duct ConDuct Conerial thickerial thick

t metal mt metal mns, ans,ONLY

nd otnd ot

53M.53M


23 3300– 3

2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Low-Leakage, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on drawings or by one of the following:

a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.

b. McGill AirFlow LLC.

c. Nailor®21 Industries Inc.

d. Pottorff.

e. Ruskin®22 Company.

2. Comply with AMCA®23 500-D testing for damper rating.

3. Low-leakage rating and bearing AMCA’s Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.

4. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

5. Frames:

a. Rectangular:

i. Galvanized sheet steel.

ii. Mitered and welded corners.

iii. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

b. Round:

i. Galvanized sheet steel.

ii. Roll formed.

iii. Minimum rating of 4-in. wg.

21 Nailor is a registered trademark of Nailor Industries of Texas, Inc., Houston, Texas.22 Ruskin is a registered trademark of Ruskin Company, Grandview, Missouri.23 AMCA is a registered trademark of Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc., Arlington Heights, Illinois.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 344 of 450

FOR e.e

omplyomply wyINFORMATION

i

akage ratiakage ratmance andmance and

rizontal orrizontal o

t steel. t steel.

cornersornersONLYalls and flalls and


23 3300– 4

6. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.

b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.

c. Reinforced damper blades for stability.

d. Galvanized.

7. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel or stainless steel.

8. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze.

b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-in. wg or less shall have axle’s full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

9. Blade Seals: Neoprene, closed cell.

10. Jamb Seals: Cambered stainless steel.

11. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

12. Accessories:

a. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration.

b. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

13. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly.

2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Flexmaster U.S.A.®24, Inc.

2. JP Lamborn Co.

3. Hart & Cooley, Inc.

24 Flelxmaster U.S.A. is a registered trademark of Masterduct Holding, Inc., Houston, Texas.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 345 of 450

FOR

aa

b.bhh

INFORMATION

f opf op

eals: Neopeals: Neop

Camberedmbered

kets: Galvts: Ga

e to hold se to hold n

insunsuONLYated dated

uired to coired to co


23 3300– 5

B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 4-in. w.g. positive and 0.5-in. wg negative.

2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F.

4. Insulation R-Value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

C. Flexible Duct Connectors:

1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18-in., to suit duct size.

2.5 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or stainless steel to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible” for metal ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel.

C. Install volume dampers at points on supply and return systems where branches extend from larger ducts when locations are not indicated on drawings.

D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. Connect diffusers to supply ducts with maximum 60-in. lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

F. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.

G. Install instrument test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 346 of 450

FOR ClaClaband wband

SORYSORYINFORMATION

HAHA

t Holes: CHoles: Csket. Sizeket. Size

ength to sugth to su

quick setuick set

le dee dONLYtails tails

e” for me” for m

terials; userials; us


23 3300– 6


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 347 of 450

INFORMATION ONLY


23 3713– 1

SECTION 23 3713

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK


1. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers.

2. Perforated diffusers.

3. Fixed face registers and grilles.


1. Section 23 3300, “Air Duct Accessories,” for volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, mounting details, and performance data.

2. Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished based on equipment schedule.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Not used.


Not used.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 348 of 450

FOR FiF

ted Sectiod Sectio

ction io INFORMATION

23 323 3l to difful to diff

TSTS/COD/COD

ns of the Cs of the Ction Sectioon Sectio

ct indicateindicat

onstructnstructONLYn, quantityquantit

ment schement sch


23 3713– 2

1. Krueger.

2. Price Industries.

3. Titus®25.

B. Provide Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers as indicated in the Equipment Schedules. Provide Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers with border styles compatible with the ceiling or wall system specified in design drawings.

C. Performance: Provide Grilles, Registers and Diffusers that have airflow, pressure drop, noise criteria rating, and throw for each type and size indicated, according to manufacturer’s published data.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Match final locations, as close as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify HVAC Engineer for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts, and to allow service and maintenance of dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed by vent and balance, before starting air balancing.


25 Titus is a registered trademark of Titus International Ltd., Uxbridge, Middlesex, United Kingdom.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 349 of 450

FORUTIONUTIO

TIONION

reasea INFORMATION

wherewherith requireth require

mance of eance of

on onlyon only aayy

illes leveles level

rawings irawings it and inlett and inle

me, noime, noONLY

se cas closeas closee center oe center o

tallation, nllation, n


26 0519 – 1

SECTION 26 0519

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section includes:

1. Building wire (600 V).

2. TC cable (2000V and 600V).

3. Wire and cable connectors.

4. Insulating tape and tubing.

5. Wire pulling lubricant.

6. Category 5e Cable.

B. Related Requirements

1. See Section 23 8126, “Split-System Air-Conditioners (VRF),” for associated control cables and conductors.

2. See Section 28 0513, “Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security, for cables and conductors for fire alarm.





ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B-2 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard


ASTM B3 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 350 of 450

FOR WireWire

nsulatinsulatinINFORMATION

ulling lubulling lub

Cable.able.

SplitSplit--SySysand condud cond

tors and Cors and Crs for fire rs for fire

A ONLYRDSDS

General aGeneral

f t


26 0519 – 2

ASTM D3005 Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

IEEE Std 422 IEEE Guide for the Design and Installation of Cable Systems in Power Generating Stations

IEEE Std 1210 Standard Tests for Determining Compatibility of Cable-Pulling Lubricants with Wire and Cable

D. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)

NECA 1 Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction


NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)

F. National Electrical Testing Association (NETA)

NETA ATS Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems

G. Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL)

UL 44 Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 486A-486B Wire Connectors

UL 486C Splicing Wire Connectors

UL 486D Sealed Wire Connector Systems

UL 510 Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape

UL 1685 Vertical-Tray Fire-Propagation and Smoke-Release Test for Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 351 of 450

FOR ECA 1ECA 1

Fire PrFire PINFORMATION

otecote

Testing Assting As

StandStandElectricaElectrica

et--InsulateInsulat

InsunsuONLYatedated


26 0519 – 3

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following records in accordance with the provisions of the contract documents.

1. Field Test Records:

a. Inspections and tests required in Field Quality Control.


A. Comply with the NEC for components and installation.

B. Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application and environment in which installed.

C. The most recent edition of any relevant regulation, standard, document, or code shall be in effect, unless otherwise noted.


A. Receive, store, and protect, and handle products according to NECA 1.

PRODUCTS

PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Refer to contract documents.

BUILDING WIRE

A. Provide NRTL-listed building wire as shown on the Drawings with the following characteristics:

1. Description: Single conductor 600 V, 90°C insulated wire.

2. Conductor:

a. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: 98% conductivity, annealed, uncoated copper, ASTM B3, solid or stranded as specified in Part 3 of this Section.

3. Insulation: The following types, rated 600 volts:

a. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: 1 AWG and smaller, Type THHN/THWN-2 per UL 83.

b. 1/0 AWG and larger, Type XHHW or THWN-2 per UL 44 or UL 83.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 352 of 450

FOR

de deborboratoryatory

ost recentost recenn effecn effecINFORMATION

uu

AGE, AGE, ANN

protect, antect, an

ITUTIOITUTIO

ONLYthe Drawhe Draw

ulated wirulated wir


26 0519 – 4

B. Color code conductors as follows:

1. Use colored insulation for color coding conductors 6 AWG and smaller.

2. Use water- and oil-resistant colored plastic adhesive tape, 3/4-in. minimum width, for color coding conductor 4 AWG and larger. Manufacturer: 3M®26 “Scotch® 35.”

3. Provide black conductor insulation where colored tape is used for color coding.

4. Use the following color codes for AC power system conductors:

Conductor Color CodesSystem Voltage:

Conductor:

480Y/277V 208Y/120V 120/240V

Phase A: Red Black BlackPhase B: Yellow Purple BrownPhase C: Blue Brown ---Grounded (Neutral):

White/Gray White/Gray White/Gray

Equipment Grounding:

Green Green Green

Isolated Ground:

Green/Yellow Green/Yellow Green/Yellow

Switched: Purple Pink Blue

1. Use the following color codes for DC power system conductors:

Positive: RedNegative: Black

WIRING CONNECTORS

A. For splices and taps on copper wire, sizes 8 AWG and smaller, use push-on, insulated, spring type connectors, rated 600 V and 105°C that are NRTL-listed to UL 486C and provide a means of visual inspection of the connection. Manufacturer: IDEAL®27 “In-Sure®3.”

B. For splices and taps on copper wire, sizes 6 AWG through 1 AWG, use the following materials:

1. Tin-plated copper split-bolt connectors that meet the requirements in UL 486A-486B; provide with matching 600V snap-on insulating cover.

26 3M and Scotch are trademarks or registered trademarks of 3M Company Corporation, St. Paul, Minnesota.27 IDEAL and In-Sure are registered trademarks of IDEAL Industries, Inc., Sycamore, Illinois.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 353 of 450

FOR tem Voltem Vol

tor:tor:

FR

INFORMATION

IN YYININININBluBlu

NNNFNWhite/Graite/GrFOR

enen

ORRRRMGreGre

MMMAMPinkPink

TIIODC poweC poweONLY


26 0519 – 5

Manufacturer: FCI Burndy “Type KSA” with “Type SC” insulating cover.

2. Multi-tap connectors that meet the requirements of UL 486A-486B that have two or more range-taking mechanical lugs and matching 600V insulated cover. Manufacturers: Burndy ‘POLYTAP” or “UNITAP,” Ilsco “Type PCT,” Blackburn “AMT.”

C. For copper wire, sizes 1/0 AWG and larger, use UL 486A-486B listed circumferential or hexagonal crimp compression terminals, splices, or adapters.

1. Provide compression terminals and splices made from electro-tin plated seamless copper tubing and marked with wire size, die index/color code, and number/locations of crimps. Manufacturers: FCI Burndy Types “YA,” “YA-L,” “YA-L-NT,” “YS,” and “YC-C”; Thomas & Betts “Color-Keyed.”

2. Provide straight and offset compression adapters made from electro-tin plated aluminum, NRTL listed for use on copper conductors, and marked with wire size, die index / color code, and number / locations of crimps. Each adapter shall include a 600V, 90°C rated insulating cover. Manufacturer: FCI Burndy Types “AYP” and “AYPO.”

3. Range-taking, die-less, or indenter-applied terminals are not acceptable for control wiring. Use nylon insulated crimp-on terminals with insulation grip that meet the requirements of UL 486A-486B. Manufacturers: 3M “Scotchlok MNG,” Thomas & Betts “Sta-Kon.”

4. Use ring tongue terminals for nutted studs.

5. Use flanged fork terminals for barrier terminal blocks.

D. Insulation-piercing type connectors are not acceptable for power or control wiring.

INSULATING TAPE AND TUBING

A. Insulate taped splices and connections using ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) tape that meets the requirements of UL 510 and is rated for 90°C continuous operation and 130°C short-term overload service. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch 130C.”

B. For the outer covering of tape-insulated splices and connections use vinyl plastic tape that meets the requirements of UL 510 and has the following characteristics:

1. 8.5 mil minimum thickness.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 354 of 450

anan“YAYA“Color“Color

ovideidINFORMATION

straistraialuminumaluminum

e size, die size, dieer shall incer shall in

FCI BurnFCI Bur

ess, or indss, or indyllon insulaon insula

ments of Uents of Umas & Bemas & Be

ed studs. ed studs.

ONLYminal blminal bl

le for powle for po


26 0519 – 6

2. ASTM D3005, Rated 600V and 105°C, suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

3. Retains flexibility, adhesion, and applicable at temperature ranges from 0 through 100°F without loss of physical or electrical properties.

4. Resistant to abrasion, moisture, alkalis, acid, corrosion, and sunlight.

5. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch Super 88.”

C. Provide heat-shrinkable tubing that meets the requirements of UL 486D and has the following characteristics:

1. Rated 600 volts.

2. Factory applied adhesive/sealant.

3. Split resistant.

4. Manufacturer: 3M “ITCSN.”

D. Use motor lead splicing kits to insulate and seal connections to leads for motors rated 480V and less. Manufacturer: 3M “5300 Series.”

WIRE PULLING LUBRICANT

A. Provide NRTL-listed, wire-pulling lubricant that is compatible with the conductor insulation or jacket, has a maximum coefficient of dynamic friction of 0.25, and leaves no flammable residue. For cold weather installations, provide wire-pulling lubricant suitable for conduit temperature.

B. Compatibility with conductor insulation shall be determined in accordance with IEEE Std 1210.

C. Manufacturer:

1. For conduit temperature above freezing: American Polywater Corporation, “Polywater®28” “Lubricant J.”

2. For conduit temperature below freezing: American Polywater Corporation, “Polywater” “Lubricant WJ.”

CATEGORY 5E CABLE

A. Provide NRTL-listed Category 5e as defined by ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B2 for local area network use.

28 Polywater is a registered trademark of American Polywater Corporation, Stillwater, Minnesota.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 355 of 450

FOR

RR

FactorFactor

plit resiplit resINFORMATION

stasta

acturer: 3cturer: 3

cing kits tog kits toManufactuManufactu

g lubricanlubricancoefficiencoefficien

weather ineather

ONLYdetermindetermi


26 0519 – 7

B. Cable shall contain 4 twisted pair, #24 or #26 AWG wires.

C. Cable shall be rated for use in raceway system as well as plenum rated.

POWER METERING DATA LOGGER CABLE

A. Provide NRTL listed cable compliant with UL 1685. Size and configuration as shown on the Drawings.

EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

A. Verify interior of building has been protected from weather.

B. Verify that work of other trades likely to damage wire and cable is completed.

C. Verify raceway installation is complete and supported.

D. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned.

1. Route wire and cable as required meeting project conditions.

2. Where cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required to meet project conditions.

PREPARATION

A. Examine raceways and building finishes that are to receive wires and cables for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire to remove debris that may cause damage to cables during cable pulls. Do not handle or pull cables that are colder than +14°F.

C. Install building wire according to the NEC, the requirements in this Section, and the following NECA installation standards as applicable:

1. NECA 1.

D. Do not damage conductor, insulation, or jacket by excessive installation pulling tension or sidewall bearing pressure. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for pulling tensions on cables.

1. Calculate expected cable-pulling tension and sidewall-bearing pressures for each set of conductors being pulled into a conduit run where any of the following combinations of bends and raceway length is exceeded between accessible pull points:

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 356 of 450

FOR

yy iniyy

ify that wthat wy

cewayceway iyINFORMATION

ns

e routing se routing s

and cable cable

ng is not ng is noing and leing and

es that arees that arend other cnd other c

ave bee bONLY

en cen c

installing installingDo not hao not ha

i


26 0519 – 8

a. 4 equivalent 90-degree bends and 10 feet of raceway.

b. 3 equivalent 90-degree bends and 50 feet of raceway.

2. For cable-pulling tension and sidewall-bearing pressure calculations use formulas and factors described in IEEE Std 422.

3. Obtain recommended maximum conductor or cable-pulling tension and sidewall-bearing pressure values from the manufacturer, or use the following maximum allowable values:

a. Maximum sidewall bearing pressure: 500 lb/ft.

b. Maximum tension, pulling directly on conductor: 0.008 lb/cmil

c. Maximum tension, pulling on basket grip over insulation jacket: 2000 lb, not to exceed 0.008 lb/cmil of conductor.

E. Use solid copper conductors for power circuits 10 AWG and smaller except use stranded conductors in flexible conduits.

F. Use stranded conductors for power circuits 8 AWG and larger.

G. Use copper conductors not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting branch circuits.

H. Use stranded copper conductors not smaller than 14 AWG for 120V control circuits.

I. Do not “through-pull” conductors at boxes, fittings, or cabinets where a change of raceway alignment occurs.

J. Install wiring at outlets with at least 6-in. of slack conductor at each outlet.

CONNECTOR INSTALLATION

A. Install conductors in terminals, splices, adapters, and connectors in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

B. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise above the conductor temperature.

C. Do not nick conductors when removing insulation.

D. Do not cut conductor strands to fit into connectors, splices, adapters, or terminals.

E. Make connections using clean connection surfaces. Wire brush conductors immediately before installing lugs, terminals, splices, or adapters.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 357 of 450

FORbb

c.c22

INFORMATION

per condper condctors in flctors in f

tors for pors for p

t smaller tmaller t

ot smallert smaller

, fittingsfittingsONLYconductoronductor


26 0519 – 9

F. Connect conductors 1/0 AWG and larger using compression terminals at the locations described below. Compression terminals shall be installed where there is adequate wire bending space to accommodate compression terminals. Select compression terminals suitable for the conductor sizes, materials, and termination point configurations. Install compression terminals using the manufacturer’s recommended dies and minimum 12-ton force compression tools.

1. Circuit breakers with frame size greater than 100 amperes that are NRTL listed for with compression terminals.

2. Safety switches and fused switches rated more than 100 amperes.

3. Transformers; refer to Section 26 2213, “Low-Voltage Distribution Transformers.”

4. Panelboards and similar service and distribution equipment.

5. Utilization equipment connections that are NRTL listed for with compression terminals.

G. For conductors sized 1/0 AWG and larger, and where compression lugs cannot be installed, connect using mechanical lugs, in the locations or conditions described below.

1. Connection points not NRTL-listed for either compression terminals or compression adapters.

2. Where there is insufficient wire bending space to accommodate either compression terminals or compression adapters.

H. Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals including; screws and bolts according to equipment manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer’s torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A-486B.

INSULATING TAPE AND TUBING INSTALLATION

A. Install insulating tape and tubing in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

B. Insulate splices and taps of irregular shapes with manufactured insulating covers or insulating tape built up to not less than 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 358 of 450

FOR TT

PanelbPanelb

ilizatiz INFORMATION

on eon eession teression te

ed 1/0 AWed 1/0 AWng mechang mechan

NRTLNRTL--lisl

e bendingbendinssion adapssion adap

d tod t ONLYo groungrounand terminand termin

ublished toblished r’s torque r’s torqu

to tightto tight


26 0519 – 10

1. Use rubber insulating tape in half-lapped layers to develop the basic insulation over splices and taps.

2. Use vinyl plastic tape in half-lapped layers to provide the outer protective covering over splices and taps.

SEPARATION OF LOW VOLTAGE AND POWER WIRING

A. Cables and conductors of Class 2 and Class 3 circuits shall not be placed in any cable, cable tray, compartment, enclosure, manhole, outlet box, device box, raceway, or similar fitting with conductors of electric light, power, Class I, non-power-limited fire alarm circuits, and medium-power network-powered broadband communications circuits unless permitted by the NEC.

CATEGORY 5E CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Install Category 5e cable according to the NEC and the manufacturer instructions.

B. Route S-LAN and H-LAN cables in concealed conduit from channel raceway or device box to above suspended ceiling. Cable shall extend to Ethernet switches for future S-LAN and H-LAN connection. Label cables with the jack identification that the cable serves.

C. Leave approximately 10 feet of slack cable for future connection to Ethernet switches or patch panels by others.

POWER METERING DATA LOGGER CABLE

A. Install cable in conduit from meter to data logger as shown on the Drawings.

IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 0553, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

B. Apply color coding tape on conductors at each termination, splice, junction, and pull box.


A. Observe conductors and cables during the installation process.

1. Reject and replace entire reels, rolls, or boxes containing conductors or cables with material or manufacturing defects.

2. Reject and replace cable or conductor segments that have been kinked, dented, or otherwise damaged during handling or installation.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 359 of 450

ORY 5E RY 5E

CategoryCategoryy

INFORMATION

and Hand H-LLbove suspbove susp

and Hnd H--LALAcable sercable ser

et of slact of slacthers.hers.

R CABLER CABL

ta logger aa logge

ONLY26 0553,26 0553

spli


26 0519 – 11

B. After installation of wires and cables and before electrical circuit is energized, show product capability and compliance with requirements and verify by documented inspections and tests.

C. Perform the following inspections:

1. Inspect conductors and cables for:

a. Freedom from material defect or physical damage,

b. Correct conductor size, material, and insulation type, and

c. Correct color coding and identification.

2. Inspect connections for:

a. Correct connector size and type according to the Specifications, and

b. The use of the correct compression dies and the correct number of crimps on compression connectors in accordance with the connector manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Perform the following tests:

1. Before connecting conductors to equipment, use a calibrated megohm meter in a 1-minute test to verify the insulation integrity of each feeder conductor and branch circuit conductor with respect to ground and other conductors in the same raceway.

a. Use 1,000 VDC to test conductors rated 600V and 2000V, and 500 VDC for conductors rated 300V or less.

b. Insulation resistances shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.

c. In the absence of manufacturer’s data, insulation resistances shall be greater than 100 megohms in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.

d. Values less than manufacturer’s published data or NETA ATS, Table 100.1, shall be investigated.

2. Prior to connecting conductors to equipment, test continuity to ensure proper circuit is identified to facilitate correct connection of each power circuit conductor and each control circuit conductor.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 360 of 450

FOR InspInsp

a.a CCaINFORMATION

dd

The use oThe use omps on comps on co

ector manor man

ts:

uctors to euctors to verifyverify thethey

conductorconductor

torsorONLYratedrated

0V or les0V or le

dance witance wi


26 0519 – 12

3. Test the equipment and wiring for continuity and unintentional grounds, and verify proper phase sequence and voltage at equipment served before attempt is made to operate equipment.

4. Measure and record the tightness of not less than 10% of each size and type of mechanical or bolted connection using a calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver. Additionally, verify proper crimping method, asapplicable.

a. Compare measured torque with torque recommended by the connector manufacturer or as shown in Attachment 1, “Recommended Tightening Torque per UL 486A-486B.”

b. If any connection is found to be less than 90% of the recommended torque, notify the Buyer’s Technical Representative and re-torque all bolted connections on the Project.

E. Remove and replace defective, incorrect, or improperly installed conductors and connectors. Re-inspect and re-test replacement conductors and connectors.

F. Verify inspections and tests required by other sections are completed before conductors may be energized.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 361 of 450

FORbb

nd red INFORMATION

placeplaceee-inspect-inspect

and tests and tests ergized.ergized.

ONLY


26 0519 - Att. 1 of 2

SECTION 26 0519 – ATTACHMENT 1

RECOMMENDED TIGHTENING TORQUE PER UL 486A-486B

Table 21 - Tightening torque for screwsConductor Size installed in

Connector

Tightening Torque, N•m (lbf-in)Slotted Head No. 10 and Larger* Hexagonal Head – External Drive

Socket WrenchSlot Width – 1.2mm (.047 in) or Less and Slot Length – 6.4mm

(1/4 in.) or less

Slot Width – Over 1.2mm(.047 in) or Slot Length – Over 6.4mm (1/4 in.) or

less

AWG or kcmil mm2 Split-Bolt

ConnectorsOther

Connectors

30 - 10 .05 - 5.3 2.3 (20) 4.0 (35) 9.0 (80) 8.5 (75)8 8.4 2.8 (25) 4.5 (40) 9.0 (80) 8.5 (75)

6 - 4 13.2 - 21.2 4.0 (35) 5.1 (45) 18.6 (165) 12.4 (110)3 26.7 4.0 (35) 5.6 (50) 31.1 (275) 16.9 (150)2 33.6 4.5 (40) 5.6 (50) 31.1 (275) 16.9 (150)1 42.4 - 5.6 (50) 31.1 (275) 16.9 (150)

1/0 - 2/0 53.5 - 67.4 - 5.6 (50) 43.5 (385) 20.3 (180)3/0 - 4/0 85.0 - 107.2 - 5.6 (50) 56.5 (500) 28.2 (250)250 - 350 127 - 177 - 5.6 (50) 73.4 (650) 36.7 (325)

400 203 - 5.6 (50) 93.2 (825) 36.7 (325)500 253 - 5.6 (50) 93.2 (825) 42.4 (375)

600 - 750 304 - 380 - 5.6 (50) 113.0 (1000) 42.4 (375)800 - 1000 406 - 508 - 5.6 (50) 124.3 (1100) 56.5 (500)

1250 - 2000 635 - 1000 - - 124.3 (1100) 67.8 (600)* For values of slot width or length not corresponding to those specified, select the largest torque value associated

with the conductor size. Slot width is the nominal design value. Slot length shall be measured at the bottom of the slot.

Table 22 - Tightening torque for slotted head screws smallerthan No. 10 intended for use with 8 AWG (8.4 mm2 ) or smaller conductors

Slot Length of Screw* Tightening Torque, N•m (lbf-in)Slot Width of Screw Smaller than 1.2mm

(.047 in.)

Slot Width of Screw 1.2mm (.047 in.) and larger**mm inch

Less than 4 Less than 5/32 0.79 (7) 1.0 (9)

4 5/32 0.79 (7) 1.4 (12)4.8 3/16 0.79 (7) 1.4 (12)5.6 7/32 0.79 (7) 1.4 (12)6.4 1/4 1.0 (9) 1.4 (12)7.1 9/32 - 1.7 (15)

Above 7.1 Above 9/32 - 2.3 (20)* For slot lengths of intermediate values, select torques pertaining to next

shorter slot length.Also see Table 21 for screws with multiple tightening means.Slot length shall be measured at the bottom of the slot.

** Slot width is the nominal design value

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 362 of 450

FOR F66FFFFOFOFOFOFOOOOO

-

OOORORR

ONw 1.2mmw 1.2m

er*

INFORMATION

--ININFNFFFFOFOFOFOFOOOOOORding to thoseng to thosedesign valuesign va

ws smallews small) or smalleor smal

n)n)OON

ONLYOOOO


26 0519 - Att. 2 of 2

Table 23 - Tightening torque for screws with recessed Allen or square drives

Socket Width Across Flats* Tightening Torque, N•m (lbf-in)mm inch

3.2 1/8 5.1 (45)4.0 5/32 11.3 (100)4.8 3/16 13.6 (120)5.6 7/32 16.9 (150)6.4 1/4 25.4 (225)7.9 5/16 33.9 (300)9.5 3/8 45.2 (400)12.7 1/2 56.6 (500)14.3 9/16 67.8 (600)

* See Table 21 for screws with multiple tightening means


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 363 of 450



26 0526 – 1

SECTION 26 0526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK


1. Connection to Main Grounding Electrode System.

2. Circuit and System Grounding.

3. Enclosure and Equipment Grounding System.

4. Utility Transformer Grounding System.





ASTM B8 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay Stranded Copper Conductors

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

IEEE 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System

IEEE 142 Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

IEEE 837 IEEE Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections used in Substation Grounding



RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 364 of 450

FOR EncloEncl

Utilitytility TrTyyINFORMATION

MENTS/CMENTS/C

isions of tons ofion.on.

rs referencs referenReferenceReference

cated.ated.

ificatiificatONLY

on fon fs

EE) EE)

ResistivesistP


26 0526 – 2

D. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)


E. National Electrical Testing Specifications (NETA)

NETA ATS Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems


UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment

UL 486A-486B Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors

UL 486C Splicing Wire Connectors

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Not used.



B. Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application and environment in which installed.



A. Receive, store, protect, and handle products according to NECA 1.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Alternate products may be accepted; follow contract documents.

2.2 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR

A. Provide bare stranded, soft temper copper cable that conforms to ASTM B8.

B. Provide grounding electrode conductor for separately derived systems and bond to building steel.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 365 of 450

FOR LL 486A 486A-

INFORMATION

ponents anponents a

labelabeled bed byyand envirand envi

lationtioONLY

, sta, sta

NECAEC


26 0526 – 3

2.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Provide NRTL-listed THHN/THWN insulated copper wire.

B. Use solid grounding conductors 10 AWG and smaller where not subject to vibration or repeated flexing.

C. Use stranded grounding conductors for 8 AWG and larger.

D. Use stranded grounding conductors in flexible conduit at motor connections.

E. Color code grounding conductors as follows:

1. Equipment ground:

a. Conductors 6 AWG and smaller: Green colored insulation.

b. Conductors 4 AWG and larger: Green colored insulation or black colored insulation with 3/4 in. wide band of water and oil-resistant green plastic adhesive tape.

2.4 GROUND PLATES

A. Provide ground plates designed for flush mounting in concrete structures as shown on the Drawings.

2.5 CONDUIT GROUNDING BUSHINGS

A. Provide NRTL-listed, galvanized malleable iron, 150°C rated insulated throat grounding bushings with lay-in type ground cable lugs.

B. Manufacturers: O-Z/Gedney®29 Type “BLG.”

2.6 EXOTHERMIC WELD GROUNDING CONNECTIONS

A. Provide molds and welding material for making exothermic weld connections.

B. In interior locations and in vaults, use low smoke emission type welding material.

C. Match mold and weld material-to-material types, shapes, and sizes to be joined.

D. Manufacturer: ERICO Cadweld.

2.7 COMPRESSION GROUNDING CONNECTIONS

A. Provide wrought copper connectors, terminals, taps, and splices for making irreversible compression grounding connections.

29 OZ/Gedney is a registered trademark of General Signal Corporation, New York, New York.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 366 of 450

FOR a.a

CCINFORMATION

oncolorecolorgreen plagreen pla

igned for igned fo

S

able iron,able ironnd cable lnd cable ONLYS

ic weldc w


26 0526 – 4

B. Furnish NRTL-listed grounding connectors that are suitable for direct burial and have been tested successfully according to the requirements of IEEE 837.

C. Provide connector manufacturer’s hydraulic compression tools and dies that match the connectors.

D. Match connector and die size to material shapes and conductor sizes to be joined.

E. Use two-hole heavy-duty compression lugs for bolted connections to ground bars, ground plates, and equipment ground pads.

F. Manufacturer: Burndy “Hyground®30.”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that work of other trades likely to damage grounding and bonding material has been completed.

B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

C. Grounding cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned.

1. Install and route cable as required meeting project conditions.

2. Where cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact locations, routing, and lengths required to meet project conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Examine equipment and building finishes that are to receive grounding and bonding material for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 GENERAL

A. Comply with the requirements of the NEC, this Section, and the Drawings.

B. Install grounding and bonding material according to manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

30 Hyground is a registered trademark of Hubbell Incorporated, Shelton, Connecticut.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 367 of 450

FORTIOTIO

ATIONION

at workat worINFORMATION

oopleted.pleted

measurememeasureme

ng shown og shown

e as requie as requi

shown, ashown, auting, anduting, and

ONLYto receiveto receive

erances anances anditions hditions h


26 0526 – 5

C. Use the following connection methods unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.

1. Use exothermic weld grounding connections for underground or concealed connections of dissimilar materials.

2. Use exothermic weld or compression grounding connections for underground or concealed connections of like materials.

3. Use exothermic weld, compression, or bolted grounding connections for accessible connections.

4. Make bolted connections using bolts, nuts, flat washers, and toothed lock washers suitable for the connector and the installation environment; acceptable materials include high strength silicon bronze and 18-8 alloy stainless steel.

5. Make irreversible bolted connections using 18-8 alloy stainless steel tamper-resistant bolts and tamper-resistant nuts along with flat washers, and toothed lock washers. Tamper-resistant nuts and bolts must resist loosening with common tools; acceptable tamper-resistant fasteners include penta-head, break-away, and oval designs.

D. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with torque tightening values specified in Section 26 0519, Attachment 1, “Recommended Tightening Torque per UL 486A-486B.” Use a calibrated torque wrench.

E. Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Follow connector manufacturer’s installation instructions and use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of the connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed.

F. Install exothermic welds in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

G. Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity and make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 368 of 450

FOR

wwacceaccestainlestainle

ake ire INFORMATION

evereve--resistanresistanhed lock wd lock w

with commwith commhead, breahead, bre

ding connding conufacturer’ufacture

nufacturernufacturemplymply with withyy

commendcommende wrench.e wrench.

ONLYcorrect correct c

anufactureanufacturthe manuthe man

ard methoard methompresspr


26 0526 – 6

3. Make aluminum to steel connections with stainless steel separators and mechanical clamps.

4. Make aluminum to galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps.

5. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

3.4 MAIN GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM

A. Install in accordance with the NEC and the Drawings.

B. Concrete encased ground electrode and ground plates are provide in accordance with Specifications below and Drawings.

1. Install a concrete-encased main grounding electrode in the lower part of the perimeter strip footing or grade beam to form a complete and continuous loop around the structure. Encase the electrode with at least 2 in. of concrete from the bottom of the foundation or footing. Use one of the following materials for the electrode:

a. Bare or zinc galvanized or other electrically conductive coated steel reinforcing bars, minimum 1/2-in. diameter, installed in continuous 20 ft length, or if in multiple pieces connected together. Bond reinforcing rods together using steel wire ties or other effective means.

b. Bare #2 copper conductor. Space cable from the bottom and sides of the grade beam so it has at least 2 in. of concrete coverage. Bond to the rebar in one place.

c. Perform NEC inspection of main grounding electrode prior to pouring concrete.

C. Install ground plates flush with the concrete slab. Locate ground plates adjacent to distribution panelboard. Bond ground electrode to ground plates with #2 AWG pigtail using UL-listed compression fittings.

D. Bond building perimeter structural steel column to the main grounding electrode via ground plates and ground cables sized as indicated on the Drawings.

3.5 CIRCUIT AND SYSTEM GROUNDING

A. Connect the service entrance equipment ground bus to the ground plate; use ground cable as indicated on the Drawings, or not smaller than the grounding electrode conductor required by the NEC and not smaller than 4 AWG.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 369 of 450

FOR

retereteth Speh Specifcif

Install a Install ae perime periINFORMATION

metemeteuous loouous loo

concrete fncrete fng matering materi

zinc galvaninc galvarcing barsing bars

ftft length, lengthrods togerods toge

. Space c. Space ct least 2t least ONLY

i

unding elunding e

ou


26 0526 – 7

B. In the service entrance equipment, connect the neutral bus to the ground bus using a bonding jumper not smaller than the grounding electrode conductor required by the NEC; do not use a bonding screw for this purpose. Make no other neutral-to-ground connections on the load side of the service entrance disconnect.

C. Separately Derived Systems:

1. Connect ground bus of first disconnecting means for separately derived systems that are remote from the main electrical room to an effectively grounded building structural steel column; use grounding conductor sized as shown on the Drawings or as required by the NEC.

2. At the first system overcurrent device or disconnecting means, connect the neutral bus to the ground bus using a bonding jumper sized as required by the NEC; do not use a bonding screw for this purpose. Make no other neutral-to-ground connections on the load side of the separately derived system disconnect.

3.6 ENCLOSURE AND EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Provide permanent and effective equipment, enclosure, and raceway grounding in accordance with NEC requirements and as further specified or shown on the Drawings.

B. Provide an equipment ground bar, separate from any neutral bar, in all panelboards, transformers, starters, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc., for grounding the enclosure and for connecting other equipment and raceway ground conductors. Make connections to the ground bar using mechanical lugs or compression lugs.

C. Make connections and couplings on metallic conduit systems wrench tight.

D. Grounding Bushings:

1. Install grounding bushings on metallic conduits entering enclosures through concentric, eccentric, or oversize knockouts.

2. Install grounding bushings on metallic conduits that terminate to a metallic enclosure without effective electrical connection such as locknuts or threaded bushings.

3. Bond conduit grounding bushing lug to the equipment ground bar or ground lug in panelboards, transformers, starters, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc. Size bonding jumpers in accordance with the NEC.

E. Provide an insulated equipment grounding conductor for each feeder and branch circuit.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 370 of 450

FOR nenethe Nthe Nneutralneutralystem dstem dINFORMATION

EQUIPMEQUIPM

and effecand efferequiremrequirem

bar, separbar, seprs, disconnrs, discon

nnecting onecting oground barround ba

ONLYnduit sysduit sys

ntering entering e


26 0526 – 8

1. Install the grounding conductor within the common conduit or raceway with the related phase and neutral conductors and connect to the grounding terminal or grounding bus in each box or cabinet.

2. Size equipment ground conductor in accordance with the NEC or as shown on the Drawings.

F. In each 15 or 20 ampere branch circuit outlet box and junction box, install a green colored washer head grounding screw with a 12 AWG equipment grounding conductor pigtail.

G. Connect receptacle grounding terminals to the equipment ground system using minimum 12 AWG equipment grounding conductor. Do not use a “self-grounding” receptacle strap as the only equipment grounding path.


A. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections.

B. Before work is concealed, verify and certify that the following grounding installations have been made correctly:

1. The building grounding electrode system. This includes the bonding of the structural steel columns and bonding of other metallic systems.

2. Ground plates and grounding bars.

3. All other underground grounding installations.

C. Acceptance Testing: Perform acceptance testing for building/transformer area grounding electrode system and submit written reports to the Buyer’s Technical Representative. Tests may be witnessed by designated representatives.

1. Test equipment ground resistances for the following items. Measure resistance between the equipment item and the Electrode Ground Plate using calibrated test equipment. Use the “two-point method” of IEEE 81. Investigate and correct equipment ground resistances that exceed 0.5 ohm.

a. Distribution panelboard.

D. Prepare test reports, certified by the testing organization, of the ground resistance at each test location. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe any measures taken to improve test results.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 371 of 450

undinundin

ALITY CLITY C

htnesneINFORMATION

of aof a

concealedconcealedbeen madeeen mad

ounding elunding elcolumns aolumns a

ding barsding bars

ing installng insta

esting fosting fn rn ONLY

eports portsgnated repnated re

owing itemwing iteectrode ectrode

me


26 0529 – 1

SECTION 26 0529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK


1. Raceway supporting devices.

2. Hanger Rods.

3. Fasteners.

4. Framing Channel Systems.

5. Fabricated Supporting Devices.





ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength

B. Federal Specification (FS)

FS WW-H-171E Hangers and Supports, Pipe

C. International Code Council (ICC)


D. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS)

MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 372 of 450

FOR FasteFast

raming amingINFORMATION

ated Suppated Supp

TS/COCODED

s of the Coof the C

erenced thenced thenced docnced doc

ONLYion for Caion for Ca

sile Strengsile Stren


26 0529 – 2


E. Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (MFMA)

MFMA-4 Metal Framing Standards Publication

MFMA-103 Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing

F. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)

NECA 1 Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)


1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Approval Required

1. Catalog Data: Submit catalog data for each type of product specified. Include information substantiating equivalent corrosion resistance to zinc coated steel of alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic.

2. Test Reports: Submit ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. evaluation report for each post-installed concrete or masonry anchor product showing that it complies with the current edition of the IBC and the intended conditions of use.


A. Furnish and install hangers and supports that conform to the requirements of the following codes and standards:

1. NEC

2. IBC

3. NECA 1

B. Where a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) has requirements for such products, provide products that are NRTL-listed and labeled for the application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 373 of 450

FOR

nana

PA 7070

INFORMATION

act Statemct Statem

bmit catalbmit catsubstantiasubstant

ve treatmee treatme

uation Seuation Sesonrysonry anc anyy

he IBe IONLYC anC an

he reqe r


26 0529 – 3



A. Receive, store, protect, and handle products according to NECA 1.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS


2.2 COATINGS AND MATERIALS

A. Furnish products for use indoors protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic.

B. Furnish products for use outdoors or in damp or corrosive indoor locations with hot-dip galvanized coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or material such as stainless steel with inherent corrosion resistant characteristics.

2.3 RACEWAY SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Furnish supports as described below for the installation of raceway systems.

B. Use pressed steel, single bolt hangers to support individual RGS, IMC, or EMT conduits from threaded rods or beam clamps. Manufacturer: Steel City®31 “6H Series.”

C. For individual runs of EMT up to 1-in. trade size above accessible ceilings, use spring steel conduit clips with positive snap closure. Manufacturer: ERICO®32

CADDY “M Series.”

D. Use malleable iron conduit clamps to secure individual RGS, IMC, or EMT conduit runs across, parallel, or perpendicular to beams, channels, and angle supports. Manufacturer: Steel City “RC, EC, and PC Series.”

E. Use snap-on type, one-hole steel straps to secure individual conduits up to 2-in.trade size to flat, dry interior surfaces. Manufacturer: T&B®33 “1210 Series” for RGS and IMC and “4100 Series” for EMT.

31 Steel City is a registered trademark of Steel City Electric Company Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.32 ERICO is a registered trademark of Erico International Corporation, Solon, Ohio.33 T&B is a registered trademark of Thomas & Betts International, Inc., Wilmington, Delaware.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 374 of 450

FOR

AA

nish produh prodlent corrolent corro

materiamateriINFORMATION

cc

cts for usets for used coating d coating

native treative trearesistant resistan

ICESICES

ow for the w for the

o support isupportps. Mans. ManONLY

bove accebove acceManufactuManufac


26 0529 – 4

F. Support multiple parallel horizontal conduits with trapeze hangers fabricated from framing channel materials specified below.

2.4 HANGER RODS

A. Furnish mild steel rods that conform to ASTM A307.

B. Furnish rods that are threaded on both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded with UNC (coarse) thread pitch.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. Post-installed Concrete Anchors

1. Furnish post-installed concrete anchors as shown on the Drawings.

2. Each post-installed anchor shall have an ICC-ES evaluation report stating that the product is compliant with the current edition of the IBC and the intended conditions of use.

3. For applications in outdoor, damp, or corrosive locations, furnish stainless steel post-installed anchors.

4. Furnish post-installed expansion, adhesive, and undercut anchors specified in Section 03 1500, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchors.”

5. Powder-actuated threaded studs: Use zinc-plated carbon steel or stainless steel suitable for the intended service:

a. 1/4-20 threaded stud: Manufacturer: Hilti X-W6.

b. 3/8-16 threaded stud: Manufacturer: Hilti W10.

6. Concrete and masonry screw anchors: Heat-treated carbon steel. Manufacturer: Simpson Strong-Tie®34 “Titen HD.”

B. Beam Clamps: NRTL-listed, or compliant with FS WW-H-171E, or compliant with MSS SP-69 and SP-58.

2.6 FRAMING CHANNEL SYSTEMS

A. Furnish U-channel framing systems that conform to MFMA-4 and are fabricated using minimum 12-gage steel, with 9/16-in.-diameter holes, from 1 1/2 to 17/8-in. o.c., in the surface opposite the “U” opening.

34 Simpson Strong-Tie is a registered trademark of Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc., Pleasanton, California.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 375 of 450

FORFurFur

Each posEach poat the pat the

dd INFORMATION

roroed conded con

ations in oations in otalled anclled anc

led expand expanPostPost--InstaInsta

studs: Ustuds: Uservice:service:

ufacturerfactureONLYrer: Hilter: Hilt

eated carbated carD.”D.


26 0529 – 5

B. Furnish fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of the same manufacturer. Use two-piece, single bolt type conduit straps on U-channel supports.

C. Manufacturers: Unistrut, B-Line, SuperStrut.

2.7 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Furnish shop- or field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from U-channel components.

B. Furnish steel brackets fabricated from angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install hangers and supports according to the NEC, IBC, NECA 1, the requirements in this Section, and specific supporting requirements in other Sections.

B. Conform to manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for selection and installation of hangers and supports. Use appropriate, calibrated, special tools when installing devices for which special installation tools are recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Do not use wire or perforated strap for permanent supports.

D. Install flexible sections in electrical conduits and raceways where they cross expansion joints. Do not support conduits, boxes, raceways, etc., from ceiling suspension wires.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive hangers and supports for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 FASTENERS

A. Post-installed concrete expansion anchors: Install in accordance with Section 03 1550, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchors Bolts,” and the product’s ICC-ES report conditions of use.

B. Masonry screw anchors: Use in accordance with NECA 1 and the product’s ICC-ES report conditions of use.

C. Use beam clamps or machine bolts, nuts, and washers for fastening to metal.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 376 of 450

FORUTIONUTION

INFORMATION

s and sup and supn this Sectthis Sect

er’s instruer’s instsupports.upports.

hich spechich spec

r permaneperman

ts and ras and roxexeONLY

s, racew, race

lianli


26 0529 – 6

1. When clamping is impractical, obtain approval from the Construction Engineer before drilling, punching, cutting, or welding to building structural steel members for support attachments.

D. Fasten equipment to concrete or masonry with expansion anchors.

E. The use of lead-cinch drop in anchors is not allowed.

F. Torque-threaded fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer’s instructions.

3.4 RACEWAY SUPPORTS

A. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

B. Support three or more parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze hangers.

C. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers.

D. Do not support conduits from ceiling suspension wires.

3.5 BOXES AND CABINETS

A. Support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure, or by approved brackets or bar hangers, as shown on the Drawings or as required. Where bar hangers are used, attach the bar to structure on opposite sides of the box.

B. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be supported separately except where used for fixture support.

C. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards as shown on the Drawings or as required.

3.6 FRAMING CHANNEL SYSTEMS

A. Select and install framing channel systems in accordance with MFMA-103.

B. Use framing channel to support electrical equipment that is mounted free of walls.

C. Use framing channel to support equipment mounted on walls that do not have sufficient strength to resist pull-out or wallowing out of equipment mounting bolts.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 377 of 450

FOR

ssarssarrdware ndware nduits.ts

hree orhree oINFORMATION

mm

al horizonl horizo

its from cts from c

tlyl from thfrom thyon the Dran the Dr

ucture on octure on

ed to racd to rartONLY

cew

s shown onshown


26 0529 – 7

3.7 HANGER RODS

A. Use minimum 3/8-in. diameter threaded rod; use larger diameter rod as indicated on the Drawings, in other Sections, or in the supported equipment manufacturer’s installation instructions.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 378 of 450



26 0533 – 1

SECTION 26 0533

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK


1. Conduits and fittings.

2. Outlet boxes and handholes.

3. Pull and junction boxes.

4. Wireways.

5. Surface metal raceways.




A. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)


NECA 101 Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT)

NECA 111 Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC)

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

NEMA C80.1 Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)

NEMA C80.3 Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 379 of 450

FOR Pull aPull

WirewayWirewaINFORMATION

e metal rae metal ra

TS/COCODED

s of the Coof the C

erenced thenced thenced docnced doc

(NEC(NECONLY

A)A)

for Good Wfor Good

ConduCond


26 0533 – 2

NEMA FB1 Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies

NEMA RN1 PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

NEMA OS1 Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports

NEMA OS3 Selection and Installation Guidelines for Electrical Outlet Boxes

NEMA TC 2 Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit

NEMA TC 3 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing



D. Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL)

Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory

Electrical Construction Materials Directory

UL 1 Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit

UL 6 Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit

UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations

UL 360 Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit, Electrical

UL 508A, 2014 Industrial Control Panels

UL 510 Polyvinyl Chloride Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape

UL 514A Metallic Outlet Boxes

UL 514B Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes

UL 514C Non-Metallic Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes

UL 651 Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 380 of 450

FOR EMA TCEMA TC

Fire PrFire PINFORMATION

oteote

atory (ULory (UL

ElectrElectrDirectorDirector

trical Conrical Co

Metal Eleetal Ele

ectrictrONLYcal Ccal C

rical Equirical Equierationsation

Conduon


26 0533 – 3

UL 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Approval Required: None.



B. Rigid steel conduit. Verify the following:

1. Each length is marked with manufacturer’s name, UL label, and “Rigid Metal Conduit” or “Rigid Steel Conduit.”

C. Conduit fittings/metallic outlet boxes/terminal boxes (rigid, stainless steel). Verify the following:

1. Check one lot or container and verify each item has, at a minimum, the UL symbol and that the shipping label or the container for which the items are shipped contains the manufacturer’s name, the UL listing, and the type of items shipped. If the item is not marked with the UL symbol or manufacturer’s name, visually inspect the shipping carton of the item to ensure it is in accordance with the UL and manufacturer’s published data.

2. Check one lot or container and verify item size is in accordance with product description.

3. Verify external coating for each item is uniform (rigid steel only) and no damage exists.

4. Verify material used is ferrous metal (rigid or malleable iron only) by performing magnetic test.

D. Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.

E. Cabinets containing assembled control systems shall be designed, constructed, and listed or labeled to the UL 508A Standard, as applicable.

F. The most recent edition of any relevant regulation, standard, document, or code shall be in effect, unless otherwise noted.



RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 381 of 450

FORnduit fittinit fittithe followthe follo

ckkINFORMATION

one lot one loand that tand that t

ontains theontains thed. IIf the ihe i

name, visuname, visrdance wiance wi

ner and vener and ve

item is untem is u

ONLYid or malld or ma

lly Recolly Recoon, a


26 0533 – 4

PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.2 COATINGS

A. Provide products with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic that is suitable for the environment in which the product will be installed and used.

2.3 RIGID METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS (RMC)

A. Furnish rigid metal conduit (RMC) that meets the requirements of UL 6 and NEMA C80.1.

B. Furnish zinc-plated, threaded, malleable iron fittings and conduit bodies that meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1.

2.4 PLASTIC-COATED STEEL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish polyvinyl chloride (PVC) exterior coated, urethane interior coated, RMC that meets the requirements of NEMA RN 1.

B. Use factory-fabricated elbows.

C. Furnish 40 mils PVC exterior coated, urethane interior coated, zinc-plated, threaded, malleable iron fittings and conduit bodies meeting the requirements of UL 514B.

D. Furnish Type II PVC (Schedule 40) that meets the requirements of NEMA C80.1.

2.5 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT (RNC) AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish RNC that conforms to UL 651 and NEMA TC 2.

B. Furnish non-metallic, solvent-welded socket fittings that meet the requirements of UL 514C and NEMA TC 3.

2.6 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING AND FITTINGS (EMT)

A. Furnish galvanized electrical metallic tubing (EMT) that meets the requirements of UL 797 and NEMA C80.3.

B. Furnish compression or set-screw type fittings that meet the requirements of UL 514B, and NEMA FB1. Furnish insulated throat connectors.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 382 of 450

FORTATA

nish rigid h rigid AA C80.1.C80.1.

INFORMATION

lated, thlated, thts of UL 5s of UL 5

EL CONL CON

e (PVC) ePVC) eof NEMA of NEMA

rethane inthane inuit bodiest bodieONLY

requiremerequirem

GSGS


26 0533 – 5

2.7 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish galvanized steel flexible metal conduit that meets the requirements of UL 1.

B. Furnish zinc-plated malleable iron fittings that meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1. Furnish insulated throat connectors.

2.8 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish liquid-tight flexible metal conduit that meets the requirements of UL 360.

B. Furnish zinc-plated malleable iron or zinc-plated steel liquid-tight fittings that meet the requirements of UL 514B, and ANSI/NEMA FB1. Furnish insulated throat connectors.

2.9 INSULATING BUSHINGS

A. Provide NRTL-listed insulating bushings with 105°C rated insulation.

B. Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type IB.

2.10 GROUNDING BUSHINGS

A. Provide NRTL-listed, galvanized malleable iron, 150°C rated insulated throat grounding bushings with lay-in type ground cable lugs.

B. Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type BLG.

2.11 EXPANSION FITTINGS

A. Furnish NRTL listed expansion fittings with hot dipped galvanized malleable iron body, factory-installed packing and a bonding jumper.

B. Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type AX, TX, or EXE with Type BJ bonding jumper.

C. Lubricant and Sealant

1. Lubricant and Sealant for Conduit Thread: Conductive compound providing anti-seize and corrosion protection. Thomas and Betts Corporation “KOPR-SHIELD®35,” or approved substitute.

2.12 PROTECTION TAPE AND CONDUIT SEALANT

A. Furnish pressure-sensitive, 10 mil thick. PVC based tape for corrosion protection of metal conduit and fittings. Manufacturer: 3M, Type 50.

35 KOPR-SHIELD is a registered trademark of Jet-Lube, Inc., Houston, Texas.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 383 of 450

FORthethe

oat connoat conn

G BUSHIG BUSH

TT INFORMATION

LL--listed listed

Z/Z/GedneyGedney

nized mallnized mallttype grouype grou

LG.LG.

ONLYdipped gdipped g

per.per.

th Tyh T pe Bpe By


26 0533 – 6

B. Furnish plastic insulating tape that complies with UL 510.

C. Furnish sealing compound for conduit: “Sealex®36” by Porcelain Products Company or “Duct Seal®37” by Gardner-Bender.

2.13 RACEWAY MEASURING TAPE

A. Furnish raceway measuring tape with permanently printed measurements in 1-ft increments and minimum 1200 lb average breaking strength.

2.14 WIREWAY

A. Provide NRTL-listed wireways with covers, elbows, tees, hangers, and fittings required for a complete system. Wireways shall be rated for environment to be installed.

2.15 OUTLET BOXES

A. Provide outlet boxes selected for specific installations using the guidance in NEMA OS 3 and the requirements of this Section.

B. For dry locations provide galvanized steel outlet boxes that comply with UL 514A.

1. For luminaire outlets use 4 in. x 1 1/2-in. deep (min.) boxes with fixture stud attachment as required to support luminaires.

2. For surface outlet boxes in EMT raceway systems, use 4 in. x 2 1/8-in. deep square boxes. Provide deeper boxes or multiple gang boxes as required to fit devices. Provide square surface covers that match the installed device and have not less than two holes for securing the device to the cover.

C. For damp or wet locations and for surface-mounted RMC or IMC raceway systems, provide outlet boxes that comply with UL 514A, UL 514B, and NEMA FB1.

1. For lighting fixture outlets use 4-in. x 2 1/16-in. deep (min.) round cast malleable iron boxes with threaded hubs.

2. For surface wall-mounted outlets, use 4 11/16 square, 2 11/16-in. deep cast malleable iron boxes with threaded hubs. Provide multiple gang boxes as required to fit devices. Provide gasketed cast malleable iron or cast copper-free aluminum covers that match the installed device and havenot less than two holes for securing the device to the cover.

36 Sealex is a registered trademark of Vector USA, Inc., Oak Brook, Illinois.37 Duct Seal is a registered trademark of Gardner-Bender, Inc., Menomonee Falls, Wisconsin.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 384 of 450

FORredred

talled. talled.

XESXES

INFORMATION

boxes sboxes snd the reqnd the req

ovide galvide galv

use 4 in. use 4 in. red to supred to sup

MT racewMT racewper boxes er boxe

uare surfare surftwtwONLY

o holeo hole

MC or IMC or IMMA, UL 51A, UL 51


26 0533 – 7

D. For all entries into NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosures: Crouse-Hinds, Type CGB for exposed cable, and Myers type watertight fittings or sealing-type locknuts for conduits.

2.16 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Exterior Mounted Enclosures (terminal boxes) shall be: NEMA 250 or UL 50, Type 4 unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.

B. Metallic boxes (junction boxes) shall be NEMA 250, Type 3R; 16 or 14 gage steel.

C. For dry locations in clean, non-contamination environments, use galvanized sheet steel pull and junction boxes that comply with UL 50 Type 1 and the NEC as to size and construction. Use boxes not less than 4-in. square x 1 1/2-in. deep with screw-secured covers. Provide larger boxes as required by the number and size of conduits and conductors.

D. For dry locations in dusty environments, use galvanized steel pull and junction boxes that comply with UL 50 Type 12 and the NEC as to size and construction. Use boxes not less than 6-in. square x 4-in. deep with gasketed covers. Provide larger boxes as required by the number and size of conduits and conductors.

E. For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations, in conduit runs up to 3/4-in. trade size, provide 4 11/16-in. square, 2 11/16-in. deep (min.) cast malleable iron pull and junction boxes with threaded hubs and gasketed cast malleable iron or cast copper-free aluminum covers.

F. For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations, in conduit runs 1 in. trade size and larger, provide galvanized sheet-steel pull and junction boxes and covers that comply with UL 50 Type 4.

G. For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations that are subject to hose-directed water, provide pull and junction boxes and covers that comply with UL 50 Type 4.

H. Provide connection points for equipment grounding conductors in each box.

I. For all entries into NEMA 250, Type 3R or 4 enclosures: Crouse-Hinds Type CGB for exposed cable, and Myers type watertight fittings or sealing-type locknuts for conduits.

2.17 SMOKE AND FIRE SEALANT CAULK

A. See Section 07 9200 for materials and installation requirements for raceways extended through fire rated floors and walls.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 385 of 450

FOR

pullpule and coe and cow-secured secured

s and cons and coINFORMATION

ons in duons in duplyy with Uwith Uyy

than 6than 6-in.ined byd by thetheyy

osive locasive loca11/161/16--in. din

bs and gasbs and gas

, in condu, in condund juncnd junONLY

tio

bject to hobject to with UL with UL

or


26 0533 – 8

2.18 NORMAL POWER, CONDITIONED POWER, AND COMMUNICATIONSSURFACE METAL RACEWAY

A. Furnish power and communications surface metal raceway that meets the requirements of UL 5.

B. Furnish power and communications surface metal raceway fabricated from cold rolled galvanized steel with a thickness of not less than 0.04-in. and coated with a gray baked enamel finish.

C. Raceway shall consist of a metal base and a snap on metal cover.

D. Nominal dimensions of the assembled raceway shall be 6 3/4-in. wide by 2 1/4-in.high.

E. Furnish fittings required for a complete installation to include a full-length partition separating the power wiring from the communications cables.

F. Provide a plastic snap-in cover plate for each power receptacle or communications connector face plate unstacked in the surface metal raceway as shown on the drawings. Each snap-in plate shall include one 125V 20-amp duplex receptacle, one 250V 20-amp duplex receptacle, and/or one connector faceplate for one RJ45 telecommunications connectors as shown on the drawings.

G. Manufacturer: Hubbell®38 6750 series.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways and boxes for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the raceway system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 GENERAL

A. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 70, the Specifications, and the Drawings. Fasten equipment to structural members or metal supports attached to structure or to concrete surfaces

B. Install complete systems of raceways and boxes for wiring systems.

C. Install raceways and boxes according to NECA 1, NECA 101, NECA 111, the NEC, the manufacturer’s instructions, and requirements in this Section.

D. Raceway termination points and box locations shown on the Drawings are in approximate locations unless dimensioned.

38 Hubbell is a registered trademark of Hubbell Incorporated, Shelton, Connecticut.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 386 of 450

FOR nish fittingh fitting

n separatin separa

INFORMATION

tic snaptic snaps connectos connect

wings. Eacings. Eae 250V 20250V 20

elecommuecommu

750 series50 serie

xesxe ONLYfor cofor co

mance of thance ofnditions hnditions


26 0533 – 9

E. Raceway routing is shown on the Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Coordinate routing with structure and with work of other trades. Route as required for a complete wiring system.

F. Ground and bond raceways and boxes as required in Section 26 0526, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

G. Support raceways and boxes in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 0529, “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems,” and the NEC.

H. Identify raceways and boxes as required in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

I. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance

J. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes or raceways.

3.3 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. For low-voltage wiring systems (less than 1000 volts) use conduit materials according to the NEC and the following:

1. Outdoors:

a. Direct buried: Use schedule 40 PVC, minimum 1” diameter. Install with 24-in. minimum cover from top of conduit to finished grade for traffic areas or a minimum depth of 18 in. in non-traffic areas.

2. Outdoors - exposed: Use RMC.

3. Indoors – exposed outside of designated electrical rooms or telecommunications rooms:

a. Exposed to severe physical damage during or after installation: Use RMC.

b. Not exposed to deteriorating agents and not subject to severe physical damage during or after installation: Use RMC or EMT.

4. Indoors – concealed:

a. Within concrete floors: Use RMC.

b. Direct-buried under building floor slabs on grade: Schedule 40 PVC or RMC. Locate top of conduits not less than 12 in. below the bottom of the concrete slab

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 387 of 450

FOR

nge nge

all knockoknocko

TALLTALLINFORMATION

ATAT

e wiring se wiring sNEC and thNEC and th

Use scheUse schen. minimun. minimu

as or a mias or a m

ONLYelectrical lectrica

g or afterg or afte


26 0533 – 10

5. Indoors – exposed:

a. Exposed to severe physical damage: Use RMC.

b. Exposed to moisture: Use RMC.

c. Not exposed to deteriorating agents, and not subject to severe physical damage: Use RMC, or EMT.

6. Connection to vibrating equipment (including hydraulic, pneumatic, or electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment) - Use a minimum of 24-in.; maximum length as determined by the NEC:

a. Outdoors: Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit.

b. Wet, damp, or corrosive indoor locations: Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit.

c. Dry indoor locations: Use flexible metal conduit.

B. For medium-voltage wiring systems (1 kV or greater but less than 100 kV) use conduit materials in accordance with Section 26 10 00, “Medium Voltage Electrical Distribution.”

C. Connections to luminaires: Use 3/8-in. flexible metal conduit or metal-clad cable in 6-foot maximum lengths for tap conductors to luminaires above suspended ceilings.

D. Use 3/4-in. or larger conduit to enclose multiple conductors larger than 12 AWG.

E. Install insulating bushings or connectors with an insulated throat to protect conductors or cables at conduit terminations.

F. Install conduits with no more than four 90-degree bends between pull points.

G. Use specified fitting for conduit except that threaded hubs and sealing type locknuts shall be used outdoors and locations where moisture is present. Use couplings where required. Do not use running threads.

H. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to boxes in damp and wet locations.

I. Use galvanized steel locknuts and insulated bushings for attachment to enclosures, except threaded hubs or sealing type locknuts shall be used outdoors or where moisture is present. Use watertight fittings for entries into NEMA 4 enclosures. Use sealing locknuts into bottoms of NEMA 4 or 3R enclosures.

J. Install insulating bushings or connectors with an insulated throat to protect conductors or cables at conduit terminations.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 388 of 450

FOR

a

b.b.mm

INFORMATION

DryDry iniyy

age wiringage wiringaccordanccordanc

””

Use 3/8-Use 3/8 inintap condutap condu

multiple cmultiple

ananONLYinsulansula

nds betweeds betwe

and san


26 0533 – 11

K. Stub-Up Connections:

1. Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, and set flush with the finished floor or equipment pad.

2. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6 in. above the floor.

3. Where equipment connections are not made under this Subcontract, install threaded insert plugs set flush with the floor.

L. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduits dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.

M. Install plastic-coated RMC and fittings according to the NEC and manufacturer’s instructions. Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits.

N. Make elbows, offsets, and bends uniform and symmetrical. Bend conduit with approved bending devices.

O. Maintain the following minimum clearances between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104°F (40°C):

1. 6 in. at perpendicular crossings.

2. 12 in. between parallel runs.

P. Cut ends square, ream, and remove burrs. Conduit shall be clean, dry, and free of debris. Immediately after installation, plug or cap exposed ends with standard accessories until wires are installed.

Q. Avoid moisture traps in conduit system; provide junction boxes with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.

R. Install corrosion protection tape on metal conduits and fittings in contact with soil using half-lapped wrappings.

S. Install grounding bushings at the following locations:

1. At every entry to enclosures on metallic conduits containing circuits rated 100 amperes and higher.

2. On metallic conduits entering enclosures through concentric, eccentric, or oversize knockouts.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 389 of 450

FOR

metametament to ement to e

mum.u

sticc-cINFORMATION

oatedoatedUse onlyUse onlyy

VC coatinC coati

and benand benes.s.

mum clearaum clea40°C):40°C)

s

ONLYuit shall bit shall

exposed enxposed e

oxe


26 0533 – 12

3. On metallic conduits that terminate to a metallic enclosure without effective electrical connection such as locknuts or threaded bushings.

T. Install conduit measuring tape in empty raceways. Leave not less than 12 in. of slack at each end of the tape. Secure each end of tape.

3.4 FIRESTOP INSTALLATION

A. Install smoke and fire sealant caulk or foam at conduit penetrations through openings in fire-rated walls, floors, and partitions. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to restore original fire (and acoustical STC) rating.

B. At least two days prior to firestopping installation, notify Project/System Engineer so that arrangements can be made for inspection during installation.

3.5 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION

A. Install outlet boxes with centers at the following heights unless noted otherwise on the Drawings:

1. Receptacle, telephone, and data outlets:

a. Common Areas: 18-in. above finished floor.

2. Light switches: center 48-in. above finished floor and within 6-in. of door frame.

3. Thermostats: Center 60-in. above finished floor.

4. Outlet Raceway: Center 48-in. above finished floor.

5. Window Blind Switch: Center 60-in. above finished floor.

B. Where the Drawings show outlets as adjacent, align outlet boxes with each other and group them symmetrically.

C. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 2726, “Wiring Devices.”

D. Install a multi-gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional type boxes.

E. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.

F. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.

G. Support boxes independently of conduit.

H. Install a blank cover plate on each outlet box in which no device is installed.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 390 of 450

FOR

at arat ar

BOX INSOX INS

tlet bolet boINFORMATION

xes xes gs:gs:

e, telephon, telephon

n Areas: n Areas:

er 48er 48--inin. aa

bove finisbove finis

ove finishe finisONLYove finishve finis

outlet boxeutlet box


26 0533 – 13

3.6 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION

A. Install pull and junction boxes as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, and compliance with regulatory requirements.

B. Install indoor pull and junction boxes in accessible locations above accessible ceilings and in unfinished spaces. Position boxes so covers can be removed. Place boxes to maintain headroom.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.

B. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

C. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touch-up coating recommended by the manufacturer.

3.8 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY INSTALLATION

A. Install surface metal raceway at locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Use flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces.

C. Mount plumb and level.


A. For conduits, junction boxes, associated fittings and supports, verify appropriate torque values are in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings and finishes are without damage or deterioration at final inspection.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 391 of 450

FOR

ir dir dnufacturnufactu

damage tdamage facturefacturINFORMATION

..

RACEWRACEW

racewayceway a ayy

s, and straand stra

ttings anttings anctureturONLY

r’s rer s re

o ensure tho ensure thnspectionspection


26 0553 – 1

SECTION 26 0553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Component identification tags.

B. Equipment nameplates.

C. Wire markers.

D. Voltage markers.

E. Warning signs.

F. Working space labels.

G. Underground warning tape.

H. Arc Flash labels.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS / CODES AND STANDARDS

Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.



ANSI Z535.1 Safety Color Code

ANSI Z535.2 Environmental and Facility Safety Signs

ANSI Z535.3 Criteria for Safety Symbols and Labels

ANSI Z535.4 Product Safety Signs and Labels

ANSI Z535.5 Safety Tags and Barricade Tapes (for Temporary Hazards)

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 392 of 450

FOR

mm

ltage markltage mar

signs.signs.INFORMATION

e labels.e labels.

ng ttapeape..

ES ANS AND SD

ntract, inclntract, incltions applions appl

rein, forein, fONLY

orms are thoare tho


26 0553 – 2

B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

29 CFR 1910.145 Danger and Caution Specifications

C. U.S. Department of Energy (DOE)

DOE-0359 Hanford Site Electrical Safety Program

D. International Standards Organization (ISO)

ISO 3864 Graphical Symbols Package


NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Code (NEC)

NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace


UL 969 Marking and Labeling Systems

G. Washington River Protection Solutions, LLC

ATS-310 Equipment and Piping Labeling

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Catalog Data: Submit manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product.

2. Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter size, color coding, tag number, location, and function.

3. Samples:

a. Submit two samples of each type of printed identification products applicable to project.

b. Submit two nameplates illustrating materials and engraving quality.

4. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions, indicating special procedures and installation requirements.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 393 of 450

FORPA 70, PA 70

70E70E

rsrs INFORMATION

LaboratLabor

tection Sotection So

EquipmEquip

or the submr the subm

ONLYalog literatlog literat

ing list ofing list ation, anation, a


26 0553 – 3


Not used.


Not used.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of the NEC, NFPA 70E, and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Conform to applicable requirements of ANSI Z535.1, Z535.2, Z535.3, Z535.4, and Z535.5.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Subcontract Documents, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer’s wiring diagrams, with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Verify electrical equipment designations with the 222-S laboratory labeling convention through the Construction Field Lead. Ensure labeling format is consistent with ATS-310, Section 11.18.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be accepted; as approved by the Construction Field Lead.

2.2 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION TAGS

A. Furnish component identification tags as specified and scheduled on the Drawings and consistent with the labeling format in ATS-310, Section 11.18.

B. Provide tags made of materials shown on the drawings.

2.3 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

A. Furnish equipment nameplates at each disconnect switch, distribution panel, and transformer as specified on the Drawings.

B. Equipment nameplates: Laminated plastic, as shown on Drawings. Engraved nomenclature sharp and clear. Engraved manufacturer’s standard nameplates may be used if equal in quality and legibility.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 394 of 450

FOR5353

NATIONTION

te identte idens INFORMATION

fin the Sun the

ms, with ths, with thsignationssignations

ment desigment desonstructiostructio

ction 11.1ction 11.1

ONSNS

oved vedONLYbyby ththyy

scheduledscheduledon 11.n 1


26 0553 – 4

C. Post conductor color code on each panelboard. Use type-written, adhesive-backed labels.

D. Coordinate equipment nameplate schedule with equipment numbering scheme provided by Construction Field Lead.

2.4 WIRE MARKERS

A. Provide wire markers for power circuit wires.

B. Furnish split sleeve or heat-shrinkable sleeve, wire markers.

C. Install a wire marker on each conductor at each, disconnect switch, terminal box, distribution panel, transformer, pull box, junction box, and load connection.

D. Provide typewritten lettering on wire markers for as-built branch circuit or feeder circuit number.

E. Manufacturer: LEM Products, Inc., Brady, Panduit.

2.5 VOLTAGE MARKERS

A. Furnish voltage markers for each, disconnect switch, terminal box, distribution panel, transformer, pull box cabinet, and conduits.

B. Provide flexible pressure sensitive vinyl markers with minimum 1-in. x 4-in. orange background and black letters.

C. Provide voltage markers with lettering indicating the highest voltage present:

1. Example: 480 VAC.

D. Manufacturer: Electromark®39, LEM Products, Inc.

2.6 WARNING SIGNS

A. Furnish warning signs for each disconnect switch, terminal box, distribution panel, transformer, pull box, and cabinet.

B. Use warning signs that conform to ANSI Z535.4 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

C. Provide minimum 2-in. x 4-in. warning signs.

D. Provide warning signs with format and lettering as follows:

1. Signal word: DANGER

39 Electromark is a registered trademark of Brady Worldwide, Inc., Milwaukee, Wisconsin.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 395 of 450

FORbutbut

vide tye t pewpewynumber.number.

INFORMATION

LEM PLEM P

SS

rs for eachrs for eacox cabinetcabinet

ive vinyve vinyl l rss.

ndicatingdicating

ONLY


26 0553 – 5

2. Signal word panel color: red with safety alert symbol.

3. Word message:

a. Keep Out!

b. Hazardous voltage inside

c. Will shock, burn, or cause death.

4. Safety symbol: ISO 3864 “lightning bolt” in yellow triangle.

E. Materials:

1. Use flexible, pressure sensitive, polyester base with polyester overlaminate.

F. Manufacturer: Seton Name Plate Co., Safety Label Solutions, Hazard Communication Systems, Electromark.

2.7 WORKING SPACE LABELS

A. Provide labels indicating required working clearance at electrical equipment that is likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.

B. Material:

1. Use polyester label stock that is NRTL-recognized to UL 969 and has a high-adhesion adhesive back.

2. Use printing ribbon recommended by the label stock manufacturer.

3. Use a suitable thermal transfer process label-printing machine to generate labels and enter the application-specific information.

4. Outdoor labels shall be suitable for a high-UV environment.

C. Minimum dimensions: 3 1/2 x 1 1/4-in.

D. Use the following label design:

NOTICEKeep area in front of this electrical equipment clear for #-#/# feet. OSHA-NEC regulations.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 396 of 450

FORUsUoverlover

turer: Surer: Satit INFORMATION

toon Syon Systes

ABELSABELS

ng requireng requirnation, adjnation, a

NRTLNRTL-rer

ONLYlabel stlabel st

printing minting mtion.tion


26 0553 – 6

1. Signal word: “NOTICE” in 24-point minimum white italic letters on safety blue panel.

2. Word message: 16-point minimum black or safety blue letters on white background.

a. Word message for 151 to 600 Volt equipment with exposed live parts on one side of the working space and no live or grounded parts on the other side of the working space: “Keep area in front of this electrical equipment clear for 3 ft. OSHA-NEC regulations.”

b. Word message for 151 to 600 Volt equipment with exposed live parts on one side of the working space and grounded parts on the other side of the working space: “Keep area in front of this electrical equipment clear for 3 1/2 ft. OSHA-NEC regulations.”

c. Word message for 151 to 600 Volt equipment with exposed live parts on both sides of the working space: “Keep area in front of this electrical equipment clear for 4 ft. OSHA-NEC regulations.”

d. Word message for 0 to 150 Volt equipment with exposed live parts on one side of the working space and live or grounded parts on the other side of the working space: “Keep area in front of this electrical equipment clear for 3 ft. OSHA-NEC regulations.”

E. Manufacturer: Brother, Seton, Brady.

2.8 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Furnish underground warning tape for underground conduits.

B. Use 6-in. wide, 0.004-in. thick, polyethylene detectable underground warning tape black lettering and the following background colors:

1. Electric: Red

C. Provide lettering that indicates the type service buried below.

1. Electric: “CAUTION ELECTRIC LINE BURIED BELOW”

D. Manufacturer: Utility Safeguard, LLC, Detectable Terra Tape, Reef Industries, Inc.

2.9 ARC FLASH LABELS

A. Install arc flash labels on electrical equipment as required by NEC, NFPA 70E, and DOE-0359. Arc Flash Labels to be provided by the Construction Field Lead.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 397 of 450

FOR c WWINFORMATION

parts partsthis electhis elec

rd messagrd messagside of thside of th

of the woof the wuipment cuipment

radrady.y

rgroundrgrounONLY

d c

ectable unctable un


26 0553 – 7

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive identification products for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the identification products. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of finish work.

B. Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install electrical identification products only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer.

E. Clean surface where electrical identification product is to be placed.

F. Use manufacturer’s recommended adhesive for engraved tags and nameplates.

G. Place electrical identification products centered and parallel to equipment lines.

3.3 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION TAGS

A. Install component identification tag as indicated on the Drawings on the front of each piece of electrical equipment including distribution panels, and transformers.

B. Position tags so they can be read from floor or ground.

3.4 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

A. Install equipment nameplate or nameplates as indicated on the Drawings on the front of each piece of electrical equipment including distribution panels, and transformers.

B. Position nameplates so they can be read from floor or ground.

3.5 WIRE MARKERS

A. Install wire markers on power conductors at each appearance in locations such as pull boxes, junction boxes, distribution panels, transformers, and load connections.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 398 of 450

tall labetall labeout interfeut interfe

e instae instINFORMATION

lala

dentificatidentificatifor adhesir adhesi

rical identcal ident

ded adhesided adhesi

ts centeredts centere

ONLYon the Don the D

bution panution pan


26 0553 – 8

B. Position markers so they can be read from the front of the enclosure.

3.6 VOLTAGE MARKERS

A. Install voltage markers at the following locations and position markers so they can be read from floor or ground:

1. Front of each distribution panel, and transformer.

2. Cover of each pull box containing low-voltage conductors.

3. Each 2 in. and larger conduit longer than 6 ft; space markers not more than 20 ft on center.

3.7 WARNING SIGNS

A. Install warning signs at the following locations and position signs so they can be read from floor or ground:

1. Front of each disconnect switch, terminal box, distribution panel, transformer, pull box, and cabinet.

3.8 WORKING SPACE LABELS

A. Install working space labels in front of distribution panels, and transformers.

B. Any other equipment likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.

3.9 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Install detectable underground warning tape in trench above underground conduit, 12-in. minimum below ground surface.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 399 of 450

FOR G SIGNG SIG

warning swarning m floor floorINFORMATION

r gr

f each disf each diser, pull boer, pull bo

SS

in front ofin front o

uire examire exam

ONLYrench aboench ab


26 0800 – 1

SECTION 26 0800

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS TESTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This section covers the Work necessary to commission the electrical system. Work in this section is the responsibility of the Contractor and the qualified testing firm.




A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

IEEE 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System (Part 1): Normal Measurements

IEEE C2 National Electrical Safety Code

B. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA)

ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (ATS)


NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. For Information Only Submittals:

1. Submit 30 days prior to performing inspections or tests:

a. Schedule for performing inspection and tests.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 400 of 450

FORDODO

and generagenepecificatiopecificati

mINFORMATION

ents andents ais Sections Section

erwise inerwise in

nd Electrond Electr

Guide foGuide fompedancempedance

und Synd Systemste

Electrical lectrica

(NETNEONLYTA)TA)

SpecificatSpecificatuipment anpment a


26 0800 – 2

2. Submit test or inspection reports and certificates for each electrical item tested within 30 days after completion of test:

3. Operation and Maintenance Data:

a. After test or inspection reports and certificates have been reviewed by Engineer and returned, insert a copy of each in Operation and Maintenance Manual.


The Seller shall comply with the following Quality Assurance requirements in addition to those of the Contract Statement of Work:

A. Test equipment shall have an operating accuracy equal to, or greater than, requirements established by NETA ATS.

B. Test instrument calibration shall be in accordance with NETA ATS.


A. See Statement of Work.


A. See Statement of Work.

1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Perform inspection and electrical tests after equipment herein listed has been installed.

B. Perform tests with apparatus de-energized whenever feasible.

C. Inspection and electrical tests on energized equipment shall be:

1. Scheduled with Washington River protection Solutions (WRPS) prior to de-energization.

2. Minimized to avoid extended period of interruption to the operating plant equipment.

D. Notify WRPS at least 48 hours prior to performing tests on energized electrical equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

See Statement of Work.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 401 of 450

FOR st equipmst equipm

irements eements e

umentumenINFORMATION

calca

AGE, AGE, ANDND

ork.k.

er equipmer equipmONLYer feasibleer feasibl

hall be:hall be:


26 0800 – 3

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Tests and inspections shall establish:

1. Electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer’s tolerances and standards.

2. Installation operates properly.

3. Equipment is suitable for energization.

4. Installation conforms to requirements of Contract Documents and IEEE C2, NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, and IEEE C2.

B. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NETA ATS, industry standards, and manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Adjust mechanisms and moving parts of equipment for free mechanical movement.

D. Verify nameplate data for conformance to Contract Documents and approved Submittals.

E. Tighten accessible bolted connections, including wiring connections, with calibrated torque wrench/screw driver to manufacturer’s recommendations, or as otherwise specified in NETA ATS.

F. Clean contaminated surfaces with cleaning solvents as recommended by manufacturer.

G. Provide proper lubrication of applicable moving parts.

H. Inform Buyer’s Technical Representative (BTR) of working clearances not in accordance with NFPA 70.

I. Investigate and repair or replace:

1. Electrical items that fail tests.

2. Active components not operating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Damaged electrical equipment.

J. Electrical Enclosures:

1. Remove foreign material and moisture from enclosure interior.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 402 of 450

FOR IEEIE

m inspectim inspect, and m, and mINFORMATION

anan

isms and sms and

for conforfor confo

ections, inctions, iniver to maver to m

g solventsolventONLYarts.rts.

king cleaking clea


26 0800 – 4

2. Vacuum and wipe clean enclosure interior.

3. Remove corrosion found on metal surfaces.

4. Repair or replace, as determined by BTR, door and panel sections having dented surfaces.

5. Repair or replace, as determined by BTR, poor fitting doors and panel sections.

6. Repair or replace improperly operating latching, locking, or interlocking devices.

7. Replace missing or damaged hardware.

8. Finish:

a. Provide matching paint and touch up scratches and mars.

b. If required due to extensive damage, as determined by BTR,refinish entire assembly.

K. Identify and inform BTR of fuses and circuit breakers that do not conform to size and type required by the Contract Documents or approved Submittals.

3.2 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP

A. Voltage Field Test:

1. Check voltage at point of supply system to project when installation is essentially complete and is in operation.

B. Equipment Line Current Tests:

1. Check line current in each phase for each panelboard.

2. If any phase current for any piece of equipment is above rated nameplate current, prepare Equipment Line Phase Current Report that identifies cause of problem and corrective action taken.

3.3 PANELBOARDS

A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Include the following inspections and related work:

1. Inspect for defects and physical damage, labeling, and nameplate compliance with requirements of up-to-date drawings and panelboard schedules.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 403 of 450

FOR

RR

FinishFinis

PPINFORMATION

rovro

If requiref requirefinish entirinish entir

TR of fuseR of fusContract Dntract D

ystem to tem to on.n. ONLYboard.oard.


26 0800 – 5

2. Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction manual.

3. Check panelboard mounting, area clearances, and alignment and fit of components.

4. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for proper torque values.

5. Perform visual and mechanical inspection for overcurrent protective devices.

B. Electrical Tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction:

1. Ground continuity test ground bus to system ground.

3.4 LOW VOLTAGE CABLES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM

A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Inspect each individual exposed power cable No. 4 and larger for:

a. Physical damage.

b. Proper connections in accordance with single-line diagram.

c. Cable bends not in conformance with manufacturer’s minimum allowable bending radius.

d. Color coding conformance with Specifications.

e. Proper circuit identification.

2. Mechanical Connections For:

a. Proper lug type for conductor material.

b. Proper lug installation.

c. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer.

3. Shielded Instrumentation Cables For:

a. Proper shield grounding.

b. Proper terminations.

c. Proper circuit identification.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 404 of 450

FORici

nufactunufact

Ground Ground

CCINFORMATION

ABLEABLE

anical Insanical In

ndividual edividual

mage.mage.

ns in ans in ccorcco

nformanceormanc

th Sh SONLYpecificpecifi


26 0800 – 6

4. Control Cables For:

a. Proper termination.

b. Proper circuit identification.

B. Electrical Tests for Conductors No. 4 and Larger:

1. Insulation Resistance Tests:

a. Utilize 1,000-volt dc megohmmeter for 600-volt insulated conductors.

b. Test each conductor with respect to ground and to adjacent conductors for one minute.

c. Evaluate ohmic values by comparison with conductors of same length and type.

d. Investigate values less than 50 megohms.

2. Continuity test by ohmmeter method to ensure proper cable connections.

C. Low voltage cable tests may be performed by installer in lieu of independent testing firm. Record all results and include on final report.

3.5 SAFETY SWITCHES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM


1. Proper blade alignment.

2. Proper operation of switch operating handle.

3. Adequate mechanical support for each fuse.

4. Proper contact-to-contact tightness between fuse clip and fuse.

5. Cable connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12.

6. Proper phase barrier material and installation.

7. Verify fuse sizes and types correspond to one-line diagram or approved Submittals.

8. Perform mechanical operational test and verify mechanical interlocking system operation and sequencing.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 405 of 450

FOR c.c EElelINFORMATION

ngng

Investigatnvestigat

est byby ohmohmy

mayay be per be pyylts and inclts and in

AXIMUMXIMUM

ONLYle.le


26 0800 – 7

3.6 MOLDED AND INSULATED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. General: Inspection for all circuit breakers.

B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

1. Proper mounting.

2. Proper conductor size.

3. Feeder designation according to nameplate and one-line diagram.

4. Cracked casings.

5. Connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12.

6. Operate breaker to verify smooth operation.

7. Compare frame size and trip setting with circuit breaker schedules or one-line diagram.

8. Verify that terminals are suitable for 75°C rated insulated conductors.

3.7 GROUNDING SYSTEMS


1. Equipment and circuit grounds in panelboard for proper connection and tightness.

2. Ground bus connections in panelboard for proper termination and tightness.

3. Effective dry-type transformer equipment grounding.

4. Accessible connections to grounding electrodes for proper fit and tightness.

5. Accessible compression connections grounding connections to verify that proper bonding was obtained.

B. Electrical Tests:

1. Two-Point Direct Method Test:

a. In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.1, for measurement of ground resistance between main ground system, equipment frames, and system neutral and derived neutral points.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 406 of 450

FOR CoCTableTabl

perate bperateINFORMATION

re

are frame sre frame am.am.

minals areminals are

n:

in panelbin panelb

ONLYor properproper

nding.din


26 0800 – 8

b. Equipment ground resistance shall not exceed main ground system resistance by 0.50 ohm.

2. Neutral Bus Isolation:

a. Test each neutral bus individually with neutral bonding jumper removed at separately derived system.

b. Evaluate ohmic values by measuring resistance between ground bus and neutral bus.

c. Investigate values less than 50 megohms.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 407 of 450



26 2416 – 1

SECTION 26 2416

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Distribution Panelboards.




A. International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

ISO 9001 Quality management systems – Requirements

B. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)

NEMA AB 3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and their Application

NEMA PB 1 Panelboards

NEMA PB 1.1 General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 volts or less




UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations

UL 67 Panelboards

UL 489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 408 of 450

FORd gd g

s and Dis and D

g documendocumend in thisd in thi

ssINFORMATION

Sotherwotherw

anization anization

QuQ

turer’s Asturer’s A

lded Caseed Case

ardsrds

ctionsctionONLY

forforaintenanntenan

C)


26 2416 – 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Catalog Data: Submit catalog data describing each type panelboard, accessory item, and component specified. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.

2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each panelboard including dimensioned plans and elevations and component lists. Include front and side views of enclosure showing overall dimensions, enclosure type, enclosure finish, unit locations, and conduit entrances. Include the following:

a. Enclosure type with details for types other than NEMA Type 1.

b. Bus configuration and current ratings.

c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboard.

d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices and auxiliary components.

3. Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Quality Assurance. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, installation, and starting of Product.

4. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Submit operation and maintenance instructions. Include instructions for testing circuit breakers.



B. Furnish products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.

C. Comply with NEMA PB 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA AB 3.

D. Comply with UL 67, UL 50, and UL 489.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to manufacturer’s instructions.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 409 of 450

FOR

eefollofollo

aa EE

INFORMATION

Bus conBus con

ortort-circuitcircuit

, char, characteactedevices anvices an

Indicate Indicate esting agesting age

ns for stors for storting of Prting of

ns:ns ONLYSubmiSubm

ctions for tions fo


26 2416 – 3

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish six spare keys of each type for panelboard cabinet locks.

B. Furnish one spray can of touch-up paint that matches panelboard finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be accepted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Statement of Work.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Furnish panelboards as indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section.

B. Panelboards shall be UL 67 listed and shall conform to NEMA PB 1.

C. Furnish panelboard cabinets for surface mounting as indicted on the Drawings.

1. Furnish enclosures as indicated below:

a. Outdoor - NEMA 3R: rated rain-tight minimum.

b. Indoor - NEMA 12: Dust tight.

2. Cabinets shall be not less than 20-in. wide.

3. Furnish steel cabinets constructed according to UL 50 requirements.

4. NEMA 12 boxes, and 4 boxes shall have end walls welded and sealed.

D. Furnish trim fronts that meet the strength and rigidity requirements of UL 50.

1. Each panelboard trim front shall include a door.

2. Fronts shall have ANSI 49 medium gray enamel electro-deposited over cleaned, phosphatized steel.

3. Furnish a panelboard circuit directory card in a metal frame mounted inside the panelboard door. The directory card shall include spaces for circuit numbers and sufficient spaces to allow each circuit to be described in sufficient detail to be distinguished from all others.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 410 of 450

FOR

TIOTI

nish panelh pan

rds shalrds shaINFORMATION

board cabiboard cabi

osuures asres a

NEMA 3NEMA

A 12: DustA 12: Dust

an 20-n 20-in. win.

accordingaccordin

ONLYend waend wa

y requiremrequiry


26 2416 – 4

a. Furnish cylindrical tumbler type locks for doors. Furnish sliding vault locks with 3-point latching for enclosures more than 48-in. high. Key all lock assemblies alike. Furnish two keys with each lock plus spares as required in the Extra Materials paragraph above.

E. Equip panelboards with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances, for the future installation of circuit breakers in the “spaces” scheduled on the Drawings.

F. Furnish panelboards having NRTL-listed short circuit current ratings not less than the available fault current indicated on the Drawings.

G. Furnish thermal-magnetic circuit breakers that meet the requirements of UL 489 and NEMA AB 3.

1. Furnish circuit breakers of the type, rating, and features as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

3. Furnish multi-pole breakers with a common trip.

4. Furnish bolt-on type circuit breakers or circuit breakers that connect to the panel bus through positive gripping connector jaws and are secured by an independent mechanical locking device.

5. Furnish UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers or UL Class B equipment protection circuit breakers where scheduled on Drawings.

6. Furnish circuit breakers with provisions for connecting the size and number of conductors indicated on the Drawings. Refer to Section 26 0519, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables,” for conductor connection requirements.

H. Furnish a permanently-installed handle lock-off device for each circuit breaker.

1. Furnish handle lock-off device that will accept a 1/4-in. padlock shackle.

2. Securely attach the device to the circuit breaker case; the attachment shall not depending on a friction fit or the presence of the panelboard front for the handle lock-off device to remain in place and be functional.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 411 of 450

FORish tish t

dd NEMANEMA

Furnish cFurnish awinwi INFORMATION

gs.gs.

use tandeme tandem

pole breapole brea

e circuit bcircuit bitive gripptive grip

locking delocking de

ult interrult interrcuit breakcuit break

ONLYor connecor connec

wings. Refings. Rer Conducer Cond


26 2416 – 5

I. Furnish service disconnecting means circuit breakers with alternate maintenance setting switch and indication to eliminate the short-time delay setting when in maintenance mode.

J. Manufacturers:

1. Eaton®40:

a. 480Y/277 V: “PRL4”

b. 208Y/120 V and 120/240 V: “PRL1a” and “PRL2a”

2. Square D®41:

a. 480Y/277 V: “I-LINE”

b. 120/240 V: “NQ” and “I-Line”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards where indicated on the Drawings and according to manufacturer’s instructions, NEMA PB 1.1, and the NEC. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

B. Furnish supports in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 0529, “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.”

C. Position panelboards so the top circuit breaker handle is not more than 6 ft – 7 in. above the surface of the working space in front of the panelboard.

D. Ground and bond panelboards as required in Section 26 0526, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Furnish typed circuit directories for each branch circuit panelboard.

40 Eaton is a registered trademark of Eaton Corporation, Cleveland, Ohio.41 Square D is a registered trademark of SNA Holding Inc, Wilmington, Delaware.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 412 of 450

FOR a.a

b.b 1

INFORMATION

ceive panceive panitions affeitions af

oryory conditcondyy

the Drawithe Draw1, and th1, and th

able bleONLYat theat the

ents of Secents of Sec

ot mort m


26 2416 – 6

1. Install a plastic-laminated copy of the panel schedule drawing on the inner side of the panelboard door.

B. Identify panelboards and install warning signs and arc-flash warning labels as required in Section 26 0553, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”


A. Clean, inspect, test, and energize panelboards in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Exercise each circuit breaker three times to verify smooth mechanical operation.

B. Coordinate inspections and tests with those required by other Sections.

C. After completing installation, cleaning, and testing, touch-up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 413 of 450

FOR ter compter comp

nish to msh to m

INFORMATION

ENDEND

ONLY


26 2726 – 1

SECTION 26 2726

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK


1. Receptacles.

2. Snap switches.

3. Wall plates.




A. Federal Specifications (FS)

FS W-C-596 G/GEN Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for

FS W-P-455A Plate, Wall, Electrical

FS W-S-896 Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted (General Specification)

B. International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems -- Requirements

C. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)


D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

NEMA ICS 4 Application Guideline for Terminal Blocks

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 414 of 450

FOR Wall pWall

CUMECUMEINFORMATION

provisionprovisionSection.Section

others refothers reion. Refeion. Re

e indicatee indicat

or, Electricor, Electri

ONLYicalca

gle and Le and Lication)ication)


26 2726 – 2

NEMA WD 6 Dimensions for Wiring Devices



F. Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL)

UL 20 General Use Snap Switches

UL 498 Electrical Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

UL 943 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters

UL 1059 Standard for Terminal Blocks

UL 1492 Solid-State Dimming Controls

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Approval Required

1. Catalog Data: Submit catalog data for each type of product that is supplied as “OR EQUAL.” Include information substantiating equivalent characteristic.


A. Comply with the NEC.

B. Furnish products listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environments in which installed.

C. Manufacturers of products addressed in this Section shall maintain an ISO 9001 certification.

D. The most recent edition of any relevant regulation, standard, document, or code shall be in effect, unless otherwise noted.



PART 2 PRODUCTS



RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 415 of 450

10591059

9292

INFORMATION

edd

Submit caSubmit cEQUAL.” EQUAL.

onallyonallONLY

recrecn, and th, and th

all mall m intain


26 2726 – 3

2.2 RECEPTACLES

A. Provide back- and side-wired, screw pressure terminal, straight-blade and locking type, receptacles as indicated on the drawings. Receptacles shall meet the performance and design requirements of FS W-C-596 G/GEN and UL 498. Receptacle configurations shall be in accordance with NEMA WD 6.

B. For 120-volt convenience receptacles connected to general purpose branch circuits, provide an ivory colored straight-blade NEMA 5-20R, 20 ampere, 125 volt, grounding single and duplex receptacles. Receptacle mounting strap, ground terminal, and ground contacts shall be formed from one piece of brass alloy. Manufacturer: Hubbell “HBL5362I.”

C. For ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) receptacles connected to individual branch circuits, provide an ivory colored straight-blade NEMA 5-20R, 20 ampere, 125 volt, grounding, “feed through” type, self-testing GFCI, duplex receptacle that meet the requirements of UL 943. Provide units that can be installed in a 2 3/4-in. deep outlet box without an adapter. Manufacturer: Hubbell “GFRST20I.”

D. 120V ded receptacles: Gray Hubbell 5-20R HBL5362GX duplex.

E. 240V ded receptacles: L6-20R HBL2320 black nylon single receptacle.

F. For computer or instrument 120-volt circuit receptacles connected to isolated ground 20 amperes branch circuit, provide an orange colored straight-blade NEMA 5-20R, 20 amperes, 125 volts, isolated grounding duplex receptacles, orange face. Manufacturer: Hubbell “IG5352.”

2.3 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Provide switches as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Switches shall be rated 20 amperes, 120-277 volts AC, back- and side-wired, screw pressure terminal, quiet type AC switch with yoke grounding screw. Switches shall meet the performance and design requirements of UL 20 and FS W-S-896.

C. Manufacturer: Hubbell “HBL1220” series.

2.4 WALL PLATES

A. For flush-mounted interior receptacles on surface-mounted metal raceway, provide 0.032-in. thick (minimum) brushed 302/304 alloy stainless steel smooth wall plates that meet the requirements of FS W-P-455A. Manufacturer: Hubbell “S” series.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 416 of 450

FORgroungroun

nch circunch circuvolt, grounlt, groun

et the reqthe reeepepINFORMATION

utlet utlet

es: Grayes: Gray

L66--20R HB20R H

200-volt cir-volt ct, providet, provide

ts, isolates, isolateIG5352.”IG5352

ONLYbackbac - anagroundigroundi

ts


26 2726 – 4

B. For flush-mounted interior wall receptacles and wall switches, provide nylon wall plates to match receptacle color and style. Manufacturer: Hubbell “NP” series or similar.

C. For surface-mounted interior receptacles and switches, provide galvanized steel 4-in. square raised surface covers. Receptacles installed in raised covers shall be secured by more than one screw. Manufacturer: RACO®42 “800” series.

D. For GFCI receptacles in damp or wet locations, provide weatherproof, while-in-use, extra-duty cast aluminum hinged covers. Manufacturer: Hubbell “WP26E” or “WP26EH.”

E. Provide single, multi-gang, and combination type wall plates that mate and matchwith corresponding wiring devices.

F. Use metal, plate-securing screws to match plate finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.

B. Clean debris from outlet boxes before installing devices.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products following manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

B. Install devices plumb, level, and secure.

C. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, mount devices flush, with long dimension vertical, and grounding point of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches and receptacles under single, multi-gang wall plates.

D. Do not use the duplex/split-wire, break-off tabs in receptacles as circuit conductors for connecting downstream devices.

E. Identify wiring devices with circuit number as required in Section 26 0553, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

F. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes on surface mounted outlets.

42 RACO is a registered trademark of Hubbell Incorporated, Orange, Connecticut

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 417 of 450

FOR corrcorr

metal, plaetal, pla

N INFORMATION

wiring inwiring invices.vices.

es befes before iore ff

’s instructs instrucnstructiostructioONLYnt devices devices

n top. Gn top. Ges.


26 2726 – 5

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.


A. Inspect each wiring device for defects before installing.

B. Operate each operable device at least six times with circuit energized; verify proper operation.

C. Test 20-ampere receptacles for proper polarity and ground continuity using an NRTL-listed test device that impresses a momentary current of at least 15 amperes on the branch circuit conductors and equipment grounding path.

D. Test ground-fault circuit interrupter receptacle operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer recommendations.

1. Verify that GFCI will trip at 5 ±1 mA current.

2. Verify that GFCI does not trip at less than 1.8 mA current.

E. Replace damaged or defective wiring devices.

3.5 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Clean devices and wall plates. Replace stained or damaged wall plates or devices.

B. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 418 of 450

FOR peres operes

groundround-fafafault simault simINFORMATION

that GFthat GF

t GFCI dot GFCI do

efective wefective w

eplace staplace sta

ush and leush and le

ONLY


26 2816 – 1

SECTION 26 2816

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Safety switches.

B. Fuses.

C. Molded Case Circuit Breakers.




A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

NEMA AB3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

NEMA FU 1 Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses

NEMA KS 1 Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).

NEMA WD 1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC).

C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.

UL 248 Low-Voltage Fuses.

UL 486A-486B Wire Connectors.

UL 489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 419 of 450

FOReded

D DOCUDOCU

eneral pneral pvisis INFORMATION

on 01 Son 01



turers Assturers A

lded Caseed Cas

tage Cartrtage Cart

MisceMisceONLY

lananes (600 Vs (600

for Wirinfor Wirin


26 2816 – 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each type of safety switch and fuse types. Provide catalog sheets showing voltage and current ratings, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details.

2. Project Record Documents: Submit project record documents including specified certifications and all field test reports.



B. Provide safety switches that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.

C. Comply with the following standards as applicable:

1. NEMA KS 1.

2. UL 50.

3. NEMA FU 1.

4. UL 248.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store safety switches, enclosed circuit breakers, and fuses according to the manufacturer’s written instructions.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide one spray can of touch-up paint that matches finish of safety switches.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be accepted; follow the guidelines set forth in the Contract Statement of Work.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 420 of 450

ASSAS

mplyy with with y

afetafety sy sINFORMATION

witwiatoryatory (N(Nyy

which inwhich in

lowing stawing sta

ONLYnclosed ciclosed cns.ns.


26 2816 – 3

2.2 SAFETY SWITCHES

A. Provide NRTL-listed Heavy Duty safety switches with ratings and number of poles as indicated on the Drawings or as required by the NEC suitable for the environment into which it is being installed.

B. Each safety switch shall have an equipment ground bar.

C. Each safety switch shall have provisions for padlocking in the OFF position.

D. Safety switch enclosures shall be NEMA 4 for outdoor locations, NEMA 1, or better, for indoor dry locations, and NEMA 3R, or better, for indoor damp locations or where installed within 6 ft of a water source.

E. Manufacturer: Square D “Class 3110” or Cutler-Hammer®43 “DH” Series.

2.3 FUSES

A. Provide NEMA FU 1 and UL 248 fuses with type, voltage, and current ratings as indicated on drawings.

B. Manufacturer: Cooper/Bussmann or Mersen™44/Ferraz Shawmut.

2.4 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489 and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

B. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.

C. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings where specified on the Drawings.

1. Instantaneous trip.

2. Long- and short-time pickup levels.

3. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

4. Ground-fault pick up level, time delay, and I2t response.

D. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

43 Cutler-Hammer is a registered trademark of Eaton Corporation, Cleveland, Ohio.44 Mersen is a trademark of Mersen, Paris, France.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 421 of 450

anufacturanufactur

RMINFORMATION

INA FU awings.awings.

er/Bussmar/Bussma

EAKEREAKERSS

with ULwith UL ault currenault curre

verse timeerse timelementlemenONLY

fo

ble rating le rating ed on the ed on th


26 2816 – 4

2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.

3. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install safety switches and fuses where indicated on the Drawings, according to manufacturer’s instructions, and the NEC.

B. Ground and bond safety switches as required in Section 26 0526, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

C. Install conduits as required in Section 26 0533, “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.”

D. Install conductors as required in Section 26 0519, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals to the manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify safety switches and install warning signs and arc-flash warning labels as required in Section 26 0553, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

B. Mark floor in front of safety switches to show NEC required working space according to Section 26 0553, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”


A. Clean interior and exterior of safety switches.

B. Verify that ratings of fuses and safety switches match values indicated on the Drawings.

C. Verify proper torque of accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after installing safety switches. After completing installation, cleaning, and testing, touch-up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 422 of 450

FOR

ll sall sanufacturnufactur

d and bond and bonor EleEINFORMATION

ctricctric

as requireas require.””

quired in Squired in S

ctors and tctors and t values. values.

gnsgnONLY and aand a

Electrical lectrica

quired woquired wal Sal Sysystete


26 2816 – 5

D. Ground-Fault Performance Testing: The ground-fault protection system shall be performance tested when first installed on site. The test shall be conducted in accordance with instructions that shall be provided with the equipment. A written record of this test shall be made and shall be available to the authority having jurisdiction.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 423 of 450



26 5100 – 1

SECTION 26 5100

INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK


1. Installation of luminaires and accessories including normal lighting, emergency lighting, and exit signs.





ASTM A641 Historical Standard: ASTM A641/A641M-98 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated(Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire

B. International Code Council (ICC)


C. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)/Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)

NECA/IESNA 500 Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems (ANSI)

NECA/IESNA 502 Recommended Practice for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems (ANSI)

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)


NFPA 101® Life Safety Code®

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 424 of 450

FOR D DOCD DO

d general pgeneral pSectionSectioINFORMATION

s, ,

ents and oents and oSection. RSection. R

wise indicse ind

TM)TM)

Historical istorical ndard Spedard Spe

nized) Canized) Ca

ONLYding Codng Cod

/Illuminatluminat


26 5100 – 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Approval Required

1. Fixture data sheets and installation instructions.

2. Fixture photometrics.

B. Submit Federal Green Procurement Requirements as stated below via product data, cutsheet or other product information sheet.


A. Comply with the NEC, NFPA 101, and the IBC for components and installation.

B. Provide luminaires listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environments in which installed.

C. Use manufacturers that are experienced in manufacturing luminaires, lamps and ballasts similar to those indicated for this Project and have a record of successful in-service performance.

D. Coordinate luminaires, mounting hardware, and trim with the ceiling system.

E. The most recent edition of any relevant regulation, standard, document, or code shall be in effect, unless otherwise noted.


A. Receive, store, protect, and handle products according to the following NECA National Electrical Installation Standards:

1. NECA/IESNA 500, Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems (ANSI).

2. NECA/IESNA 502, Recommended Practice for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems (ANSI).

1.6 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. Luminaires, shall perform satisfactorily in the following service conditions:

1. Ambient temperature limits: 32 to 104°F unless indicated otherwise for specific products in Part 2.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 425 of 450

FOR

plyply

vide lumie lumatoryatory (NRT(NRyy

ents inents inINFORMATION

ww

rers that arers that athose indthose ind

nce.e.

ounting hanting ha

relevant rrelevant rnoted.noted.

G

accorccoONLYding ding

or Installir Installi


26 5100 – 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Refer to contract documents.

B. Federal Green Procurement:

1. Energy star for non-LED Light Fixtures.

2. Federal Energy Management Program for LED (light-emitting diode)Luminaires.

3. Light Bulbs:

a. Energy Star for Compact Fluorescent Lamps.

b. Energy Star and Green Proving Ground for LED Lighting.

2.2 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES

A. Furnish interior luminaries indicated on the Drawings, and as required to meet conditions of installation.

2.3 LUMINAIRE ACCESSORIES

A. Provide stud supports, mounting brackets, frames, and other accessories required for luminaire installation.

B. Use NRTL-listed T-bar safety clips for lay-in luminaires.

C. Provide each luminaire with an internal disconnecting means, Ideal Luminaire Disconnect, 3-Wire Standard, Model 103, Part Number 30-103X or equivalent.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install interior lighting system in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer’s installation instructions, approved shop drawings, and the following NECA National Electrical Installation Standards:

1. NECA/IESNA 500, Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems (ANSI).

2. NECA/IESNA 502, Recommended Practice for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems (ANSI).

B. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the project site.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 426 of 450

FOR a.a

EEINFORMATION

ne

AIRESAIRES

minaries inaries inon.on

brackets, fackets, f

y-in lumin-in lumi

ONLYecting mcting m

mber 30mber 30


26 5100 – 4

C. Mounting heights specified or indicated on the Drawings are to the bottom of the luminaire for ceiling-mounted fixtures.

D. Install slack safety wires as described below for luminaires in or on suspended ceilings.

1. Wire shall be minimum 12-gage galvanized soft annealed steel wire conforming to ASTM A641.

2. Attach wire to the building structure directly above the attachment point on the box or luminaire; make trapezes of framing channel material as required to span obstacles.

3. Secure wire(s) at each end with not less than three tight turns in 1 1/2-in.

E. Mount exit signs at heights shown on the Drawings, but with bottom of fixture not less than 6 ft., 8-in., or more than 12 ft., 0-in. above finished floor.


A. Make electrical connections, clean interiors and exteriors of luminaires, energize and test luminaires, inspect interior lighting system, and deliver spare parts in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Lighting fixtures powered by Panelboard 222S-ES-PLBD-AE shall be tested in accordance with NEC 700.3 and Section 26 0800, “Commissioning of Electrical Systems.”

1. The NEC inspector shall witness a test of the complete system upon installation.

2. A written record shall be kept and submitted to the company.

3. Testing shall be performed under maximum load.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 427 of 450

FOR

SS

unt exit sigexit sign 6 ft., 8n 6 ft., 8

INFORMATION

CONTROCONTR

onnectionsnnectionsnspect intspect int

acturer’s iacturer’s

PanelboaPanelbod Section 2Section 2

a test of ta test o

ONLYtted to theed to th

ad.ad.


28 3111 – 1

SECTION 28 3111

FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Scope of work includes modifying the existing 222-S Laboratory Building fire alarm system to accommodate the remodeled configuration of the affected space. Existing signaling and notification appliances may be reused if suitable for the application and compatible with the modified fire alarm system configuration, otherwise provide new devices as necessary.

B. Section Includes:

1. Manual fire-alarm boxes.

2. System smoke detectors.

3. Heat detectors.

4. Notification appliances.

C. Design, submittals, installation, and acceptance testing shall meet requirements of NFPA 72, TFC-ESHQ-FP-STD-02, and MSC-FP-RD-7899.




A. Hanford Documents

MSC-FP-RD-7899 Fire Protection System Testing/Inspection/Maintenance/Discrepancies

TFC-ESHQ-FP-STD-02 Fire Protection Design Criteria

HNF-36174 DOE Fire Protection Handbook-Hanford Chapter


NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 428 of 450

FOR

wiswis

tion In Inclucl

anual fanual INFORMATION

rere

smoke dsmoke d

rs.

ances.ances.

, and acceand acce2, and MS, and MS

TANDARTANDAR

cludinudiONLY

ng Gng Gy to this y to this

m part of tpart of tose curreose curre


28 3111 – 2

NFPA 70 Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace

NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code

C. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET)


UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems

UL 521 Standard for Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

UL 864 Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and finishes.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system.

1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. Design drawings shall meet NFPA 72 (2016 Edition) and HNF-36174, Rev. 6.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring.

4. Detail assembly and support requirements.

5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits.

6. Include battery-size calculations.

7. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 429 of 450

FOR6464

LSLS

a:INFORMATION

For eaFor e

truction duction d

ies, operaties, opera

m.

d required requirer in NinONLY

NFPANFPA36174, R6174, R

d attachmattachm

dimenim


28 3111 – 3

8. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector.

9. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams.

C. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.

b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level III minimum.

c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Acceptance Test Procedure:

1. Prepare and execute acceptance test procedure for the completed fire alarm system. The acceptance test procedure shall be:

a. Drafted using the Hanford Fire Department’s template.

b. Approved by the Hanford Fire Marshal and WRPS Fire Protection.

c. Executed only after operational testing of all fire alarm system components and devices has been successfully completed. Obtain written approval of Hanford Fire Marshal of completed operational testing and associated documentation required by NFPA 13, including Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Operation and Maintenance Data shall include the following:

a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 430 of 450

FOR a.a.

b.b NN

INFORMATION

LicensLicen

ProcedureProcedure

ecute acceecute acce acceptancceptan

e Hanforde Hanford

ford Fire Mford Fire

onal testional testeen enONLY

succesucceMarshal oMarshal

on requiredrequireest Certificst Certif


28 3111 – 4

b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment. Each conductor shall be numbered at every junction point with indication of origination and termination points.

d. Riser diagram.

e. Device addresses.

f. Record copy of site-specific software.

g. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following:

i. Equipment tested.

ii. Frequency of testing of installed components.

iii. Frequency of inspection of installed components.

iv. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.

v. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

h. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.

I. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files.

3. Device address list.

4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 431 of 450

FOR f.f.

g.g PP

INFORMATION

InspInspinclude include

EquipEquip

requencyrequencyyy

ncyncy of ins of inyy

ts and recs and re

trainingrainingONLYance relatence rela


28 3111 – 5

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level III technician.


Not used.


A. Interruption of Existing Fire Alarm System: Do not interrupt fire alarm system to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging suitable notifications according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of fire alarm system.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire alarm system without Construction Manager’s written permission.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm system equipment and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance Service Agreement.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The existing fire alarm system being modified is a noncoded, UL 864 certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission and horn/strobe evacuation.

B. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.

C. Enclosures, Conduit/Raceway and Wiring/Cable: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 432 of 450

FOR NotNotpropospropos

o not po not INFORMATION

rocrocuction Muction M

ufacturer ufacturer s that fthat fail f

ment and ment andent.nt.

date of Sate of SONLYed, Ud


28 3111 – 6

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:

1. Manual stations.

2. Heat detectors.

3. Smoke detectors.

4. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.

2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators.

3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.

4. Activate voice/alarm communication system.

5. Record events in the system memory.

6. Indicate device in alarm on the graphic annunciator.

C. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.

2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices.

3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control module, remote annunciator, printer interface, or Ethernet module.

4. User disabling of zones or individual devices.

5. Loss of communication with any panel on the network.

D. System Supervisory Signal Actions:

1. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators.

2. After a time delay of 90 seconds, transmit a supervisory signal to the alarm receiving station.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 433 of 450

FOR CoC

IdIdentifyentifyyemote anmote aINFORMATION

n

mit an alarmmit an alar

ce/alarm calarm c

the syhe systemste

m on the gm on the g

l be bybe by on onyy

desigdesigONLY

natenate

rmrm--initiatinitiat

or, inpur, inp


28 3111 – 7

2.3 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 864. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.

2.4 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.

2. Detectors shall be two-wire type.

3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status.

b. Device type.

c. Present average value.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 434 of 450

FOR SMOKSMOK

l Requirel Requir

INFORMATION

yy with Uwith Uyy

shall be twshall be tw

sable Modsable Modtrouble) toouble) to

or and assor and assodule thatdule that

connectioonnecti

quire resuire reeraer ONLY

tion.ion.

indicatinndicatin


28 3111 – 8

d. Present sensitivity selected.

e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

f. No test equipment required for sensitivity testing.

C. Ionization Smoke Detector:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status.

b. Device type.

c. Present average value.

d. Present sensitivity selected.

e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

f. No test equipment required for sensitivity testing.

2.5 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.

2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Monaco FACU NAC is conventional, use Class B.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 435 of 450

FOR

s

a.a

DDINFORMATION

evev

Present avPresent av

nt sensitivsensitiv

ge (normage (norm

ent requirent require

: Comply: Comply

ONLYmmunicmmunic

a fixed temfixed teme unleun


28 3111 – 9

B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

C. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.

D. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-in. high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output:

2. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.

3. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.

4. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined with guards in place.

5. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.

6. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.

7. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature, humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before installation begins.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before installation.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 436 of 450

ble Nble Nh clear orh clear o

late. Theate. The

INFORMATION

LLiight Ought Ou

10 cd, sele10 cd, sel

mounted umounted

to prevento prevends in placeds in place

l patterpattern, sn,r

screw tscrew tONLYed.d.


28 3111 – 10

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72 (2016 Edition), NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems."

1. Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be replaced.

2. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from construction dust, debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to manufacturer's written storage instructions.

B. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78-in. above the finished floor.

1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices.

C. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes:

1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60-in. of the exit doorway.

2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color.

3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42-in. and 48-in. above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

D. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with the "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with the "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for heat-detector spacing.

3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet.

4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling areas shall be determined according to Annex Ain NFPA 72.

5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 36-in. from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 437 of 450

FOR tall walltall wall

inished flished fl

mplymp INFORMATION

withwith

arm Boxearm Boxe

l firefi -alarm-alar

arm box oarm box o

al fire-alarl fire-aladevices shvices sh

ONLYectors" secctors" se

ctor spacintor spac

tion ti


28 3111 – 11

6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12-in. from any part of a lighting fixture and not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting.

E. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction. Cover shall remain in place except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover.

F. Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installedwithin a dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm causes the alarm in all smoke alarms to sound.

G. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6-in. below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

H. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6-in. below the ceiling. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 PATHWAYS

A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in non-accessible locations may be routed exposed.

1. Exposed pathways located less than 96-in. above the floor shall be installed per NEC.

B. Pathways shall be installed per NEC.

C. Exposed pathways shall be painted red enamel.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm associated circuits; comply with NEC.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 438 of 450

FOR ll bell be

chanism chanism wise indiwise indi

armrmINFORMATION

ndicndicast ast 66--in. in. b

indicatedndicate

eilings anilings an

ess than ess than 9

ONLYC


28 3111 – 12


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

D. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is required by the "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.a.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 439 of 450

FOR a.a

DDtINFORMATION

he he

ComplyComply wwyyspection" spection"

er in NFPAin NFPAthe installthe install

plply y with twith n, Testingn, Testing

e public oppublic ons. Perforns. Perf

Tyypeey 2 r2 rONLY

eq

erating merating

ode accoode acco


28 3111 – 13

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 440 of 450

FOR

m.m.

INFORMATION ONLY


31 2300 – 1

SECTION 31 2300

EXCAVATION AND FILL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Excavation and fill.

B. Finish Grading and Stabilization.

C. Field Inspections.




A. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction

B. Hanford Documents

TFC-ENG-STD-06 Design Loads for Tank Farm Facilities

TFC-ESHQ-S-STD-30 Implementation of DOE-0344, Excavating, Trenching, and Shoring

C. Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT)

WSDOT M41-10 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, Section 9-03.9 (3), “Crushed Surfacing Base Course.”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. See the Contract Statement of Work for submittal procedures.


1. Shoring Plan (if required): Design of shoring shall be sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Washington.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 441 of 450

FORInIn

D DOCUDOCU

eneral pneral picac INFORMATION

ion Seion S

ts and othes and othction. Reon. R


s (CFR)s (CFR)

etyy and H and Hyy

n Loadn LoaONLY

s fof

ation of Dtion of d Shoringd Shorin

OT)OT


31 2300 – 2

2. Competent person: Before excavation and in writing, submit identity of individual designated Competent Person as defined in 29 CFR 1926.650 and as required by the approved safety and health program.


A. Deliverable Documentation: The following documents and records, required by this Section, shall be delivered to Construction Document Control.

Document Paragraph

Excavation Permit 1.5.A.1

1.5 PERMITS

A. Obtain and conspicuously post the following permits before starting work under this Section.

1. Excavation Permit: Use TFC-ESHQ-S-STD-30, “Excavation Permit Form” (Form A-7400-373).

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Do not place backfill or fill on frozen ground.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Use materials free of frozen particles, lumps, organic matter, and trash for backfill and fill, bedding, and stabilization.

B. Backfill and Fill: Obtain from excavation or locations designated by the Company.

1. Backfill using excavation (in-situ) material or 3/4 minus crushed rock.

2. Use of any other imported material will require Project/System Engineer approval.

3. CDF: See Section 03 3000.

C. Base Course: Top course conforming to WSDOT M41-10, Section 9-03.9 (3), “Crushed Surfacing Base Course.”

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 442 of 450

FOR in and conand con

tion.tion. INFORMATION

ation Peration PerForm Arm A-7-7

l on frozenon froze

ps, organs, organONLYons designns desig

inusi


31 2300 – 3

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Excavation shall be defined to mean any hand digging greater than 12 in. in depth, or machine digging. These requirements constitute the need for an “Excavation Permit” (Form A-7400-373). If an excavation permit is not required, this Section does not apply.

B. Notify Construction Field Lead before excavation.

C. Locate and expose underground utilities using subsurface scanning and hand tools.

D. If cultural properties (e.g., bones and artifacts) are encountered, stop excavation and notify the Company. Obtain approval before resuming excavation.

E. If unexpected debris is encountered, stop excavation, clear personnel to 30 ft from debris, and notify the Project/System Engineer/WRPS Construction Representative. Obtain approval before resuming excavation.

F. Excavation of contaminated soil will be administered in accordance with contractor procedures and programs.

G. Excavate earth and establish protective systems in accordance with the approved safety and health program.

3.2 CONTOURS AND ELEVATIONS

A. Excavation for Common Earthwork: Excavate as needed for general purpose, or as shown on Drawings.

B. In-Situ Soils

1. Salvage excavated soil for use as backfill and fill material.

2. Dispose of contaminated and excess soil in accordance with Construction Waste Management Plan.

3. If stabilization is required because of excavation, finish subgrade 3-in. below elevations shown on Drawings.

C. Shoring

1. If conditions require shoring, a Shoring Plan shall be submitted to WRPS for approval. Reference TFC-ESHQ-S-STD-30 for responsibilities and implementation requirements.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 443 of 450

FOR cultural pcultural p

notifyti the they

cted dcted dINFORMATION

bribritifytify the Pthe yy

Obtain a Obtain a

minated sonated sond programnd program

protectiveprotectiv

vate as nate as nONLYmaterialmaterial


31 2300 – 4

2. Design of shoring shall be in accordance with TFC-ENG-STD-06, Section 3.7.

3.3 BACKFILL AND FILL - FOUNDATIONS AND SLABS

A. Remove debris and organic material from area to be backfilled or filled.

B. Do not backfill by sluicing or flooding unless written approval is obtained from Construction Field Lead.

C. Compact sub-base by 3-4 passes of vibratory plate compactor.

D. Use CDF for backfill within building footprint so that no compaction is necessary.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 444 of 450

INFORMATION ONLY


41 2231 – 1

SECTION 41 22 31

FREE STANDING JIB CRANE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Free standing, manually operated, jib crane with rotating boom assembly.

B. Related sections:

1. Section 03 30 00, “Cast-in-Place Concrete.” Concrete foundation to receive free standing jib crane.




A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

Manual of Steel Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or

Construction, Part 5 ASTM A490 Bolts

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

ANSI B30.11 Monorails and Underhung Cranes


ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel

ASTM A325 Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

ASTM A490 Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

ASTM F1554 Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105 ksi Yield Strength

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 445 of 450

SeSreceivrecei

CUMECUMEINFORMATION

NN

provisionprovisionvisionision 01 S01 S

others refothers re Referenc Refere

cated.cated.

ruction (Auction (A

tion for Stion for S

BoltsoltsONLYg Cranesg Cranes


41 2231 – 2


AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code

E. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

Specification 1910.179 Overhead and Gantry Cranes

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide:

1. Product data for crane and accessories. Describe capacities, performance, operation, and applied forces to foundation.

2. Shop drawings showing crane configuration, dimensions, and construction and installation details.

3. Copy of warranty required by Paragraph 1.6 for review by Owner

4. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

5. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual.


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in designing and manufacturing cranes with 25 years successful experience.

B. Installer: Company experienced in assembly and installation of cranes and acceptable to crane manufacturer.

C. Crane shall be designed, fabricated, and installed in accordance with ANSI B30.11 and OSHA 1910-179.

D. Base crane structural design on live load capacity plus 15 percent for hoist and trolley weight and 25 percent for impact.

E. Perform welding by certified operators in accordance with AWS D14.1.

F. Bolted connections shall be in accordance with torque tightening procedures specified in AISC Manual, Part 5.

G. Clearly label crane with rated load capacity. Place label at height and location easily read from floor level and loading position.


Not Used.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 446 of 450

FORShop Shopand instaand inst

INFORMATION

of warraof war

urer's insturer's in

operationoperation

zing in desng in de

blbly and iny and in

ONLYiin accordn accord

percenerc


41 2231 – 3


A. Crane shall consist of free standing mast requiring only foundation support and a rotating boom.

1. Rotation:

a. Primary boom: 160 degrees.

2. Crane shall be designed for minimum effort manual rotation.

3. Boom shall not drift when at rest.

4. Maximum deflection at boom end: 1/150 span based on capacity plus 15 percent for hoist and trolley weight.

B. Crane shall be designed to withstand:

1. Crane and hoist dead load.

2. Live load capacity equal to net rated hook load: 500 pounds

3. Inertia forces from crane and load movement.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Provide 10 year warranty for crane to cover defects in materials and workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Gorbel, Inc., P.O. Box 593, Fishers, New York 14453-0593; 800-828-0086; www.gorbel.com.

2.2 FREE STANDING JIB CRANE

A. Type: Free standing, insert mounted, [manually operated,] [motorized,] steel jib crane with rotating boom, and other accessories; Model No. FS 350 – 14 mast diameter in inches – W16x45 boom as manufactured by Gorbel, Inc.

B. Span: 13 feet

C. Max overall crane height: 12 feet - 2 inches

D. Construction: Fabricate from ASTM A36 steel sections with finished ends and surfaces.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 447 of 450

FORperper

shall be dshall be d

ne INFORMATION

and hoiand ho

capacitcapacity ey e

rom craneom crane

ne to coverto cove

ONLY33-0593; 80593; 8


41 2231 – 4

1. Mast: Stationary steel pipe, perpendicular to boom. Equip mast top with plate and pivot pin to receive head assembly.

2. Boom: Horizontal, wide flange steel beam bolted to head assembly and designed for hoist trolley traveling on bottom flange. Reinforce with cap channel as required for lateral stability. Equip boom with stops to limit movement of trolley.

3. Head assembly: Welded steel plate and channel fabrication fitted over mast, bolted to boom, and designed to transfer boom load to mast and to rotate. Assembly shall allow for installation of head prior to boom attachment and provide maximum hoist lift.

a. Top pivot bearing assembly: Designed to connect head assembly to mast and transfer load from boom. Weight bearing channel connecting sides of head assembly shall contain tapered roller bearings allowing easy rotation.

b. Retaining pin: Inserted through mast pivot pin above weight bearing channel to prevent accidentally dislodging head assembly. Cranes without retaining pin are not acceptable.

c. Trunnion roller assembly: Designed to rotate around mast and transmit moment force from boom to mast. Provide trunnion rollers with tapered bearings held in steel channel with 1-in. diameter bolts. Masts less than 18-in. diameter shall have 2 rollers and larger masts shall have 4 rollers. Assembly shall rotate around mast with full roller face contact. Roller surface shall be sufficiently large to prevent cutting into mast. Cranes with small rollers or cams requiring wear band on mast are not acceptable.

E. Insert mounting: Provide square steel base plate welded to mast for anchoring mast to concrete foundation cast below floor slab. Base plate is then embedded with concrete. There shall be no exposed base plate or gussets.

1. Base plate size: 3-in. larger on all sides than mast diameter.

2. Base plate to be installed on foundation with anchor bolts of number, size, and pattern as indicated on drawings.

2.3 MOTORIZED OPERATION

A. Provide electric motor chain hoist with pendent operator control.

B. Hoist Type: 1 Ton, single speed application, with torque limiter and gear reducer.

C. Electrical: Power connection to be 115 volt, single phase, 60 Hz, Motor shall be integral to hoist and fan cooled with thermal overload protection.

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 448 of 450

FOR aa

bbINFORMATION

RetaininRetaininearing aring chach

nes withounes witho

roller assoller assment forcment forc

ered beariered beariasts ts less tess t

l have 4 rohave 4 roe contact.e contact.

t cutting t cuttingr banbanONLY

d on d on

welded to mwelded to mase plate ise plate i

ussets.ussets.


41 2231 – 5

D. Controls: Pre-wired pendant controls with minimum NEMA 12 enclosure.

2.4 SHOP FINISHING

A. Steam wash steel crane components with iron phosphate solution and apply yellow baked enamel finish.

B. Provide spray can of matching color, air-drying paint for field touch-up.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate provision of crane with:

1. Design and construction of reinforced concrete footings as detailed on Drawings and specified in other sections. Ensure that accurate crane applied forces and anchor bolt patterns are provided for foundation design.

2. Provision of electrical supply, conduit, wiring, disconnect switch, and other electrical components for powering electrically operated hoist.

B. Prior to installation:

1. Verify reinforced concrete foundations have cured 7 days minimum. Ensure that foundations have cured 28 days minimum prior to using crane to full capacity.

2. Verify type and location of power supply.

3. Inventory parts. Verify all required components are available and undamaged.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install crane and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and shop drawings.

B. Do not modify crane components in any manner without advance, written approval by crane manufacturer.

C. Clearances for moving crane components:

1. 6-in. minimum vertical clearance from any overhead obstruction.

2. 4-in. minimum horizontal clearance from any lateral obstruction.

D. Mast: Cover base plate foundation area with 1-in. grout. Set mast into place and completely seat base plate in grout. Use plumb bob with 60-in. minimum line to

RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 449 of 450

FOR

dindin

DesigDesiDrawingDrawingpplied fplied INFORMATION

orcor

on of elecn of electrical comrical com

ncrete founcrete fouhave curehave cure

er supplr supply.y

ompompONLYnentsnent

urer's rer


41 2231 – 6

plumb mast. Check alignment at 60 degree points. When mast is plumb and grout cured, tighten anchor bolts to full compression of lock washer. Cast second reinforced concrete foundation around mast and flush with adjacent floor slab.

E. Head assembly: Install head assembly with electrical bottom entry collector on mast. Bolt motor operator to back side of head assembly. Make electricalconnections. Adjust rollers for smooth, full contact rotation.

F. Boom: Set boom on head assembly attach with bolts and other manufacturer provided hardware. Level boom with shims or adjusting hex nuts.

G. End stops: In conjunction with hoist trolley installation, bolt end stops to boom ends.


A. Move boom through entire travel to ensure boom is clear of obstructions, rotates freely, and does not drift. Verify motorized operation, controls, and limit switches function properly.

B. Inspect installed crane. Verify all bolts are tight and lock washers fully compressed. Verify mast is plumb and boom is level.

C. Field test crane and accessories for operating functions. Ensure crane movement is smooth and proper. Adjust as required and correct deficiencies.

D. Clean surfaces. If necessary, touch-up paint damage, scratches, and blemishes with manufacturer provided matching paint.

E. Protect cranes from other construction operations.


RPP-SPEC-62050 Rev.00 9/21/2018 - 10:17 AM 450 of 450

FOR UALITYUALITY

boom throboom thrd doesdoINFORMATION

nnotoerlrly.y.

rane. Veriane. Verimast is pluast is plu

ories for ories for oas requireas requir

up paint dup paintpaint.paint.

ations.ations.ONLY

Release Stamp DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORM · RPP-SPEC-62050, Rev. 0 iv DIVISION 22 –...

Documents

Transcript of Release Stamp DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORM · RPP-SPEC-62050, Rev. 0 iv DIVISION 22 –...